Mil STD 1397C

Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com on 2009-07-25T15:19:13.
●
I
MIL-STD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
SUPERSEDING
MIL-STO-1397B(NAVY)
3 March 1989
(See 6.3)
MILITARY STANDARD
I INPUT / OUTPUT INTERFACES,
STANDARD DIGITAL DATA ,
NAW SYSTEMS
10 AMSC WA
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A Approved for public release;
AREA fvlCCR
dismbution is unfimited
I
MIL-STD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY

NAVAL SEA SYSTEMS COMMAND
Washington, DC 20362-5101
fnpuL/ CWUt fnterfacc.s, Standard Digital Data. Naw SYSMIIS
1. _fhisbliliw Standard is approved for me by h Nav~s= SYSEXIIS COIIIIXW@ @.W’MEIIIof

tbe Navy, and is available for use by all De.pamnms and Agencies of tie Department of Dsfense.
2. Bcmfickd cnmmem (recommendations, additions, deletions) and any pertinent data which may
be of use in improving IMs docnmmt sboufd be addressed LO
COMMANDER
NAVAL SEA SYSTEMS COMMAND
SEA 03R42
2531 fEFFERSON DAVtS HIGHWAY
ARLINGTON VA 22242-5160
Use the self-addressed SIandardizmion Document hnpmvement Prnpod (DD Form 1426) appearing
at tie end of his dnmnem or by letter.
MfL-STD- 1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
FORWARD
‘Ilis standard provides guidance for equipment desigurm as well as system engioeers, nod is
limited tn iulcrfmc cbmacmi.sties - physimf, functional, arrdelectrical. This srnodsrd dues nnt
dcsaibc the irrputinutput (f/O) of my equipmmL By specifying fnmtinnaf inrerfncem@mnents,
rfds s~dard dors no! specrfy tbe speaflc srstcrfam type req~ements for my system application:
rather u describes functional characteristics of tbe interface slgnnls.
Appendix A provides information regarding intermrmection requiremmts of this standard.
.@-mdix A contains the gmerrrf pbifosophy of the UO interfaces as specifkd in this srandard.
Appendix B contains spminf rcquireruents essnciatcd with CP-d42AlB and CP-789 compukxs.
Appendix C provides design guidance for Type E interface including: burst Uausfcr mnde,
error detection, arrd confomrance trws.
For the Type K interface, appurdis D defiies the Type K imsrfam command seL
Appendix E provides desigu guidamx for Type K imerfmc.
111
MIL-STD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
Page Intentionally Blank.
iv
Mff/sTD-1397c(sfi)
1 June 1995
● CONTENTS
Eye
Paragraph 1. S~PE .........................................................................................................
1.1 Smpe ......y................................................................................................ I
1.2 Clmsficafion ............................................................................................ 1
2. REFERENCED DOCUMENTS.................................................................... 1
2.1 Government documws ............................................................................ 1
2.1.1 Specifications and swtids ......................................................................
2.1.2 Oher Government d~nE ................................................................... ;
Chher pubkations.. ................................................................................... 2
:: Order of ptienm ................................................................................. 3
3. D~~IONS...: ......................................................................................... 3
3.1 C&mat defmipons .................................................................................... 3
3.1.1 E.xtemaffunchon (13FJk ...................................................................... 3
3.1.2 External iutampt (ED &M ...........?........................................................... 3
3.1.3 Full duplex shauuel ..................................................................................
3.1.4 f%rctd m.d ...................................................................................... ;
3.1.5 InPUL........................................................................................................ 3
3.1.6 foput dare (ID)..........................................................................................
3.1.7 fsrputluuqlutwo) ...................................................................................... ;
3.1.8 Odd ptity ................................................................................................ 3
3.1.9 output ......................................................................................................
3.1.10 output dats (oD) ...................................................................................... :
3.1.11 Singfe puked slgoafs................................................................................. 3
3.1.12 TbrIllr::put ............................................................................................ 3
3.1.13 ... ................................................................................................ 4
3.1.14 Unidir@io@ @munel (simplex) .............................................................. 4
3.2 Type E defmoons .................................................................................... 4
32.1 Burst transfer ............................................................................................ 4
3.2.2 Channel .................................................................................................... 4
3.2.3 Cnnummd/ktrernrptwurd (Cm ................................................................ 4
3.2.4 Control . .......................................................................................... 4
3.2.4.1 Sourse Smtus(s0s) cmmol . ............................................................. 4
3.2.4.2 Sink status (S1S) control tim .................................................................. 4
3.2.5 fofomration frames @s) ........................................................................... 4
3.2.6 seriaf data l-ate..........................................................................................
3.2.7 Siugfe word transfer (.SWT)...................................................................... :
32.8 sink. ......................................................................................................... 4
3.2.9 Source ...................................................................................................... 4
3.2.10 system iurcgrily feaurc.s (Ml%).......... .................................................... 4
3.3 Type J deftitions ................................................................................. . 4
3.3.1 At@nmtiun.(opud) ................................................................................. 4
3.3.2 Bitemor muo~ER) ................................................................................. 4
3.3.3 Connector plug ......................................................................................... 4
3.3.4 Connector rempmcle................................................................................. 5
3.3.5 Fikr ......................................................................................................... 5
3.3.6 Fiber optic ceble .......................................................................................
3.3.7 Graded tidex ............................................................................................ i
3.3.8 Mulum&e ................................................................................................ 5
3.3.9 Opticuf far] L@ ........................................................................................ 5
3.3.10 Opticaf rise m ........................................................................................ 5
I
MIL-STD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
CONTENTS
Ply
Paragraph 3.3.11
3.3.12 R.iver.(optiid) ......................................................................................
3.3.13 Sncctral width Fulf Width Half Maximum (FWHM)................................... ;
3.3.14 T“asmittcr (optiral) ................................................................................. 5
3.4 j~&;edefmitions .................................................................................... 5
3.4.1 rneasumd composite DC voltuge (VAMP...................................... 5
3.4.2 scsI.I ....................................................................................................... 5
3.4.3 5
3.4.4 Smb ..........................................................................................................
3.5 A=onya ................................................................................................. 2
4. GENERAL WQ~W~~S ..................................................................... 7
4.1 f/O cmmol rutd date signal m~gories ........................................................ 7
4.2 Parallel ,iitcrface physical reqtiemnw ..................................................... 7
4.3 Grounding ................................................................................................ 7
4.4 Progranumug considerauons ..................................................................... 7
4.4.) PeriphexaJquipmnt ................................................................................
4.4.2 futercauqrnter (IC).................................................................................... i
4.4.3 Ic tiels ............................................................................................... 7
4.4.4 IC dmcnut interrupt .................................................................................. 8
5. DfZfAfLED ~Q~~NTS .................................................................... 8

5.1 parallel iutcrfaee functional req@mnB .................................................. 8
5.1.1 Caregow I, seq~nce nf f/O evenu ............................................................. 8
5.1.1.1 output commumcauon ............................................................................. 8
5.1.1.1.1
5.1.1.1.2
5.1.1.1.3
Trausfcr nf a buffer EF cude word............................................................
Transfer of a fnrced EF cnrfe wor&...........................................................
Transfer of OD .........................................................................................
:
9
0’
5.1.1.2 Input cOmmiatiOn ................................................................................ 9
5.1.1.2.1 Trausfcr nf an El code word with EE ....................................................... 10
5.1.1.2.2 Transfer nf au EI code word without the HE... ......................................... 10
5.1.1.2.3 Trausfer of D ........................................................................................... 11
5.1.1.3 Externally specified iudexing (ESf) .......................................................... 11
5.1.1.3.1 EN fD butier ........................................................................................... 11
5.1.1.3.2 !2S1OD buffer .......................................................................................... 12
5.1.1.4 Externally spccifkd addressing (ESA) ...................................................... 12
5.1.2 Categnry U, sequence of UO eveuts ........................................................... 12
5.1.2.1 Transfer of buffered commaud wor& ....................................................... 13
5.1.2.2 Transfer of a forced command word......................................................... 13
5.1.2.3 Transfer of data ........................................................................................ 14
5.1.3 CatcgOV m, sequence of UO evm6 .......................................................... 14
5.2 Pmallel intcrfacc, elecmd ........................................................................ 14
5.2.1 Type A ktiace ....................................................................................... 15
5.2.1.1 Type A tig .......................................................................................... 15
5.2.1.1.1 El when IDR line N set .............................................................................. 15
5.2.1.1.2 fDR wh:n EfR lie is seL........................................................................... 15
5.2.1;2 Type A umxface, cUculL........................................................................... 1s
5.2.1.2.1
;:2.; .2.2
Type A input ~lifiti .............................................................................
Type A nutpul line nnd cnnoul line tivem ...............................................
15
15
I
Type B iuuxfacc ....................................................................................... 16
5.2.2.1 Type B ting ........................................................................................... 16
5.2.2.1.1 fnput timiug, periphe@ equipment interrupts ........................................... 16
5.2.2.2 Type B interface, cumIt ............................................................................ 16
5.2.2.2.1 Type B input ~tifier .............................................................................. 16
5.2.2.2.2 Type B outpu! line and cnntrol line drivers ............................................... 17
vi
I
MIL-STD- 1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
● CONTENTS
F
Paragraph 5.2.3 Type C interface .......................................................................................
5.2.3.1 Twe C tifig ................................y. ....................................................... 17
5.2.3.1.1 Type C @put titig, penpherrd eqrnprsmt iatrarupta ...............................
5.2.3.2 Type C urm’face, cUat ............................................................................ ;;
5.2.3.2.1 Type C input amphticr...................... ........................................................ 18
;:::.2.2 Type C output Iioe aod control liae drivers ............................................... 18
Type H titiwe ....................................................................................... 19
5.2.4.1 T~ H ti&g ................. ................. ..........y............................................ 19
5.2.4.1.1 Type H ,tiput timing, ~npherat eqrrspmemrmcsrupIs............................... 19
5.2.4.2 Type H ~tcd%c, CWmL........................................................................... 19
5.3 TW D ~ti . ....................................................................................... 19
5.3.1 Type D ammface,physl~ ......................................................................''. 19
5.3.2 Type D interface, ticuond ...................................................................... 19
5.3.2.1 cOOuOl.fms ..........................................................................................
5.3.2.1.1 Reshicqons for mquH .......................................................................... ;:
S::;.1.2 Re.mictsons for pphti ......................................................................... 20
Data word fo.t ..................................................................................... 20
5.3.4 Category I output chamrel opemunn ......................................................... 20
5.3.4.1 EF transfer Xquenm ................................................................................. 20
5.3.4.2 Foxed EF msfm .................................................................................... 20
5.3.4.3 OD word ymsfer seqrence ....................................................................... 21
5.3.4.4 Peripheral not ready oWmUon................................................................ 21
5.3.5 category I repot rhaerael OpemuOn........................................................... 21
5.3.5.1 ID word oansfer ~mnm ......................................................................... 21
5.3.5.2 Ef wsfer.qumm.X ..........v................................................................... 21
5.3.5.3 computer not ready OW~fion................................................................
5.3.6 Cawgnry ff chaaael OpemuOn................................................................... :;
5.3.6.1 IC EF SCqll~LZ......................................................................................... 22
5.3.6.2 IC forced EF ............................................................................................. 22
5.3.6.3 lC OD ~qum.m ......... ............................................................................... 22
5.3.6.4 IC “nnt seady operarmn........................................................................... 22
5.3.7 category m .............................................................................................. 22
5.3.8 Type D chaonel timing (categories I, ff. md Id . ..................................... 22
5.3.9 Type D electrical imerface (categories 1, U, and M) .................................. 23
5.3.9.1 Temnaunn .............................................................................................. 23
5.3,9.2 Bipo~ puke. ........................................ .................................................... 23
5.3.9.3 Swiwharglevek ......................................................................................... 23
5.4 Type E iourfacc ....................................................................................... 23
5.4.1 . ...................................................................................................... 23
5.4.1.1 Control frames.............................. ............................................................ 23
5.4.1.1.1 Source status control f. ....................................................................... 23
::::~:.2 Sink staqrs control f.e ........................................................................... 24
fnfnrmarson &~s ................................................................................... 24
5.4.1.2.1 SWT iofornx+on _ ............................................................................ 24
5.4. I.2.2 Barw traosfer,tnfomuauon tim ............................................................... 24
5.4.1.2.3 parity genemuOn....................................................................................... 24
5.4.2 hO[OcOl.................................................................................................... 24
5.4.2.1 Forced cored ...................................................................................... 24
5.4.2.2 Transfer Squence .................................................................................... 25
5.4.3 Tifing ......................................................................................................
5.4.3.1 Reiaidation ............................................................................................... i;
5.4.3.2 Sink respon%.................................................................................... . 25
5.4.3.3 kmiverr WOye~ . ................................................................................... 25
5.4.3.4 Modulau,on umng .................................................................................... 25
5.4.4 Modulation .............................................................................................. 26
vii
MIL-STD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
CONTENTS
~
Paragraph 5.4.4.1 Synchronization .......Y...............................................................................
5.4.5 Ele.cuiealcharac!er$ucs ............................................................................ 26
5.4.5.1 Outfm *ctensucs ................................................................................ ;:
5.4.5.1.1 output pOwer............................................................................................
5.4.5.1.2 Output wayefom ...................................................................................... ;:
5.4.5.1.3 output rrorae........... ..................................................................................
5.4.5.1.4 Output wavcfo~. dlswmon ....................................................................... 26
5.4.5.2 Jrrput charac~n;ucs .................................................................................. 26
5.4.5.2.1 blpUl co~ublhty..:..: .............................................................................. ;:
5.4.5.2.2 RecAver input *nsluwty ...........................................................................
5.4.5.2.3 Recekcr pUfSCwdti .................................................................................. 26
5.4.5.2.4 Imped~cc ................................................................................................ 27
5.4.5.2.5 Refl=u?ns ............................Y.................................................................. 27
5.4.5.2.6 Cumpmte systcm,ch~el nmse ............................................................... 27
$$.4..:7 Common +! rej~uon ........................................................................... 27
kti= ewurts ....................................................................................... 27
5.4.5:4 Gro~tiug ................................................................................................ 27
5.4.6 pbYsIcd lnttiace ...................................................................................... 27
5.4.6.1 Cable ........................................................................................................ 27
5.4.6.2 COnnxlOm..... ........................................................................................... ;:
.5.4.7 System irttegrrty feature-s(Sm5)..............................................................
5.4.7.1 Source tiHuL ......................................................................................... 28
5.4.7.2 sink .Out ............................................................................................. 28
5.4.7.2.1 :ink tirrx.o:t perind .................................................................................. 28
5.4.7.2.2 Sos Sgrt mdc ...................................................................................... ;:
5.4.7.3 :$ p~; ............................................................................................... 28
5.4.7.4 ...............................................................................................
5.4.7.5 Sink iUegafcOnfitiOn................................................................................ 29 m
5.4.7.6 Control frame vafi+tion ........................................................................... 29
5.4.8 Type E channel mgtsUK ........................................................................... 29
5.4.8.1 Cframrelstatus re~.wer and mdlmmm ........................................................ 29
5.4.8.2 Chaunel mnde ~gutir ..............................................................................
5.4.9 Solrrdsink Ioglc flow .............................................................................. ;;
5.5 Type.F ti@tiau ........................................................................................
S.6 Type G inMacc ....................................................................................... :8
5.7 Type J interface ........................................................................................ 30
5.7.1 Framing and ~wd ................................................................................ ~~
5.7.2 Modnlat!on ...............................................................................................
5.7.3 Titig ...................................................................................................... 30
5.7.4 Opticaf r*.~w ................................................................................. 23
5.7.4.1 Juterface defiruuun ...................................................................................
5.7.4.2 Cable plant msetily ................................................................................. ~~
5.7.4.2.1 Optical fiber..............................................................................................
5.7.4.2.2 OpticaJ cable ............................................................................................. j:
5.7.4.2.3 OpticaJ cable lengfi ..................................................................................
5.7.4.2,4 Fiber optic irrte~a~ cOmwtOr.................................................................. 30
5.7.5 Trarrsrmtterupucaf mtdace ...................................................................... 30
5.7.5.1 Optid power OU~UL................................................................................ j:
5.7.5.2 Opticaf ouQut.wavefOm ...........................................................................
5.7.5.3 Emitted rudiatro: ...................................................................................... 31
5.7.6 Receiver opucaf rnterface.......................................................................... 31
5.7.6.J Jrrpulopucaf wavefo~ ............................................................................. 31
;;;6.2 Receiver bit error muo ............................................................................. 31
Type, K interface ....................................................................................... 31
5.8.1 PhysmJ Ck~CEtiSti= .............................................................................. 31
0
\’Ill
MSL-STD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
● CONTENTS
*
Paragraph 5.8.1.1 PhysicaJ description ..................................................................................
5.8.1.2 Cable requirc+nents................................................................................... 31
5.8.1.2.1 Extcreal dlmg ........................................................................................ 31
5.8.1.2.2 fmcmel @bting.................y............v........................................................ 31
5.8.1.2.3 Cabling elecuic=dc&yectcnsuc r~mcuOn ................................................. 31
5.8.1.2.3.1 Sigesl-t*sigard rnsmmum skew m ....................................................... 32
5.8.1.2.3.2 fnacsdon end sc~ loss............................................................................ 32
5.8.1.3 Connector reqyrcmenta ............................................................................ 32
5.8.1.4 Address demon ...................................................................................... 32
5.8.15 Exteqad termimtinn ................................................................................. 32
5.8.1.5.1 Termmatma ...... ..y.................................................................................... 32
5.8.1.6 Elecoical dcsmpuon ................................................................................. 32
5.8.1.6.1 output cMcEnsus ................................................................................ 32
5.8.1.6.1.1 Coroplerrrcnterydriver cbsmctansucs. .... ................................................... 32
5.8.1.6.1.2 wue-oRd driver *ctistia ......................... ...................................... 33
5.8.1.6.1.3 Driver orrgurtlogics% definitions ........................................................... 33
:.8.; .6.;.4 OUIPUIdrwcr c,~rxensslcs ..................................................................... 33
fnput charrrctensuca..................................... ............................................. 34
5:8.1:6.2.1 ReCekX c.bctinsus.:..: ........................................................................ 34
5.8.1.6.2.2 fnput recfmr daractcmucs. .................................................................... 34
5.8.1.6.3 Gmrrnd sIWtis ..........u............................................................................... 34
5.8.1.6.4 Bonding and grounding............................................................................ 34
5.8.1.6.5 Termioatm DC pewer. .............................................................................. 34
5.8.1.6.6 Diffenmird circuit sm~ ............................................................................ 35
5.8.1.6.7 fleacm~ end mused bm ...................................... .................................. 35
5.8.1.6.8 Transcemcr muueg end commen mode vnl=ge drivers.............................
5.8.1.6.9 Additional pb,~ical specilkadons. ............................................................ :;
5.8.1.7 Type K bus S1@ .................................................................................... 35
5.8.1.7.1 Type K bus signal deacnptrons.................................................................. 35
S.8.1.7.1.1 Dets errd,parity......................................................................................... 35
5.8.1.7.1.2 Centrel sl@* .......................................................................................... 35
5.8.1.7.1.3 Bm si@. .............................................................................................. 36
5.8.1.8 Type K bus ~ctionid ..............................................................................
5.8.1.8.1 Type K bus nmg .................................................................................... %
5.8.1.8.1.1 ReSrXmum .............................................................................................. 37
5.8.1.8.1.2 Arbimmon?Selecuon ...................................... 37
5.8.1.8.1.3 Arldoatiorl/Rcsdectioo ............................................................................... 37
5.8.1.8.1.4 Aaynchrrnrousfnforerarion Tsaesfa tiremg - terget to rmtietor (input) ..... 37
5.8.1.8.1.5 Asynchronous hrfermation Transfer tig - initiator to ~get (OUQW). . 37
5.8.1.8.1.6 Syechrooous Date Tmesfer dining - Wga te initiator Input) ...................
;:&~8.L7 Syn$brennos,Dats Transfer tinrieg - uutiriter to target (oMPuO .. ............... :;
Logic+ reqrurmomw . . .................... .......................................................... 38
5.8.2.1 Selecunn ome-oul procedure ................................................................... 38
5.8.2.2 Reselc+nn p.be ...................................................................................... 38
5.8.2.3 Reselecuon mm-out pmcedm ................................................................. 38
5.8.2.4 SyncbrOnOu;dam rosier ......................................................................... 38
5.8.2.5 Reset condmon .........................................................................................
5.8.2.6 Abort mcsaage.......................................................................................... ::
5.8.2.7 DNomcct measege.................................................................................. 38
5.8.2.8 Synchronous date transfer rquest .wge ............................................... 38
5.8.2.9 Terminate S/0 process ~wge .................................................................. 38
ix
MfL-sTD-1397c(sH)
1 June 1995
CONTENTS
~
Paragraph 6. NOES .... ........ ...........................................................................................
6.1 Irrtemauoad mEr~t ................................................................................. 39
6.2 Subject term (key wurd),Iismg ................................................................. 39
6.3 Changes tkom prevmus Ksue..................................................................... 39
FfGUfWS
Figure OmPm rxrmmupi~on bwtiU ............................................................... 1
i Input cmnmunr,caumr mwtiaw ................................................................. 1
Intercomputm mEtiaa: ............................................................................
2 Type A output data ~g:...: ................................................................... 1
5. T~ A extemef ~m,on Ug ............................................................... 4
6. Type A iUplltda~ =g...:...: .................................................................. 5
7. Type A extemmlm~pt ug ............................................................... 6
Type B ou~ut date .g:...: ................................................................... 7
t Type B CXteld fmyt@r Ommg............................................................... 8
10. T~e B mprrt detfI nmmg ..:...:................................................................... 9
Il. Type B e.xtarral m~pt ~ng ............................................................... 0
12. Type C output data h~gt...T ................................................................... ,1
13. TyQeC external ~c~on trmrng............................................................... ,2
14. Type C input date rmtmg ..:...:................................................................... 3
15. Type C external ime~pt .g ............................................................... 4
16. Type H output data n~g:...: ...................................................................
17. Type H exte.mrd~~on .g ...............................................................
18. Type H input da$ama...:...: ..................................................................
19. Type H extexna3nmrrrrpt ~g ...............................................................
20. Type D control frames on an input _el ..............................................
21. Type D wean] fmmw on en output channel ............................................
22. Type D data word fo~t ..........................................................................
23. Type D output waveform envelope............................................................
24. Type D imafam teminadon ....................................................................
z. Type D puke phase rmdtdatcd sigaai .......................................................
26. Type E,source to sink intam~~tion diagram ........................................
27. Type E imerfam s~gnalflow dti~ ........................................................
28. Type E SOS wntml fmms contents ..........................................................
29. Type E S1S control fmme contiK ............................................................
30. Type E informanon fmma mn@nu ..........................................................
31. Type E parity blt generation ....................................................................
32 Type E oumm waveform enveloW...........................................................
33. T@ E inpit waveform @velop ..............................................................
Type E siak return IOS pmfde ..................................................................
E Source flow dti~ .................................................................................
36. sink flow tiw ....................................................................................
37. Type J waveform .auun ....................................................................
38. T~e J optiwl wavefom ..........................................................................
39. TWe J Irelfduplex timfiace ......................................................................
40. Typs J full duplex titiWe ......................................................................
41. Type Kwbledia~ ..............................................................................
42. T~ K SIGNAL +) & SIGNAL(-) envelopes ...........................................
43. Type K mmpusite waveform inpul parameters (volts vs. term)...................
44. Type K SIGNAL(+)& SIGNAL(-) OUtpUlp~tem (volts VS.tirm) .......
45. Type K nmlti~int ~terconnwt dbgmm .................................................. 48
46. Type K protwnon cutit .......................................................................... 50
47. Type K base timing p~ters ................................................................. 51
0
x
MfL-STD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
CONTENTS
eam
Figure 48. Type K reset timiug ....... ........... ............................................................... 152
49. Type K SSb@tiOdSdt%tS~ Urnmg........................................................... 153
50. Type K erbmaoonkselmon rirniug................................................. .. ... 154
51. T~ K esyrmbrunous irsforma$?n wader timiug
IoprrtLrerssfers- ~get m ~Mmr ..........y... ....................................... 155
52. Type K esymchrmmustefonrraoon hmmfer smrmg
output oim?.f~ -- hidt!tnr tOWgeL.................................................... 156
53. TV K aynchrunoua date ~a, timiug.
m rrt mmsfers - Iargti m mlM~rv .................................................... 157
54. Type k aymdrrunoeadare mmsfcr tsmm~
output mursfcra - inidatnr to klr_&L.................................................... 158
55. Type. K cable pair end COMCCtOr pie diagmrn .......................................... 159
56. Extereal fuectmu O~muOns ..................................................................... 160
57. ouQut data ope~uns ............................................................................. 160
58. Iuput dam operahons ...... ....................................................................... 161
59. E%mmalirlterrupt *nna. .................................................................... 161
60. Cnmputer-tu-cogum ro~ace ............... ............................................... 162
61. pouched tape ymt bluck dm~ .............................................................. 163
62. Estauaf fmmtmu,word format.................................................................. 164
63. Type K bus terrmnamon.:.......................................................................... 165
64. CP-642A imercompuw mEfia= ............................................................. 166
65. Nnn-CP-642AlCP-642A intercompum mti= ....................................... 167
66. Effccss of ceb!e lengrb orr cbmmel tbruughput.......................................... 168
133 Type E refle.mon mat set-up ................ ....................................................... 169
Type E compcmts system cheeusl now Et W-UP................................... 170
TABLES
Table I.
n.
Function of uutpm charmel cumrol tia ...................................................
Fuucdon of iuput charsuelccmuol Mm ..................................................... 1~
Ill.
Iv.
Fuoctioe of IC chaunel cuntrcd hues . . ... ....................................................
Type E source ~spouse m SIS cunml fra.rm............................................ ;:
25
v. T~ E.dming mtsmls . .............................................................................
w. Mexrmum cable Ieug!hs (fWti~.) ........................................................ 42
VII. Ccmrpumrcurmectora end dle mates (parallel) ......................................
VIu. Computer wmsccto~ end cable mete-s(Type K) ~...................................... :2
lx. Rmtion m pie esagmrmm 12Ll, 90-, aud 85-pIrscomrectnrs.................. 44
x. Fmrcrion m piu aasigumm~ 79- aud 92-piII COIUECWWS ............................ 46
Xf. M28840 piu essignmems .......................................................................... 47
KU. Fuucdon tu color cude aasigrrmen!sfor 42- tu r54-prur
di@af ffO trausmiaskm,cab lea ............................................................. 49
XIff. Fuucdnu tu culor code uaslgmnents for 30-peIr
digital f/O uansmission,cables ............................................................. 50
Xfv. Function to color de. i$wgrnerm for 1% end 24-peIr............................
digiral f/O,rsansmmslOnmblm ............................................................. 51
xv. Compumr-~phed conrrul mguals......................................................... 59
XVI. IC COLIO_U] SlmdS ..................................................................................... 60
XvfI. Fmmet Unit Defect Dcscriptur format eud rsqmrementa. .......................... 74
%rruat Device Page. .................................................................................
&JT oata Destruct command............................................................................
Darn Destmct patterns. ..............................................................................
;;
78
Xxi. Read Luck Table command. ....................v............................................... 79
XXII. I&ad Lock Table ~D control bn defmluon. ......................................... 79
xi
MIL-STD- 1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
CONTENTS
~
Table XXIII. Rrad Lnek Table length fO~L ................................................................
Kxfv. Read Lack Table data fOmL ................................................................... :;
xxv. Read tirh Locks m.d . ......................................................................
XXVI. Set Lo&s co~d .................................................................................. 82
Xxwf. ReadJWriwLeek code definitions.............................................................. 83
Xxvfn. Write widr Locks m.d ....................................................................... 84
Xxfx. optional cnmmmrd geidaace. for direct access devices............................... ~~
xxx. Optinmd command gnideaec for sequearird aec?ss devices........................
=1. Optionaf armmaad guidance for wrim-rmcedevices.................................. ;:
m. Optioaal cnmmaad guidance for CDROM devices...................................
XxxIff. Optional emrmrand guidaacc for optical mcmnry devitis. ........................ 100
XXXIV. Dare Protection cmmnanda for direct-access device .................................. 101
Xxxv. Cn-d respnnsc to Date Rotion ...................................................... 102
XXXVL Message sysrem suppmt ........................................................................... 107
XXXVff. hiinimom message ~lcnnntion ........................................................... 108
APPENDICES
Appendix Cables, inrerface eirerdls, aad generaf L/Ophilosophy ................................ 41
Special mqnirmrmrls for CP-642A/R and CP-789 Compilers..................... 59
Type E additional features ....................................................................... 63
Type K command Wt................................................................................ 73
Type K (SCSI-U) design ~itiw ............................................................ 103
●
xii
MILSTD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
1. SCOPE
1.1 SCO e. ma sundard emtdiahes the tqtircmnw for tie physi~, fMCtiONLmd elC-CrnC~
+
dmractenstm o a standard f/O iemrface for digitaf data.
1.2 Classification. The dlgilaf &a interfaces apccified herein are classified es follows
a. Tyoe A (Navaf Tacticaf Dare Svstem (NTDS) SIOW. Pm-affeldamrmesferofup1041,667
words pa second on me cable. Binary voltage Ieves of O vnll direct current (Vdc) (Iogi.xd 1)
and -15 Vdc (fOgi=d 0).
b. S fast Pamffel data transfer of up m 230,000 words per second nn one cable.
~ofOWc(fogicaI l)~d-3V&00si~0.
c.
woE;:sE:a25Y:?:i% ?*”r-nd”nOne*”” ‘-
d. Asynchrcmoussaid dale mmsfer usieg a 10 mgabit per secnnd
Vollsnominal
e. T . Asynchronous scriaf data aansfer using n 10 tmgablt PCIsecnnd
mV nmninaf. Sctief data mmsfcxof up to 300,0W words per
second in burst o-ansfesmnde end 17S,000 winds per aecmtd in aingfe wmd -fer mnde on a
100 feel cable.
f. Tme F (aircmft iatmeaf time ditisinn multiplex bus). -STD- 1553B implemcnration witiin
Navy computes systems.
13. TyrreG(RS44 9 compatible with RS-232]. RS-4491RS-232implenmtetion within Navy
computers.
h. ut pareffel Pamflel data transfer up tn 500,CQ0words per second on one
Binary voltage levels of 0 dc Oogicef 1) end +3.5 Vdc (Ingimf O).
T J (fiber optic NATO asriaf). Fiber optic implementation of Type E esiag four npticef fibers.
i Bus imcsfece based on tie ANSI X3.131-ICV
nmputer System fnterface.-2 standard.
2. REFERENCED DOCUMENTS
2.1 Gnvr.mmemtdocuments.
2.1.1 Srrecfications and standards. Unless otbcrwisc spccifk%f,tie foflnvringspecifications and
staadards form a pert of Ous standard to en extsnt speciticd herein. Each is fisted in the current Department
of Defense fndex nf Specifications rerd .Wmlards (DnDfSS):
SPECfFfCAllONS
MLLfTARY
MfL-C-17 - cables, Redio Frqueecy, Ffexible and Semi-rigid, Geneti
Spectlkarion for.
MfL-C-1716 - Cables, Radio Frequency, FfcxibleCoaxial, 75 Ohms, M17/6-RGl 1,
Unarmord, M17/6-RG12, AmNJred.
MIL-C-17/134 - Cable, Radin Frequency, Triaxiaf, 0.245 fnch, SOOhm, Water Blncked
and Non-Wa!m Blncked
MIL-C-17/135 - cable. Radio Frqncncy, Triaxiaf, 500- WaISIBlocked and Non-
Water Blnckcd.
MfL-C-28876 - Comsccrms,Fiber Optics, J Circufm Ping mrd Receptacle Style, Melriple
Remwable Termini, Gemml Spmiticatioo for (Meuic).
MfbC-49 142 - Cmmector, Triaxird, Radio FWWCOCY. G=mf Swifi~tiOn for.
MIL-C-49142/2 - Ommc.tors, Triexial, Radio Frequency (Series TRC-Receptacle. F%
Contacts, Jam Nut Mounted Class 2).
MfL-C-85045 - Cable, Fiber Opticaf, .%ipbcwd, Geaemf Spccitlcation for (Metic).
ML-F-4929 1 - F&r, OpUmf, Geoeral Spccitiration fnr (Metric).
1
MLL-STD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
STANDARDS
MfLfTARY
DOD-STD- 1399 - fnkxface Smnderd for Shiphomd Systems. Section 406 Digiml
Computer Grounding. (Meoic)
MfL-sTD-1310D - Shipboard Bondin , Grounding end other Techniques for
Elecuomagnetic t ompa!ibifity and Safety.
MIL-STD- 15S3B - AiifW~teruzd Time Division Command/Rcspunse Muftiplex
2.1.2 Other Govesernem dncumenta. Tbe foIlowing other Government dncumenta forma a pan of this
stmsdard to the extent apecItIed hemm.
INTERNATIONAL STANDARDIZATION AGREEMENT
NATO STANAG 4153 ‘hd edition -
.%nndsudSpecifiearion I% en Acyncbrnnous Serief Dam Irrscsfacefor Point to Point
Coneeaians and fer Cmmection m Date Networks in NATO Navel Systems.
NATO Aflicd Naval Engineering Publication (ANEP) 12-
Tlmnughpnl Improvement fm Systems huplemendng Ihe Stendard Sm-ielInterface
Defined in STANAG 4153
NATO Allied Navel Eoginecring publication (ANEP) 13-
System fntegrity Feature Improvements for Systems Implementing the Standerd Serinl
fntcrface Dcfmed in STANAG 4153
NATO Allied Navaf Engineering publication (ANEP) 35-
Isaprnved Tectndqncs and Teefmologies for Ships fmplemendng the Stnedard Serird
Interface Defied in STANAG 4153
(Copies of sfwifications, somtids. end other Government documents required by canoactora in
connecting with specific acquisition functions shnufd be obteined from the cnnoacdng activity.)
2.2 Other publications. The following doeumenrs forma pert of tis sramferd[o the extent specified
herein. UiITessotherwise spcifkd, use Omaedncumems listed in the soficitadon’sDoDISS. The issues of
documems which have not been adopted sbsfl be those in effect on the date of the cited DoDISS.
AMERICAN NATfONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI X3.131-1986 - SmsH Computer System fnterfaec (SCSI-I).
ANSI X3T9.Zf375R-SCV10h - Small Computer System fnterfacc-2 (SCSI-D).
(Application for copies sfrmdd bc addresstxl m the American National .%nderds fnstitme, 1430
Broadway, New Yo&, NY 10018.3308,)
Electronic fNDUSTRfES ASSOCfATfON (EIA)
RS-232 - fmerface BeewecnTerminal Equipment end Data Circuit-Terminating Equipment
Employing Serial Binary Date fnlerchenge.
RS-449 - Generel Purpose 37-Posirirm and 9-Position fmerface for Data Terminal Eqnipment end
Date Circuit Terminating, Equipment Employing Send Binnry Data Interchange,
(fncludmg Buffelin No. 12, Appti@iou Notes).
RS48S - Stendard for Electrical Charecrcristi= nf Generators and Receivers for use iu Bnkmced
DigiteJ Multi-point Systems.
(Address applications for copies [o the Eleca-nniclndnsmes Association, 2001 Eye Street, NW,
Washing[on, DC 20006.)
2
M!L-STD. 1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
(Non-gowmom sumrkds are generally available for refereece fmm fibmties. They rue rdso
distributti among non-government strurdards bodies rmd using Fedemf agencies.)
2.3 Order of rrrecedence. fn he event of a conflict beewecnthe tixt of this standard aud the references
cited herein, the text of this staodard sfrafftake prcccdcucc.
3. DEFUWTIONS
3.1 Gem-d definitions.
3.1.1 Exrcrual ftOICtiOnfEF) data. The EF frmction transfers cmomrrndinformation from the
transmitting cmnputer or perrphemf equipment to the receiving deticc using appropriate control sigmds. The
word sise and blt formet of the EF data sbafl be specified by the appropriate system desigo dam or the
individual equipmrsrt specitlcarion.
3.1.2 Extcmal interrupt fEI) darn. ‘he Et function mrnsfess SOSLUSinformation from a trmrsmitring
device to the receivissgcomputer or puipheml quiprmut usiug appropriate control signafs. The word sise
eud bit fotmrmof tbe Ef data shelf be apech%d by the appropriate system design data or the individual
eqnipmeut specification.
3.1.3 Full duplex channel. A fufl duplex channel is comprised of two simrdtanecms
mridirectiomil cbaunels.
3.1.4 Fnrced cnmmaud. A furced commaud is a cumrnvsd seal by the computer even lhough Ure
periphemf law not decfared that a smmmandis acceptable.
3.1.S —..
!nlul fnpm refers to iuput m the computer, except wheIe specifi~ly sta~d as ~PUI 10tie
peripheral or recewrng qnipmeeL
31.6- Us~gWpmp*kw~lsi~ds,,tie ~tition_iv=~fumtion tima

Oausti”tig ewce y e swmvrng cnmputrx or pcnpbemf ~UIPMeULThe wnrd sk. and bit fmmm of tire
ID sbrdf bs specified by the appmpsiarc system dcsigu drna or the iudividuaf qrripment specifbion.
b.ic ~:.f-~~~~~m~~~~k~~~~ n-”fbi”’

““ ba$~a agmcdupm as rtre
3.1.8 Odd arit Odd parity is the inchrsiun of an additioeaf bit (the parity bit) to the data word for
error detect-muusrng
“+ e fuUowiergcritcr’k if the number of bits in the data uuit beiug logical one is even, dse
parity bit chaffbe set en k@af one, or if the number of biLSio the data rmit Wig lnsimf Oneis odd, he
pasiry bit sbafl be set to Iogisal s.ero.
3.1.9 On UL Ow#ut refers to output fmm the computer, except where.specifkaffy stated as ompm
fmm tie pcF& equipment or data souscc.
3.1.10 Out m datn OD The OD fuoction transfers information Emma rxamsmitdugcomputer or
~phcmf eq~e]eitigmvim”sing appropti~mn~l sigoals. The word sizcaod bit fOmM
of the OD shafl be spccifkd by he appropriate system de.sigudata m the individual equipmeut specification.
3.1.11 Single Pulsed simals. Auy signaf which exiw isrtie stile “nue”state for a limited time.
regardless of ibe dnmtron of the input or iupms m the circnit oscd to generate that siguaf.
3.1.12 Tbrou h UL ‘f%roughpmis the number of data words that am tmusnsittcd over the channel per
rmitoftim. *interfaces, this is.depeudeutnf Uredaravmrdsiiz. Fmseriafimcrkes,dri sis
dwcctly rcfatcd m the size uf Llredata wnrd. Larger data words require mere time for tmmmission at a tixcd
scrird data rate. Fur eidxr pruaflel or seriaf irrterfaccs,the thmnglrpnt includes all timiug cansed by
handshaking or mber overhead functions.
3
MlL-STD-l 397C(SH)
1 June 1995
3.1.13 Timeout. A tinrcout is the faifore tn cmnpletc a timed fuocuon within the specified time.
3.1.14 Unidirectional cbaonel (simple A rmidimctionsl channel is one-baff of a fufl duplex
channel in wfiicb urforoumon M sent m one cction only, but control signafs Omdabake) can be sent in both
dkections.
3.2 Tme E definitions.
3.2.1 Burst oansfer. Burst mmsfer occors when an fF has one S bit, nne Wf bk, and a rmrftiplenumber
of information words (lwS).
3.2.2 Channel. A channel is a facifity that psrmiIs information to be sent fmm one unil w anntber ~iL
It includes ti=&a and control circuits at botb ends, nad Ibe cable between.
3.2.3 Commandliiomut)t word (C A CIW is nssd w oansfcr commands from the sourcs to the
sink. Exrend ho cuons (W-s) are sent as s over low level serial (LLS) cables.
3.2.4 Comml frames. ContJol fmnm Oansfm mntml information over a mddircctiQnaicbaad. There
are two types of comrnl : The source statoa (SOS) control frame, origiaatiag aI the source, and tie sink
status (S1S) contrnl framc$originsdag at b sink.
3.2.4.1 Source statas (S0S) control frame. The SOS control frame advisca on Lheavailability of an fI
at the source for transrmsslon to the sink.
3.2.4.2 Sink status (S1S) cnnoul fmnre. The S1S conuol frame advises on the acceptability of ao F
by the sink.
3.2.5 information frames (B% . When using single WOKItransfer (SWf), an fl consists of a
syncfxmdzabon bn (S), a word iden Ier bit CAT),a 32-bit word, and an optionrd parity bit (P). The Wf bit
identifies the 32-bit word as either a m-dhtcmupt word (CfW) or a data word. Wbcn using burst
0,
mmsfer, an fF consists of a S biq a Wf bit, and a multiple number of IWs includiog an optional parity bits.
3.2.6 Serial data rats. The serial data mm,is the clock rate at which data bits arc tmosmittcd on tbe
cable. The semal data rate is not a throughput definition bccauac tbmugbpm is depcndem upon both data
word size and overhead (baodsfraking)imfdeumtations.
3.2.7 SinEle word transfer (SWf). SWT occurs when so fF bas one S biL nne Wf bit, aad one
information word (fW).
3.2.8 —
Sink. The sink is tit cnd of a rmidmctinmd channel that receives inforomion frames (ffs).
3.2.9 Source. The source is lhat cnd of a unidirectional cbarmel that tmosndta
brfonnatiun EiiFiZF(fFs).
3.2.10 System integrity featorcs (SfFs~. SfFs are those additional fea,turcs,sncb as parity or drneauls,
tit are included the anplemnfaoon of STANAG 4153 2nd Edihon. These feamms are not to
affect tie defmed?bp~c$ristm of STANAG 4153 2nd Edition, but are 10provide error detection capability
fnr the systcm employing these channels.
3.3 Twe J definitions.
3.3.1 Attemumion(nptical]. Optical power lnss, expressed in decibek
3.3.2 Bit error ratio (BER~. The mtio of incorrectly uansndued bits te the total number of
tmosmiued bm.
3.3.3 Connector plug, A device used to terminate opticaJ fibers
0
4
I
MIL-STD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
‘o 3.3.4 Connectm re$c.D!aclc.The fixed half of a comection that is mounted on a panehdfdscad.

RecePmclesISSSt.?
wlb phlSS.
3.3.5 Fiber.
— Dlelcctsic soucmre tbal guides fight opticrd wave guide.
3.3.6 Fiber OPUCceble. A cable containing one or nsnre opticaf fibers.
3.3.7 Graded index. A type of snrdtimnde opticaf fiber in wbicfrtbe cbemicaf cmnpusition of the fiber
cnre is not omfaren. ra&d index cmnpnsisiun resnlts in a non-uniform refractive index wlich k,nds fight
tnwards the tibds cure, iocmasing the fiber’sbandwidth.
3.3.8 Mrdtinmde. fn an opskaf fiber, a smrlmd of fight propagation where afl light says do nnt travel iss
of the.iilxr. These rays uavel paths wbicb cams differences in oansit dines which in
turn hit rhe bandwidth a snrddsnndefiber eassOWMtiL
3.3.9 0 acal fall time. The rime imeswd for the fnfling edge of an optid pnfse m transition from 90%
to 10% of m~ae.
uca nse imc The ti- intervaf for she sisiig edge of an optimf pnlse w transition fmm
ICI%~“~i}oeiimd..
3.3.11 Power (UPticel). l-he radian! pnwer, expstwd in watts.

3.3.12 Receive?(oPIkeQ. An rrpto-dcctmnic circnit that convests an optical sigord tu an elccoical logic
signaf.
3.3.13 -s width Fnff Widti Nalf Mexbmum(TWH~. The absolute difference betvwxu tie
a wavelmgtbs, at wlucb Ibe spectral A Iant UstcnsltyIs 50%nftb e tmximmn power.

3.3.14 Transsnittu (optical). Amoptu-elccrneaf circuit tha eonverw an efcctricaflogic signaf m no
optical signal
3.4 Type K definitions.
3.4.1 Avem?e mmsnred cornpnsite OC voltage (VAM). The avemtgemeasured composite DC voltnge
shaft be the smsrnf the fnUowingfour DC voltage levels divided by fom
SIGNAL(+) before the logic surte oansition,
SfGNAL(-) before tbs Iogic state mmsition,
SfGNw+) after the logic state transition,
SfGNAL(-) after the logic ssate uansitiuo.
3.4.2 SCSI-I. SCSI-1 (SsuaffComputes Systems foterface I) shall spccifhlly refer tn ANSI
I X3.131/198~d.
3.4.3 SCSI-11. SCSI-II (Smafl Computer System frsterfaceU) sbalf spec~kally refer to ANSI
I X3TP.V375=d.
3.4.4 ~. The stnb is L& intercomecsion lengti of the internal able (icluding but not limited to
wires, connectur pins and circuit board smces) required to convey signals frmu the o-ansceivercircuitry m the
I Type K bus.
I
MfL-STD- 1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
3.5 Acronyms. Acronym nsed in this standard are defined m follows:

BER BILEmur Mio
Co-dAntsrmpt Word
DOD Depal’onsnt of Defense
DuDISS Dcuaromnl of Defense fadex of Specifications aud Somdnrda
EF Exieraal Fuaction
EFA Exwmaf Fuuction Acknowledge
Extemaf Fuaction Euable
EFR External Fuuction Reauest
El Exemnaf bttmlllpt -
External fntsrmpt Enable
EIR Execmaf hltSllllpt fteqaesl
~ Extemafly Sfmcificd Ad&tsS
Extsmalfy Specitled fndex
FWHM FuR Width Haff Maximum
fA fnput Aciolowledge
LAcw Initial Address COD!XO1 Wnrd
Ic futercumputsr
fo Input Datn
mA fuput DaenAcknowledge
fDE Input Data Enable
DR IuPut Data Request
fECF fnput Euable Comrol Frame
IF information Frams
Uo Iuputiouepm
IRCF laput RWIucstControl Frame
fnformadou word
Fu
&sIo
NATO
Low L.eyelSerial
Law Level Serial fnputlOutput
Numerical Aperture
North Adautic Treaty Organization
e
NTDS Nawd Tactical Data System
OD output Data
ODA Output Daui Aclmuwledge
ODE Output Data Euable
ODR Output Data Request
OECF 00tpm Eaable Conuol Frame
ORCF Output Request Cunuol Fmms
P Parity (bit)
s Symhronization (bit)
SCSI Sod Computer Systems Interface
SF ;~k&mfnnUgriIyFcamrss
SIS
Sos Source Status
w-r Single Word Tmnsfer
TACW Terminal Ad&c.ssControl Word
w Word Identifier
m
MU.S,TD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
4. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
4.1 UO cnarml and data simaf categories. The UO requirements spscified bercin include control and
data signaf dehmuons und ummg rsqms’cmmts. The control signal definitions are tailored ta tbe ftmctinmd
categories of equipmsnt being interconnected. The categories of eqaipment comlinatiom tit require
interface definitions am
a.. Catsgnry 1 - Computss tn peripbera!
b. Categosy II - Cnmputsr to cnoqmtcs, intercomputcs (IC)
c. CaCegosy111 - peripheral to peripheral
4.2 Pasaffel iatcsfam physical smuiremsnta. Unlcas ocfswwissspmitlcd in the equipment speciflation,
the physi&l interface fur parafl 1 1 U, sad IfI interfaces shaJJconsist of the intm-cmmectionof
compatible squipmmts by =S ~f~ng~~ ~f cables. Tim intercmmected quipment shafl transfer ID aad
aaanciatedconusi signals on one cable aad abafftsansfer OD and associated conml signals on the other cable.
The cmmectnr types, comsectnr pin assignments, aad cable cyIK.are provided for infnrmadon only in
appendix A Spcciaf requirements unique to panicubsr computer interface are specified in appendix B.
4.3 Grnundin . The systems ground installation far iawrface Typea A, B, C, aad H sbalf met the
rquiremcats+“ apm Isd m DOD-STD-139P, section 406. f%r gmaading reqairemcnts for Type D NTDS
aerial UO cables, see 5.3.9.1. The groaadiag acquirements for Type E interface shall be as spscitied in
5.4.5.5 and in DOD-STD-1399, sectinn 406. Em grounding rquircmenta fur Type K ialerface,
SS4?5.8.1.6.3.7.
4.4 Progmsmru“ng cnnsideratimrs.
4.4. I Perirdmral eqair?mmL Re.wrictionsw the pnssible rats of fnrmd EF sbafl be specified for the
periphemf qmpmmt it it canrmt accept fumed EF at the maximam rats speciilsd bsreia.
4.4.2 fncerca uter C . Forced EF may be lost wfssnused for [C opcsation. Tberefom, [C forced EF
tiotidb~tieo.y~sible mbdofm-ti.. ffforcedEFaresquired fnrIC
-~. StSPSSh5dfbS takm tOUI- the isttes’ruptsam not locked out in the receiving cosaputcr aad the
saput registm Lsavaifable when tk forced EF is tmasrsdttcd from the tsaasmirtiag computer. Forced EF winds
maY be mmsndtted em dmugfr the Output Request Conmol Fmsm (ORCFI Exfcmaf fmcmapt Enable (EfE)
does not specify the Extm-asdFancdnn Request (EFR) canunl function. The receiving cnmputsr wifl nut
accept the !S1word (forced EF word from tie uaasmiltiag computer) if the input register k not available.
4.4.3 [C channels. Tbe conversion from a standard cmaputcr periphsmf channel (category f) imc.rfacc
to an IC cocassmaicationchannel (catego~ If) inrcsface requires l/O circuit changes of varying complexities
within the computer. The requised ciscait cbangcs tn convest a categnsy I intesface to a category fl intsrface
sbalf IX nccomptiahedby mmas of switches Prisstsdcircuit card cbaagcs. or MIS chge. me c~g=
reqairwf tn mnven a catsgmy I interface to category II imcrfam ahaffconsisl of the following as spccitied ia
the individual equipment specification:
Only the outpu! cbasmel is affscted.
:. The nucput cnnunl signals cawgory 1 (Extesaaf Function Acknowledge (EFA), Output Data
Acknowledge (ODA), aad Output Data Request (ODR)) take on dfferent names and functions
in a category II intsrfacc.
c. The signaf Iine in a category I interface that carries the ODA shafl be used to carry the catsgory II
Ready signaf. The mtcgnsy H Ready line is not single pulsed aa is tbe category I ODA. The
Ready signal in a categmy 11interface is set in accordance with the rquircmcnts of 5.1.2.3.b.
‘fhe Ready signal in a category II interface dud] hc clsarcd by the Resume signal (category I
ODR) aa SpCCifiCdia 5.1.2.3.f and g.
d. The signal line in a categmy I interface tha! caries the ODR shaff be used tn carry the category H
Resume signal.
MlL-STD. 1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
e. The category 1 EFA signaJ retains the same name in a camgov II imerfacz as it is in a category 1
iutmfacc. The EFA sigmd in a category 11iatcrfacc slrafl be Sel as spccitlcd iu 5.1.2.1.Caud d.
The EFA sigaal in a category 11imerfacc shall be cleaml by the receipt of a Resume signal
(catsgoty 10DR) as specficd ia 5.1.2.1 i and j.
f. Thsre shrdl be no clrauge in the nrmm function, or operation of the category I EFA sigaal or OD
Iiies for a category 11iurcrface.
4.4.4 lC timeout interrupt. When transferring either cxterual fuuction words or output data words in
the intercomputer mude, if cbs cmasmittiag computer does not receive au acknowledge from tbe receiviug
c.ornfmterwithin a sfrrxicicdtime, an IC dmcout interrupt shafl be gmmti.
5. DETAfLED REQUIREMENTS
5.1 Parallel interface functiorrrdrcquiremcms. Type A, B, C, and H parallel iuterface chmacteristics
shnfl bc the sanE, except for the dmiag and elccrncal re@renmm. Type A, B, C, and H iuterfxcs shsfi each
have rtrree frmctionaJclnssitlcatinnx categories I, U. sud fIf (see 4.1).
5.1.1 Catsgory 1,stxmlrmceof I/O events An fJO cfmrmslbetween a cumpucersad petiphasl shafl
tmnsfer control words and dsts words by means of the reciprocal interaction speciticd herciu for each frrrnrof
cormnunicstion.
S.1.1.1 output cnmmurrication. Whea iatmcomected as slrrwnron figure 1, a conqnucr aad a
peripheral equipment shal1 rraasfer dntn from the computer to the psriphexal equipmcat as specitied herein.
output channel control lines shall fnaccinn as specifisd iu cable f.
TABLE 1. Function of output cbaarrel mnmol lines.
f?amc of line I D~tiOn of signal I Fuaction

EFRll Peripftcml equipmsm m Set cnnditinn indicates rcadimss of the peripheral
computer qaiprrmt to accept au EP code word m thst chanael.
EFA~J Computer tu peripherrd Set cnndition irsdicatesthe computcx fsss placed an EF
equipment cude wnrd on the OD fiaes of that chanael.
ODR Peripheral equipment m Set exmditioniudicates readimxs of the peripheral
computer Wrdpmmt to Sccept a data word on Ihst cbanuel.
ODA~ Compurcr tu peripheral Set cnndition iudicates the computer has placed a dats
equipment wnrd on the OD lirsesof that cbmmel.
..
LJ
.. ..
Nnt stl computers have the EFR fiae, see fndividurdequipmem specftlatinn.
21 SigaaIs on the output data fines sbull be settled to their intcmicd values bcfnre ttrc EFA or ODA fiue is
set by tbe cornputcr.
5.1.1.1. I Transfer nf a buffer EF cnde word. Whenever m EF buffer bss been established for a
chamrel, the computer aud the periphcd equipment on thst charrsrelsAalltrsusfer EF code word as foffows:
a. When the peripheral quipuscnt is ready to accept arr EF cude word, the peripheral equipmcrrt
slraffset the EFR line (dris may have already bappcned before the EF buffer was established).
b. ‘fbe computer sludf detect the setdag of the EFR fine iu accardauce with internaf priority.
c. Tle coruputcr shall place au EF cnde wnrd on the OD fiues.
d. The mmputcr shnUset the EFA liue (to irrdicatcths! the EF code word is on the OD lines).
e. me pcripheml quiprneat shafl detccl the setdag of the EFA lie. (The periphemf equipment
may clear the EFR Iiae any drne after detecdug the setting of the EFA line, but sfrnflclear the
EFR line before the computsr will recogniss the next EFR)
f. ‘fle DeriDheraiequiDmentshall samole the EF code word tha! is on the OD lines,
g. The ~o~utcr Sfil-clear the EFA he before placiag the nex[ word nn the OD lies.
I
I 8
MIL-sTD-1397c(sH)
1 June 1995
●
The computer snd the Poriphersl shsff repeat Urissequence for each sucmssive EF code word until they
have transferred tbe block of cmie words specified by the EF buffer control words. Peripbeml devicrs
designed to mea the requirements for tremfer of buffered EF mde wnrd abnll rdan met the requirements for
tfrarsferof a forced EF cnde word.
I 5.1.1.1.2 Trnnsfer of a forced EF code word. Wheneyer the current insurrectionof Urecxmsputcr
prngmm is a fnrced EF, tbe computer and the wpha eqmpmem on the designated channel ahafl trmssfera
single EF cnde word es specifki in S.1.1.1.1. escept that the EFR fiie is not involved. The oansfer ahrdl
prumzd whether or not the EFR fine is seL Rriphersl equipment that dne.vnot hsve the EFR fine aball
transfer en EF ende word as foflowx
a. TM computer sfralfplsce.a wnrd of dsta nn the OD fines.
b. Tbe computer shall set the EFA line (to indicate that the EF * word k OnIJMOD fiSICS).
c. me pxiphemf eqoipmerrtshaff detect the setting of the EFA line.
d. me peripherrdeqrtipment shell anmple the EF code word that is on the OD fines.
e. The computer shsfl clear tbe EFA fine before pfaciig the next wnrd on the OD fines..
The periphemf eqrriprrsmtapecifimrinn shafl stare the maximum rate at which the peripberai equipmwrois tn
accept forced EF whenever the sate is 1s.s tbsrt the maximum rate pnssible fmm the mrnpurcr. Prmgamrnbsg
rr.soictinrrs ahnfl be imposed fnr periphmd equipment that cannot rimep! forced EF at the rrr=imum me
pnssible fmm the computer.
5.1.1.1.3 Trerrsferof OD. Wbesseversn OD buffer hsa been established for a cfrmmel,the mmpnter
and tie penpbe~ eqmpmen~on that cbsrmel StrSU rmnsfer daro ss fouo~
a. When she peripheral eqipmem ia rtady rn neccpl dsrs. the peripbsrsf equipment sbsll set the ODR
e b.
c.
d.
e.
line (this msy rdrmdy bsve bnppmcd before the OD buffer was estsfdiafred).
The mmputcr ahaffdesect Ureaetdng of the ODR line in aecnrdmce with interard prioritk.
l%e mmputer ahslf pface a word of dms on the OD fine.s.
The computer abaff.aet the ODA fine tn irrdiate that a word of daia is on the OD finr.$.
The Per’iphmlfeJ#uP~l sklrdldetm t Ure setting of the ODA lines. (llre peripherrd quipment
may cfear the DR fme any dnx. sfter detecdng the setting of the ODA fine, but shaff clear the
ODR ltie before the computer wifl recognize the next ODR)
f. The peripheral equipment absll serrsplethe data word thst is on the OD fines.
& Tbe mmputcr shall clw.r the ODA liie before pfacing the next word mr the OD lines.
Tbc cnmourer nod the treriohemfmuimoent aball revest this sequcrm for each successive word of darn until
all wordi bsve been usinsf~. - “
I
ut mmmunication. When inrrrcomecred as shown on figure 2, the corrrpmcrand peripherrd
equipment s oansfer dam frnm the peripheral eqrripmcnt en the mmprrter as apeciticd herein. fnput
channel conrml fines ahalf function as specified in table U.
MfL-STD- 1397C(SH)
I June 1995
TABLE IL Function of input channel control lines.

0,
Name of line Direction of signal Function
E@/ computer to peripheral Set condition Mimes readiness of tie computer KUaccept an
equipment EI code word on Oralchannel.
fDR2/ Peripheral eqnipmenl Set cnndition indicates that the peripheral eqeipment bus
to computer placed a word of data avaifahle m the computer on the fD
Iines of tit channel.
EfR2/ Peripheral equipment Set condition indicates tie peripheral equipment has placed an
te enmputer iurermpt code word availnhle to the computer on the ID
liies of that channel.
WA Computer to peripheral Set conditinn indicales Uralthe mmputer has sampled the fD
cquiprneut lines of that channel.
lJ Not all computers have the EfE finw sw individual cqtipment spedllcation.
u Signals on the inpnt dnra firm from the prziphcraf equipmcmtshaff be settled to their intended values
before the Input Data Request (IDR) nr External fnterrupt Request (EIR) is set hy the periphemf.
5.1.1.2.1 Transfer of an EI code word with EfE. The computer and a peripheral equipment shall
transfer an EI coae word m the following steps
a. The crmnputcr,under program conurd, shnfJset tie ELEtine when reedy KUaccepl an El.
b. The peripheral equipment shall detect be. state of the EfE fine.
c. When the status rcqnires that the computer be interrupted, the periphemf ~uip~t S~ p~ce m
EI code word on the fD lines.
d. T%eperipheral equipment sbalf set the EIR line to indicate that the EI code word is
on the ffl lines.
e. The computer shafl detect the setting of the EIR line in accordance with internal priorities.
f. The computer sbafl sample the Et code word that is on the fD lines.
The emnputer shall clear the EfE Iine.
f: The computer sbdl set the Input Data Acknowledge (IDA) line.
i. The peripheral equipment shall dek?ctstep “h” or hotb steps ‘g” and “h”. (The periphernf
equipment may clear the EfR line any time afLsrdetecting the setting of the IDA line, hut shafl
cleer the EIR line kfore the computer will recognize the next EfR-)
j. The computer shall clear the fDA line before sampling tie next word on the fD lines.
The computer and peripheral eqnipment sfxWrepeat this sequence for each successive EI code word for
non-huffezed interrupt oansfcrs, or until lbey have transferred the block of intermpt cnde words.
5.1.1.2.2 Tmnsfer of an El code word without the EIE. The ccmtputer and a peripheral equipment
shaff transfer an )21code word m the foUowmg steps
a. When the statux requires that the computer be interrupted, the peripheral equipment shall place an
El cede word on the ID lines.
b. The peripheral equipmem shall set the EIR line to indicate that tie El code word is
on the fD lines.
c. The computer sbafl detect the setting of the EIR lie in accordance with imemaf priorities,
d. The computer sbafl sample the El code word that is on tie fD lines.
e. Tbe computer sbafl set ~e IDA line.
f. The peripheral equipment half detect step “e”. (The peripheral equipment may clcaI tie EIR lie
any time after detecting the setig of the IDA line, hut shafl clear the EIR lie before the
computer wifl rexognkz the next EEL)
g. The computer shaff cleer the IDA Ike before sampling the next word on the ID lines.
10
MIL-STD- 1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
*
Any peripheral device consrrucled to MSCIhe requirements specified iu 5.1.1.2.1 shall also UICC1 Llre
rquiremcnLr spccitied in 5.1.1.2.2. In order to mea these raquiremcntx, peripheral equipramt consuuctcd 10
use the EfE sbalf be eunstructed m either simufmc the EfE or disable the circuits IJIMdetect dre EIE.
5.1. i .2.3 Transfer of ID. Wheaevcr au W baffer has bsea cstabfisfredfor a cbanael. the computer aad
tie peripheral equipment on hi chaanel sbalf rraasfer data as follows
a. lle peripheral quiprnsm shall place word of data on the ID lines.
b. llrc peripheral aquipnmut shafl set the fDR line LOiadkme that a word of data is uu the ID lines.
c. The computer ahaJfdetect the setting of the fDR fine ia awmdarrcc with imcraal priorities.
d. The computer shall sample the data word that is oa ti fD lines.
e. The co uter shall set b IDA line, indicating drnt it has sampled the dam word
on th% hues.
f. The peripheral qaipmem shall detect tbe setting of the IDA Iiae. (The psriphcral eqnipmem may
clear tie IDR Iiae any tirm after dstccring the settiag of the fDA line, but shaUclear the IDR
before the computer will recognize the next fDR.)
g. The computer slrall clear the JDA Iiae before reading the next word on the ID lines.
‘f’heeompurer and peripfrsral cqrdpmeru afraflrepeat this sequence for each successive word of data uatil tiey
have traosfermd the block of data wnrds speciiled by the input buffer conoul words.
5.1.1.3 ExterasIlv soecilied irrdexine (ES (Not afl eqnipmsnl have LbeEN mude, see individual
( quipmmrt specification.) ES mud fu O w ereby a periphsredquiprmm caa, uader its conunl, send
data to or receive data from on~~f aay~% of assigned storage areas in ffrecomputer’s menmcy. fn the
ES] umde, data transfers are governed by buffer cnntml wnrds specfied thruugb an iadex provided by Ure
pcripheraf device Ttre imfex poirm so au ESI accessible address iu maiu mmury that contains the buffer
corroul wnrd used tn control the data traasfeTfnr that peripheral device. Under ESI cmmnl, buffer sizes shall
be limited by the leagrh of the buffer cuntrd wnrd which ia a fummionof the rnaia mmnry wnrd length.
a Because of dre caeurnryaddrrss structures ia sommcompurers, it may not bs pussible in )3S1mude m access all
nf rnaia rrcnmry. tiy I/O clranael shall be capable of EN buffer mode operatinn. ES data uaasfers sbalf
be idcmicrd m normal buffer erode data transfers, urzpt that the exrerrrafdevice sbafl specify the index
addrms in accnrdaace with procedures fm the particular computer.
5.1.1.3.1 ES] ID buffer. Whenever en E..$I fD buffm has been esrabMrwJ for a reel. tie cn~u~r
aad the peripbe~ MPMpmanton that chsuael shall mmsfer data as foUows
a. The periphsml cqriprwnt shall place the ES address on tbc lower haff of the ID Iiue.sand a word
of data m the Uppelhrdf of ths fD lines.
b. ?he periphersdequipment sbafl set the IDR hue to indicate that an ESI index address aad a word
nf data is nn tie ID lines.
c. The enrrrputsrsbaff detect the sariag of the fDR hue ia accordaaw with intcrard prinritics.
d. ’13ecomputer sbafl sample the ESI address and tbe dam word thaI is nn k ID liars
e. ‘TIrecomputer shall read the buffer conrrul wnrds specified by the ESI address aad shafl stnre the
data word as specifkd by the buffer conucd words. ‘f’henthe DA he M1 bCseL ~difig
that the ESI address aad the data word on the fD fines has bsea sampled, aad that the boffcr
mrrunl wnrds specified by the ES] iadex have beta rrpdarcdruralrestmed.
f. ‘k. pcripbemJ equipment ahafl detsct dre swing of the IDA liae. (The peripheral cqaipmcnt may
clear rbe lDR line my time after detecting the srxriag of the fDA line, bnt shall clear the fDR
befnre Urecomputer will recognize the next IDR).
e. The wamutcr shall clear the IDA line before reading the next ESI address and dam word
on rhe”lD line.
The compmer and peripheral equipment shall repeat this squcnce for each successive ESI address and data
word tmtil tiey have oarrsfermd the blnck of data wnrds specitled by any nne nf the ESI input buffer conoul
words, al wh!ch tinrc the input shalI autnmariadly terminate.
11
MLL-STD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
5.1.1.3.2 ESI OD buffer. Whmevcr an ES OD buffer has bcm established for a chaonel, tie
COmPUWSmd tie penphwd equipmmt on that channel abau transfer data aa follows:
a. When the peripfrerafquipmmt is ready m accept dam, the periphcrrdequipmmt shafl plats the
ESI outpnt address nn the ID lines and set the ODR fine (Urismy nfready have frappencxf
kefom thC OD bnffec Wa5esrabfisfrcd).
b. The computer ahaffdetect the setting of the ODR fine in accordance with intcrnaf priorities.
c. Upnn dermtinn of the ODft, the computer shaff read the ES1 output address present on UrefD
lines. (This will came tbe compulm to read the appropriate buffer, mnunl worda, output tie
wnrd fmm the appropriate buffcs, and update and restore the bnffer control words.)
d. Tbe computer dmfl place a wnrd nf data, slum tbe appropriate bnffer, on the OD fines.
e. The computer ahaffs the ODA line m indicate that a wonf of data ia on the OD limes.
f. The peripheral quipmcm ahafl derect the serting of the ODA fine. (The peripheral eqnipment
may cl= Ihe ODR line any time after dctecdng the armingnf the ODA fine, but shall clear tbe
ODR line before the mmputer wifl rccogoize the next ODR)
The pcripheraf equipment Sraff sample the data wnrd that is on the OD fines.
:: ‘f%ecmnputcr shall clear the ODA line bsfor’e.pkmg the next word nn the OD lines.
The computer and tbe periphemf equipment ahafl repeat tfds sequence for each successive ward nf data until
they have transferred a block of data words aa apecifkd by one of the ESI nutput bnffcr control words, at
which tirm the ontput shafl he autnmntimfly rerminarcd.
5.1.1.4 Extemallv soecified addressirw (ES . (NOLaff equipnmus have the.ESA mnde, see individual
~nipmcnl specitlcations.) capable of extemalfy spmified addressing operations.
(The selection of ESA arnde ~ fished through switch selection, pfited ckcdl cud tigea, or
cfmssii changes, and ahaffk. specified in the individual equipment .spedtication.) An ESA mnde chaff
pmvidc periphcmf deviees wilb a crmansof spdfying an absolute rmcnery location fnr stmage or retrieval nf
data on a word-by-wnrd hasia. An ESA input (input or Ef) active ehanael shaff rcspnnd to an input request
(input or Ef) aa fnllows. Tfrc lower one-half of the input lines ~ be aacnpIedto detemdne rbc msmory
address imo which cfredata is to be stored. The data on the fD fmea abalfbe stoccd at the address (only the
upper one-half of the input lines shsdl contain aignitlmnt datzu the lower nncAcdfof the input Iimx sbaff
contain the ~mnry address). An ESA outpnt (ontput m EF) active channel shall respond te an output
rsquest (outprt or EF) as foffows. The lower one-half of the input linss shall be sampled tn determine the
memory address that mnrafns the data Tbc mntcnt nf that memory lnmtinn sbalf b-soansmitced tn tie
output channel.
5.1.2 Ca~gory II, sequence of f/O events. When cmmccted aa abowo cm figure 3, two compntcm shall
tmnsfcr data. as spectiwd hereur. IC chain cl mntrol lines abafl fimction as spccitled in table DI.
TABLE fff. Fnnction of IC channel mntrol fines.
Receiving Transmitting Direaion Function
computer fine mmputer line of signal
Receiving computer to Set condition indicates readmeas of the
EI@/ EFft mmnitting cnmputcr receiving compnter to accept an W
command word on that channel.
lDR Ready
I te
Transmitdne comouter Set condition indicates that the ImIrsmittim
receivin~ mm&ue.r
I
mmpnter has @3Cd a wnrd of dau+n~ fie
(ODA) OD lines of that channel.
I Tmrrsmitting computer I Set rendition irrdicamsthe cnmsmitting
EIR EFA tn receiving m~utcr mmputer has placed an EF command word
en the OD lines of chat channel.
IDA Resume Receiving computcc to Set condition indicates the receiving compuccr
(ODR) O’ammittingComputer has sampled lhe fD lines of that channel.
1/ Not all computers have the EfE line; see the individual eqwprnem specification. )[
12
ML-STD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
Tfracompurcr h.% ia outputting data is defiied as tie tmnsmitdng mrrrfsatcs. Tbe cmnpurer Uralis receivirrg
tfte data beieg ou[puued by tfretmnssniuing mrnputer is defined as the receiving mmputer.
5.1.2.1 Transfer of buffered corrmrarrdwords. Wbmevcs the traasnritdng eomputas has an EFR line
and the rcceivutg computer has an ME 1 then mrrsfer of buffered command womtsshall be possible.
Whenever arr EF buffer bus been estab~m~ in tbc tmasmitcing mmqrucerfor a dsatrrrel,the mursmitting
CO04JutCrand the receiving computer ahalf transfer a command wmd m folfows
a. When the rsxeiving cnmputer is ready to accept an EF mrnmaod word, the receiving computer,
under program corrtsnl,shaff set the EIE line.
b. la accordance with intemaI priority, the oansmitdng cow:m ShSII*WI the =~g Of rbe E~
fioe (wbicb wifl be secirgaizuf as the EFR line).
c. The oansmittiag mmputu abaff place en EF mromand wnrd on tbe OD fines. TIICEF cu-d
word dralf be held on tbe data MS until tbe receiving computes sets tbe Reaurm.line or until
the tsarramittingcnmprrter program imervenrs m resolve the no Resume condition.
d. ~oD’mhsntting computer abaffset cfrcEFA line to indicate that lhe EF mmmaad word is on the
e. fa accordance with irrtexmdpriorities, tbe rmeivirrg computer ahalf detect the ae~g of tbe EFA
line of tk oansmitdng cornpurcs(wbicb will be recngrriaxfas the EIR line).
f. ‘llre receiving computer shafl sample the ID lines.
& The receiving ccmrputcrshall clear the EIE line.
b. llre seceiving computes abafl s tbe LDAline.
i. The transmitting mmpura shall dc&ct the setdng of the IDA line of the recziviag computes
(wfrichwill be swcognkd as the Resume fine).
j. The Urmasrrisdngmmpurer slrall clear EFA line befnse placing the next word on the OD lines, sod
the reccivirrg mmprrter abafl clrxwtbe fDA firrebefnm reading the next word on
the m lines.
TIE onnartritdng and redving canfruters slnll repeat this sequence for mcb aumive cnnrrrrandword UUUI
they have totasfss’mdthe block of corruomd wosds spcxified by the mmscnitdrrgcomputer EF buffer conuol
words. In tie event that the remiviog cmnpu$r is capable of boffered El rrrmafera,thm tbe receiving
COUIPUICfS EI b~fer COIMIO1 WWdSM SPSCIfY a btifm Imgrb equal LOUE oarrsmitting COMPIUCI’S EF
boffex length.
5.1.2.2 Transfer of a forced corrnnand wosd. Whenever the transmitting conrputer does not have an
El% Iiae, nf the seceiving computer dues not have an EIE line, then a conmrand word afraflbe oarssfemcdwith
farce. Whmevcs the crsmmt iosouction of the transmitting compurfxfrrngrrmria a formal EF, rhat mmputer
slaal!irarrsfera single command woscfto the otba computer as follow
I a. The tmnsmitsiog mmputer sbalf plain an EF mnrmand wosd on the OD lima. The EF mmrrsmd
vmrdshal lbeheldo nthedatalimaundl thercctiving mmputer~the
I Reaunre line, or until the transmitliat?mrrrouwr
-.. moanrm
- imesvmes to se-solvethe
rrn-Reaurm ccnrdition.
I b. Tfreo’aasmirriogmrnprner abaffset the EFA line m indimte that a command wnrd is
on the dam IiLWS.
I c. In accordance with internal priorities, the receiving computa SEWdetect the serdng of tbe EFA
line of rlre oaasmirtiag mrnpurm (which wilf be r’eur~zsd as k EIR line).
d. The rmeiving computer shall sample the ID lines.
e. The receiving computer sbafl set the fDA line.
I f. The trarrsnrirtim mummer sfrafldetect the setdag of the IDA fine of the remivim-. mmrmter
(wbicb will& recc-gaizedas the Rcsuxncline):
g. Tire O’aasrnitriagcomputer shafl clear tbe EFA line befnse placing the next wnrd on tbe OD lines,
and tbe receiving mnrputcr shall cleas tbe IDA line before sampling the next word
an tbe ID hem.
13
MlL-STD-l 397C(SH)
1 June 1995
5.1.2.3 Tmusfer of datn. Whenever rm OD buffer has been sstsblished in the mmsmitdng computer
and an ID bufkr has been established in the receiving computer for the same chsnnel, the lrmrsmitting
COMPWCI md the rmeitig computer shafl transfer dnta as frdfowx
a. ‘fle tmnsmitdng mmprrter shall plsce a word of dare on b OD lines. The OD word shafl be held
m tie &m lines until the receiving mmputer sets the ResmIK.fine, or until the o’ansmiuing
mmpu~~ Pm&W.minEWmes tn resolve the nc-Resnrns cnnditinn.
b. The transmrmog computer sfraffSC(the Rmdy line to indicate that a word of dats is
on the OD lines.
c. fn acmrrfanee with inremaf priorities, the eiving mmputer shnfl detea the sdng of tie Ready
fine of the transmitting mmpurcr (which will be recognized as the fDR line).
d. The receiving mmputcr shall sample the fD fines.
e. The receiving mmputcr shall sel rbe fDA line.
f. The o’uusmireingcomputer shall detect the setdng of the IDA fine of rhe receiving cconptrter
(which wiff be remgnized as the Resume line).
g. The oansmitdng computer sbaff clear the Ready Iine before placing the next word of data on tie
OD fines, and the receiving computer shall clear the IDA line before smnpliig the next word nn
the fD fines.
The cnmputem sbsff repsat this scquencc until they have.rmnsfcrmd the blnck of words specitied by the
bnffer mnunl words. Buffer lengths spccitied by tab computers shsfl he the same.
5. I.3 c.9tw01Ym. .SCXIU ence of f10 events. The category fff interface sbriflrequire one of the
peripherals m ftr.rfOrrnthe fimCtronof rbe cnmputer as spsc~led for category 1 interface (SW5.1.1). Tire f/O
interface hetwecn a peripberrd-periphemlslralf mmsfer control and data words by mmns of the reciprocal
interaction os spccitied for category I (StX5. 1.1).
5.2 Pamffel interface, elearical. The fnUowinggencrsl mfes sbaff spply tn each of the categories for
each intcrfacc Tw~BC ,, sod H:
a. Deta signafs (psmffel) - the sctusl strut (binary one or zero) of the date fines shell be dcrmrcd by
smsing the dc level rather than by deuxdng a cbrurgefrom bimry zcrn tn binmy me (as in the
case for control signrds, MC5.2 b). Thercfnre, the hoes need not be cleared between successive
words as is the case with mnrml lines. The dnra nn ths data lines shall be stable m the dmc the
lines we Ssmpled.
b. Control signals - EquipmcnL eilher computer nr peripheral, sbalf rccoguizc mch binary one
remivcd on erry mnrrol line by detcctiug the volrsge change of the signnf. The equipment,
either computer or periphersf, shell not rmognizt nnother birmry one on that control hue until
the cimoits have been cleared by a binary scm on thst cxmtrolline is agsin set to binsry one.
Cnnool signsfs sfrsll be logically detected os qwified hcmin.
c. OUtfmt- For OUtpULthe mmputcr shall provide a defay between garing data to the output lines
end setting the ODA nr EFA fines. This shall — that drm signals am stable for sampling
any tixm the ODA or EFA lines are S.5LOnce setby the peripheml equipment, the ODR and
EFR signals shafl rcmsin set until the mmprrm sets the mrrsspnndmg acknowledge line (ODA
fnr ODR EFA for EFR).
d. fnput - Once LheIDR or EIR has hmn set, the peripheral equipmcm shall not cbarrgetie stare of
the fD fines before the mmputcs hss acknowledged the rquesL The only exceptions me that
the IDR m EfR muy be cleared before the IDA is rcmived, if the possible loss of data is of
sscondruy imporrnnce.
a
MU-STD- 1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
~o oft) ;;’~-ewmb~
A interface. The Type A (NTDS slow) interface shall be characterized by nominal values
.“. and binary -, respccdwly,md by aswitcbimg ~=h.ld of
I
-d.O~ 1.5 Vdc. Parallel data buasfer shalf consist of up m 41,15d7words pa -d on one cable.
Dmation of signals aud timing between signals in the cmmmmication sequence
shall confnrnr
5“2”]”’ *m e app ca e hems shown on figures 4 through 7. The fiscdtsarc expressed es absolute
missknusmor absolute maximmm and shall demotethe foflowirsgreqoisersrms
a Neither the initiation nor the termination of any control or data signal shall eccur snener than
specified on figures 4 tbmugb 7.
b. Each equipment sfsallrecognize date and cuntrd signafs Usatcrccmet the dms specified, or at any
dnrelafes tbanthe times specified and thatcsist foranydssmdon equelteor greater fbantbe
datafion spceificd.
c. ne &g reqoireusmLsapply so ~gocy 1,11.~d fIf ie~wc.s.
5.2.1.1.1 Ef when fDR line is seL The pcriphecalequipment shell clear the fDR line at least 20
micmsec0nd5 @s) bcf data on the ID fines msdshall set the EfR line. This timing shelf prcvem
OseCOmputcrfmm in E1cafeword ontfre IDlisresaseefD word.
5.2.1.1.2 fDR when EfR line is SCLThe peripheral equipnmt shaffclear the EfR line at Last 20 w
before cbnnging the Ef daw on the ID lines and shall set the fDR line. This timing sbalf prevem tfrecmsrputer
from interpreting the fD word on the ID lines as an El cmle woni.
5.2.1.2 Tvoc A ielertke, CirUliL
5.2.1.2.1 Type A iromt amPIitier. Each Type A input amplifier ciscuit shelf be a siagle<ndcrf
empfifier aed shatt have the fOffowmgCbamcCeristics
● a.
b.
The output of tk circuit sfrrcllswitch h-em b- zcm CDb- one whenever the input
signaf changes in the positive direction flrrnugfrthe mege of -73 Vdc CD45 Vdc.
‘fle output of fhc circd shafl switch from binary one m binary mu whenever the input
signal changes in the negative direction tlsrnugb the mnge of -4.5 Vdc to -7.5 Vdc.
c. The output of the circuit shall not switsh as a reardtof my iaprrt tmnsiem-fmfsesignef
tbnt has err integrated aruplitude-dmation of less than 15 Vdc pa ps (delay of 15 ~
I 0.5 w with a 15 Vdc step issput).
d. The output of the circaii shall be binary zero wbcrreverthe inpet is open-circuited.
e. The circuit shafl nut sink mere than 4.0 milliazrrpres (mA) fur a steady state binary one
intmt nor aoru’ecmnrc than 1.0 MA for steady state birtasy sao iIIOUL
f. T%e_oufputof tbe circuit shafl be binary zero wlienever the iteady stale.input signal is
more negative than -7.S Vdc.
g. ‘he output of Oreeisutit sbafl be binary one whcneves the steady state inpul signal is
mm. pnsifive than -45 Vdc.
S.2.1.2.2 Tme A output lie end cnntml Umedrivers. E@ Type A output line end conord line driver
circuit Shd] drive a smgbeded input mophfler end shrdfIiave the folfnwing chacteristics when driving a
lnad with capacitance of r5000picofarads
a. The steady state output voltage rcprcscnting a binary one shaff k -1.5 tn +1.5 Vdc.
b. The steady state output voltage repremming a b~ mu chaffbe -10.0 to -17.5 Vdc.
c. The voltage variation ameng all binary zcm output sigaafs on one chennel shall SIOI
excccd 1.0 Vdc.
d. The vohme verintion anmne efl bimrv one OutDutSkMfS on one CbMme]Sbd not
excccd-1.o Vdc. - ‘ “ -
e. The circuit shall he able to SOLUCC 4.O MA per line for a steady state binary one outpuL Each darn
line driver sireuit that drives mere than one line (for esample, fnur data lines per circuit ie
mmputers) shall have prupertionally more capability than specified here.
15
MIL-STD- 1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
f. The circui[ shafl be able rn sink 1.0 MA per line for a sh?adystate binary zern OUIPU1.Each data
●
fiae driver circuit drat drives ~rc. dmn one fine (for example, f?nr data lines per circuit in
mIIIPUtCIS)$df bave prqmuonafly more capability than specdied bsre. Sinking describes the
drivefs ahhty to arxorrumdatc. current flow into the nnrmal output circuit due m the bias
voltage on the inpul circuit on the other end of the line. Whenever the driver output is more
negative than the bias on the input cirsuit on the other end of the line, cnrrc.ntwill ffow toward
the driver’s normal outpul (the condition opposite to the driver being dm current source) and
the rhivcr shall be able m absorb (sink) the spscifkd current flowing toward the OUtpUL
L?. The outpuI of tbe circui! sbalf switch in not mtrrethan 6.0 IIS(mcasured between 10 and 90
percent amplitude pninta),
b. The output of the circuit sbaff switch at a rate of nnt mum dum 5.0 Vdc pa IIS.
i. The circuit afdl drive the lines and termimidcrns(input amplifk.r) while switching as well as
in the steady stats condition.
j. Whenever puwer tu a conuul line driver circuit is removed, the driver shaff prcsem not less dmn
100,000 ohms impedaace to the line, with tbe re-sttictim dtm the line voltage (because of the
input circuit on tbe other end of tbe line) shafl be within tbe range -10 tu -17.5 Vdc.
B interface. Tbe Type B (NTDS fasl) intsrfass shaff be cbaractsrizcd by.nnminal vafucs
of O.~#_-*_tbinary one and binary zero, rcspsctively, and by a switching threshold of
-1.5 ~ 0.4 Vdc. ParaMeldata oausfer sbaff cunsist of up tn 2.50,000words pee second on one cable.
5.2.2.1 T e B rinrin . Dumtion of signafs and timing between signals mmmanication sequence shall
conform m Lbe_ts sfmwn cmtigums 8 tbrn”gb 11. The limits areexprcssed as absolute
minimums or atrsolmc maximums and shall &note Lbefcdfowingrequircmenw.
a. Neither rhe initiation nor the termination of any contrnl or data sigaal sbaff occur suuner than
shown on figures 8 through 11.
b. Each equipment shall recoguizc data rmd control siguals tbm erczurat the !ims specitled and that
exist for any duration equal to or greater than rbe duration spczifled.
c. 71e timing rquiremsnts apply to category 1, II, and fff interfaces. o
5.2.2.1.1 Iouut timing, Peripberal w uipment iotcrrupts. Rquirmmnts sbaff be the same as specitled in
5.2.1 .1.1 and 5.~.1.l.2.
5.2.2.2 Tvpe B interface, circuit.
Iifier. Each Type B input amplifier circuit shafl be differential t~e
amplifier and have tbe following cbaractcristics
a. The ouqrut of the circuit shafl switch from binary z-muto binary nne wfrsnevcr the inpnt sigtral
changes in the positive dimztion through the range of -1.9 m -1.1 Vdc.
b. The onrpu! of the circuit shall switch fmm binary one to binary mm whenever the inpnt sigoaf
changes in the negative ducmion rhmugb the range of -1.1 tn -1.9 Vdc.
c. Tbe outpnt of the sircuit sbafl noi switch as a rcsuft of any input transisnt-pnke signaf that has an
amplitude betwcea +7.5 V& to -7.5 Vdc if the duration and amplirade are common tu boti
sides of the line (comuurn mode).
d. The cmtputof the circuii shafl be binary zero whenever the input is open.circuired.
e, The circuit shafl not sink mnre than 1.5 MA for a steady stats bimuy one nor source more than
0.5 MA for a steady state binary zero.
f. The output of the cbcuit shafl be binary zeru whenever the steady state input signaf is more
negative than -1.9 Vdc.
g. lhe output of the circuit shafl be binary one whenever the steady state input signal is inure
pnsitive &m -1.1 Vdc.
h. Tbe input circaiLshall present a terminal impedance tn the line equivalent to a resistance of
150 to 180 ohnrs in series with a capacitance of 0.0068 tu 0.0100 mkrofarad.
MU-STD. 1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
5.2.2.2.2 Type B ourput line aed meovl Iiee drivers. Each Type B outpuI fine.aed control line driver
circuit shafl dive a chffermtie! type of input amplifier (datn line ream aball be.iemrpnrrued imo the driver in
order to maimain dfifemadaf integrity) and shelf have the folfowing chamcteristicawhen driving a line witi
my cbamcteristic impedance between 100 and 180 ohms
a. Tbe steady fate output vrdtege repmsendng a binary one shall be 0.0 m -0.5 Vdc. Tbe
45 Vdc peiet ahafl be indicated on aff Type B tirniag diagram and is a timing reference.
b. The steady stare output wdtege m.peeseetinga binary rmo shall be -3.0 m 4.5 Vdc (it may be
mm negstdveif the input circuit being drivcmpresema a omre negative signal, with the
reaoictitm tbas the negative vekage present fmm the input circuit being driven sbafl not exceed
-7.0 Vdc). The -3.0 Vdc point shall be indicated on elf Type B timing diagmms
and is a dining refrra!ce.
c. Thecircuit aftallbeabfetn — 13 mA for a sready stau binary one ourput. Each d.waline
driver ckcnit that drives omre UraOoee line (fer example, fem dale lines per circuit in
CZJmpI~,I’S) aldf hw pmperdodfy mere capability dran specifkd here.
d. The crrcmt shall be able m sink 05 LOAfor a srmdy state bieary rero OutpuL Sinking describes
the driver’s ability te acmrmmdate -t flow imn the normal output circuit due to Orebm
veltage en sbe input cirmit en the orher end of the line. Wfmrevcr the driver output is mere
negadve h the bias emtfreinput -t en the oher end of the line, mrreet will flow tewrwd
the &iver’s nomraf ouqmt (b mndidon oppnsite m the driver beiig the curreet seurce) and
Ihe drkm shaff be able to absorb (sink) the sfx!dled curreet flowing toward the outpuL
e. The orrtpet of k cimrit sbafl swirdr m not more than 0.4 W (mmsured between
-0.3 aed -3.0 Vdc.).
f. ThCtiIt ShafftiVC SbCfiUC8=ldsamixratiens (iput amplifier) wbife switching, as well as in
the steady stare conditions. Each data fim driver circuit that drives mere than one line (for
VIC ~ ~ ~= w tit iUcoqmtem) shall have Pmperdonally mere capability
thanapmmedfrere.
g. WbeoeV~ pew~ m a .mntrel we ~ver c~t is remeved,the driver ~ present not less than
100,M)Oohms iqedance m the line, with the rem-ictien that the he vokage (because of me
input circoit en ti otha eed of W line) ahafl be within the range of -3.0 tn -7.0 Vdc.
I
C interface. The Typ C (ANEW) interface shaff be cbamcrerized by nominal vafues of
O.0#~~._t bmomeandbinaty zero, mspective]y, and by a switching threshold of
+1.5 ~ 0.7 Vdc. Pamflel data traosfer shaft consist of up to 250,000 words per second on me ceble.
I shall ~i’~-le
C einrie ~tion of sigeafs rmd timing between sigeals in the memmrriaion
limits sbowe on f- 12 dm@I 15 (sigml rcq~~~,~~$:~~
sequence
C
interface). Tbe Iimits are expressed es abardnte minimums m absolute mminmms
following Kquiremmw
I a. Neither the inbiatiee nor the termination of any control or data signal shall eccur seoner than
shown on figures 12 Ihrougb 15.
b. Each quipmmt chaffmcogeize data and mnuel sigrmfsthat ecmr at the times specified, oral aey
time later thaa the times specified, and that exist for any duration equal le or greater than the
dmasion qx?citicd.
c. The timing requireuxmssapply se category I, 11,and HI imcrfaccs.
5.2.3.1.1 Tvoe c ioput timing, peripheral ~pmmt imMTUPIS.
FLequimnmts shall be the same M
SPCCifkdin 5.2.1.1.1 and 5.2.1.1.2.
17
MfL-STD- 1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
5.2.3.2 Tvpe C interface, CUCUiL

5.2.3.2.1 Twe C inrmt anmlitier. Eecb Type C input amplifii circuit shaff be a differential me of
arnplitler aud shall have tbe following characteristics
a. The output of tbe circuit shall switch frnm biomy zeta m binary one whenever tie input sigmd
cbmtges in tie negative dircctinn thrnugb the rouge of +22 m +0.8 Vdc.
b. The nutput nf the circuit shall switch fmm biuary one to binary mu whenever the inpuI signaf
changes in the pnsitive direction threugb the rouge of +0.8. tn +2.2 Vdc.
c. The output of the circuit shall not switc.bas a resuft of any input Uam.ieut-pufsesignal that has an
mqditedc betwsm +6.0 eud -6.0 Vdc if the dumtiuu and amplitude are cuunnon to bnth sides
of the fine (cmmnnn mode).
d. The output of the circuit abafl bs biuacy mm whenever the input is opm-ited.
e. The circuit shaff not sink umre then 2.5 mA when a +3 Vdc sigmd is appliti tu the signal input
tcrminaf, end sirafl snurm not more than 2.5 MA when 0.0 Vdc is appfied at the signal input
tcrmdnaf (return terminal grumrdc.d).
f. The outpnt of the circuit shaff be bw zeru whenevextbc stcedy state input signal is mere
pnsitive than +2.2 V&.
g. TIIcoutput of the circuit sbafl be bu nne whenever the atmdy state input sigimf is rmre
negative than +0.8 Vdc.
h. The input circuit shaff pre.x.ut a tcmeinufimpedance tu tie fiue equivalent to a resistance of
110 tn 160 ohms in scrie.swith a capacitance of 0.0068 tu 0.0100 micmfarads.
i. The input resistance of the signef input eud return input taminafs shall be matched tn
within i 8 pctCCIIL
5.2.3.2.2 Twe C output line and cuntml fine drivers. Each Type C output fine and cunuol line driver
circuit shalf drive a cbffemedef trhsr and sbalf have the fnllowieg characteristics when
driving a line with any CfraraCm~COiI$b~&tWm IIXIand 180 ohr.m.
a. Tbe steady state output voltage representing a biumy one shall be trc.twcen0.0 and +0.45 Vdc. o
The output driver shaff bs able tn sink a cement nf at feast 40 MA at tbc +0.45 Vdc level.
The +0.45 Vdc point shafl be indicated on aff Type C dmiug diagram for a timieg reference.
Sinking &scribes the driver’s ability m accumumdate current flow into the normaf output
cirmil due te the bias voltage on the input cimuit on the otfm end of the lie. Whenever tbe
driver output is more negative than the bm nn the input circuit err tbe other end nf the fine,
currem will flow tnward the driver’s normal output (the conditinn opposite tn the driver being
the cmreut source) rmd the driver shaff be able to absorb (sink) the specitied cnmmt flowing
tnwerd the output.
b. Tbe steady state output voltage representing a binary zero ahaffk%
1. PIUS2.7 Vdc minimum whm suurciug 27 nwl The +2.7 Vdc pnint shafl be indicated on afl
Type C timing d~ aed is a dmiug refeamm. Each data line driva circuit that drives
rrrnrethan one line (for example, fnur date lines per circuit in mmputers) sbaff have
prnpurdnnelly more capability than specifk.rfhere.
2. phIS 4.5 Vdc maximum when open-circuited.
c. The output voltage fall time (90 tn 10 percent) sbafl be less thao 100 nanmemnds (ns).
d. The output voltage rise tim (10 tn 90 Pment) shall be less tbae 10+3ns.
e. Tbe circuit sbaff drive the lines and tmminations (iput ampfitier) wbife switcbiig, as well as in Lbe
stmdy state cnndition. Each data line driver circuit that ddvss mere than one Iiue (fnr example,
four date lines per circuit in computers) shall have proprnonefly mnrc capabifity &mu
specitlcd here.
f. Whenever power to a control fine driver circuit is reernvcd, tbc driver shall present not less than
100,000 OhIUSimpedencc to tbc fine with tbe rcstrictinn tfratthe tine volrage (due m the iuput
circuit nn the other end of the Iiue) is within the rouge of +3 tu +7 Vdc.
18
MfL-sTD-1397c(sH)
1 June 1995
● 5.2.4 T e H interface. The Type H imerfacc sbalf be characterizedby nominal values of

0.0 Vdcand~tt binary one end binary zero, respectively, sad by a switching drrr-shokl
of +1.5 ~ 0.7 Vdc. Pamffeldare uansfcr shall mnsisc of up to 500,000 words per second on one cable.
5.2.4.1 T% H ti~~ Dure,tio n of sigmds sad timing betwm sigaafs ia tie communication sequence
chef] confomr to e OPP ca k frmmsshmva en figures 16 tbrnugb 19 (si~el mquimnrcnts for tfrc Type H
iuterfam). Tbe limits are expressed es absrduse mininarnrs or ebselute maximums that shall denoLctbe
following rquiremeuts
a. Neither the initiation nor the rermiuation of any conuel or data sigmd shao escrrr seater than
drown nn figures 16 I&@ 19.
b. Each equipment shafl rezogeisc data aed conuol signrds UISSnccur at the dress specified, or at rmy
titmlater thaerhe dmrx specified, aedlhat exist fnranyderedcatqunf rurrrgmererrhantbe
duration specisicd.
c. The riming requiremcrrrsapply tu category 1, II, end ffl interfaces.
5.2.4.1.1 Type H input timinE, PCrioheml Q uipnrmt iutsrmpts. Rquiremeats shafl be the same as
spcdied iu 5.2.1.1.1 eud S.2.1.1.2.
I 5.2.4.2 TYOCH interface, cirmdL Reqrriretncmsshall be the stuns as specified ia 5.2.3.2.
5.3 Tme D irrresfacc.
5.3.1 TYrrcD intsrfece. physical. Type D UO sfreunels shafl emrrsferup to 10 Mb/s biuary iefotmation
usiag bipcdarsenaf * trains an two cables. The signafs rquired for ieput tmusfee shall occur on the input
clmuael. The siget$ rquired fox eutpet Ormsfersheff rrsmr on the output chermel. The Type D iuterfaec
shell be.dcs@ed to ieterfam with Type RG-12A maxiat cable es specified in ML-C-17 end MfLC-17/6, or
with Coexinfcable beving dmmteristics quivaleet m RG-12A maxial cable. Each input channel shafl
,0 require one coaxial ceble, aed each nutpuc charmel shall reqeim oue coaxial cable.
5.3.2 Tme D fntmfece, functional Type D oaasfers sl@f be.acmmplkbed usiag rwo types of bipolar
pafse Oaius Cemml fmrrra -~ in 5.3.2.1 end mnuol end date words es spxifkd in 5.3.3. The fust
bipeler puke or bit of emlr pm% tmirr sbaff be a syechrenizuimr puke ead shafl be a high , logic one. A
binary em, W be a pulse.of phase rzzo degtus and rJreObe a high polarity foUowedby a low polarity. A
binary zem shalf be a puke of pbasc 180 degnxs and shall be a low pobirity foUowedby high polarity. The
transfer of a word fmm one equipnreut tn anothee equipment sbafl ose the folfowing general
squerrcc of events:
a. w oausmitdrrg@pnreet (the quipmem that will tmusurit the word) shaO send a mnaul Game
reauesME ae eventual word oansfer se the mceiviu e41uiPrnmL
b. The &@ti-g quipnmM (the eqeipmmt that wiff recekc ‘b wnrd) shall send a control fmrnc
grrmdng -:on to transfer he word m the tmemrdttiag equipment.
c. The rmnsmitdng equipment sheff send the word m rhc receiving quipmem.
5.3.2.1 Conoml frames. Camel frames shaff be tftrec bits, a syncbmnimrion bit followed by Iwo
control bit-s. The cenml used on en iuput cbarmel shall be as *owe on figure 20. The conwol
frames used on aa output sbanael sbrdl be as sbnwn on figure 21. Bntb mnoul bits may be set in one control
fmrm. The data word o’ensndrtedfoI1owingthe control frames exchanged sbafl be identified at rbe rccciving
@pmml by a Wordidentifier bit trensuriucd with the data WOIYJ.
19
MlL-STD. 1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
5.3.2.1.1 Restrictions for conurutcr. The usc of control frames by the mmputcr shaff have t-be
●
following restrictions
a. Tire computer (oansmitsing computes for IC operation) sbaff bc required m smd the EF word or
OD word only when the comspnndmg mntml frmction is specified by the ORCF arrd the
corresponding bnffer is,active. When these conditions,do nnt exist, the computer (O?msmitdng
computer for IC opcmuon) sbafl be required m re-umsatc the oimsfer squence by sc.ndmg
anntk output errable cerntml frame (OECF).
b. fn mspmrse tn an input request conoul frame (IRCF), the mmputer (oausmitdug cmnputer for lC
operation) shall be sequimd tn send sm inpu( enable COISUOIframe (IECF’Ithat mmespnnds tn
the active fD m Ef buffer.
5.3.2.1.2 Restrictions for pcripbeml. The use of cunool tianres by peripheral equipurmt shaff have the
following rwrictions
a. Pcriphcraf quiprrmrt sbalf duriuguisfr between control frames and darn wosds by smans other
ban the fixed sequence of events speciilcd herein, as the puss.ibifiryexists for a computes tn
tarrriuatc and se-initiate an mnput or EF buffer bCtWCUIeVeIItSiUtfw -.=. ~. si~rion
woufd cause the mnrputcr tn send two consecutive OECF.
b. Peripheral cqrdpmmt sbaff be rquired tn accept and scud data wurds UuMam the lengdr of Lfre
mmputer WOKIeven if the petiphctrd equipment does not use aJl the infmmrationbits
in the clawword.
c. Peaipherid cqoipment shaff be required to smd the EI word or LOword only when the
CUKCSpUndmg mntrul function specikled by the IECF ccmmponds tn the pcriphesaf
quipmmt’s Ef or ID status. When dsis rendition does nnt exist. the periphemf equipment shall
be sequircxfto m-initiate the input transfer by sending anothex IRCP.
d. fn sespcms.etu an OECF, pcriphemf equipment Sbd be required tu send en ORCF that
●
muesPunds to the scams,that is, the mpability m accept an EF or OD word.
5.3.3 Data word fOms?ILData words shall be a synchmnimtinn blt folfowed by a word idmdtler bil
and the information bits as shown on figure 22. When the data word is an input wosd, the. -~g
quipment sbaff mnditimr the word identi]cr bh as folfows bii zao if the WOscf is fiPut b. bii one
if the word is au EL When the data word is rm output word, the uarrsnrirdngquiprmnt shalf mndbion the
word identiler bit as follows: binary zero if the word is OD, binary one if the word is an EF. lk. number of
information bits shaff nornrafly be equal tu the mrnputer word length. Data words onusrrritted tu a mnrputes
sbafl require that the number of information bits be equaf to the wnrd size used by the mmputer.
5.3.4 Categnry I output channel operation. The mmsmis~innof OD words and EF wnrds frum a
mmputer output cbann 1 ml quiprmnl shall occus m accordance with the event squeuces
specilled herein. The =; amcms shall be as specified in 5.3.8.
5.3.4.1 EF transfer Sequeme. When the mmputc.r aud the pcriphesaf are ready m pesfnrrn an EF
mmsfer, tie scqucncc shall be in the folfowing stcps
a. lle computer shalf send the OECF with rfreexmrmd function enable (EFE) bit set
m Ihe peripheral @pIIEDL
b. The peripheral quipmmt shafl respond by sending the.ORCF wblr the EFR bit set
tn the computer.
c. The mmputer, in accordance with interuaf priorities, shall send the EF word 10
the periphernf equipment.
Steps “a” through “c” sbafl be repeated for each EF word transferred.
5.3.4.2 Ford EF mmsfcr, The oansfer nf a forced EF sbaffbe the sarm as the EF, except that
the computer s%allsend dre forced EF word whether or not the ORCF from the peripheral equipment spccilies
the EFR.
20
MfL-STD- 1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
5.3.4.3 OD word transfer wtumce. When the computer snd the peripheral equipment me ready to
perform an OtI word tmmfer, the sequence sbafl be in the frdfuwing steps:
a. The cmrrputershrdl scud the OECF with the output dnta amble (ODE) bit seI 10the
peripheral equipmenL
b. The periphed equipment shsfl respund by sending the ORCF with the ODR bil set
to the computer.
c. The computer, in acmrdsrm with internal priorities, sfridfsmd the OD word to the
periphemf @pMCSIL
Steps “a” through “c- shuffbe repeatd for each OD word rmnsfared.
5.3.4.4 Peripherrd ‘no! ready” operstiun. ff the computer is ready to tmrssfrxerrEF or an OD wrmdand
the pcriphemf cqwpnrcot is not ready, the periiherd equipmsm shelf respmrd whit a ‘not ruufy” ccmtrnl
fnurre. Tbe cumputcr chaffrepeat sending the OECF for each ‘nol rrody” cnntml frame fmm the peripheml
equipment until tie paipheml qrdprmut is ready tu accept an EF or SDOD wnrd.
5.3.5 Catwory I irmt cbsrsnel ouemtiou. ‘k oanatilon of fD W d ~ We m a mmpu~

input cbsnnel fm Isrdloccur in accmdsncc with the event squarcm specitled
herein. The tit a~~{~w~tipl=~n~ specitled in 5.3.8.
5.3.5.1 fD word tnmsfer sequence. Wbm the enrnputer nnd paipherrd equipnsmt me ready tn perfnrnr
m ID WOfdOWISfCT,Lk.Se(plCUW Sbf] 6S in the foUOwingsteps
a. The.peripheral equiprmnt sbafl send the IRCF with the IDR bit set m the ca uter.
b. The muspufa shall respond by sending the fECF with tie input dutn enable~E) bil
sel to the peripheral equipmenL
c. The peripheml equipment sbaff send the fD word to the mrnputer.
Steps “a” through “c” sfrsfl be repeated for each W word oasrsfesred
5.3.5.2 EI oansfer sequence. When the computer and peripheral qoipmem are ready to perform an
EI transfer, the sequence sbafl be fi the frdfowirrgsteps:
a. The peripheral quiprrsem sbrdl send tfrefRCF with the EfR bit set enthe.mmputer.
b. The morputa sfraflrespond by seuding the IECF with the EfE bit set tn tbe
peripherrd WuipmmL
c. The peripherof equiprm.m sbufl smd the El word to the mnsputer.
Steps “a” through “c” shafl be repeated for each EI word O_ansfemed.
5.3.5.3 Cnrrrmmr ‘not ready’ umre tion. ff the peripheml equipment mqrmsts the Oarssfa of m fD Or
ml El word madr e mmpwer is 001ready m accepI the word, the mruputer s.bsflserrdthe “nut ready” control
frrmseto the peripbeml quiprrrcuL lle peripheral equipnmrt sbsll repmt sending LIEfRCF fur each “nol
ready” contrnl fmmc received fmm the compuler until the pcriphensl equipment reaives the fECF (with the
aPPropfiE enable bit sel) fmm the mmpwer.
5.3.6 Cntegory 11channel uoeration. For IC operation, the output cbnnnel of the trrmsmhdng
computer sh~ be comected m tie input channel of the receiving computer. The timing cquirements sbafl
be 2.sSpCCii_iCd
h 5.3.8.
MfL-STD- 1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
5.3.6.1 lC EF sequence. When the mmsrrrirdngmrnputer is ready rn mmsurit an EF arrdtie receiving

m~u~ ISr=dy w acmpt au El, the scqrrcncs shall be in the following steps
The rrausmittiug mmputcr sbafl send the OECF wib the EFE bit set m the receiviug mmputer.
:. The receiving cnmputcr abrdldve the OECF as m IRCF with the EfR bit .SCL
c. The remiviug mrnputcr shall rcspnnd by sending the fECF with the EIE bit set tu the
uansmitdug mmputer.
d. l%e mmsmitting mnrputcr shall EC&% the fECF as an ORCF with the EFR bit seL
e. The mursmitdug mmprrte.r,iu ecmrdaucc with iuterrralpriorities, shall amd an EF word tn the
mceiviug computer.
f. The receiving mmprru.r abrdfaccept the EF word as au EI word.
Steps “a” tbmugb “~ sbrdf be repeated for eaclr EF word uausfemed.
5.3.6.2 lC forced EF. Afrcr the rmnsmitdng mqrutcr has mmsmittcd au OECF, rmd after either au
ORCF with SUyCOMb ination of OD request m EF nxpm.ator neither bits set is received fmm the receiving
mu or a miuimruu rimmut of 20 w nccms, the trammitdug wmpum abafl send b EF word. ~C usc
of
‘% I fnrmd EF vmrda abafl require mrtain pro-g considerations as specified iu 4.4.Z
=%!3-yma.to accept
‘“3”’”3
rmcwmg cmnpmer ra
When the uansmritdng mmputa is ready m uauamit en OD word aud the
au W word, the sequeuce shall be in the foflowing sups:
a. The transmitting cumputer shall send tie OECF with the ODE bit w to the recciviug mmprrter.
b. lle receiving cmrqrmarshall rcmive tbc OECF as an IRCF with the IDR bit aeL
c. The receiving computer shall rqond by sutdmg the IECF with the IDE bk set tn tie
h-auamitdug mrnprrtcr.
d. ‘Ile tmnamirdng mmpurcr sbaff receive tbc fECF us an ORCF with the ODR bit CCL
e. The uansmitdrrg mrnputer, in acmrdanrz with iuterual primiries, shall scud au OD word to the
receiving computer.
f. The rmc.iving mruputer sbrdf accept the OD woxdas an fD word.
Steps “a” through “~ shall be m.pcatedfor cacb OD wnrd mausfemed.
5.3.6.4 lC “not ready” nvcration. If the trammitdug mmpurcr is ready rn tmusfer an IC EF or IC OD
word rrudthe rccrm’mgcomputer is not ready the receiving mmprrter sbafl respond with a “not ready” conool
fmmc. The mmsmittiug cnmpurcr”slmllrepeat acnding the OECF for each “not ready” mnunl fmmc from the
receiving computer until dm remiving computer ia ready 10accep( an El or au fD word.
5.3.7 Cate ~ m. The catcgnry m interface shall require one of the
pa-form ..+.. Cnmp”ter as spcifid fnrcatsgo. I ilrtmfam ,m%!’4%%p5Y&:tflcr
peripheral cquipmsnt shall function as a ❑mmaf paiphcral device. The f/O imafece bstwem a peripheral.
pexiphemfsbrdf tmusfcr mmml and data words by -s of tie rmiprnmf iuteaacdmras specified for
-gOq ] (S= 5.3.4 mrd 5.3.5).
5.3.8 TVPSD charusl timiug (categories I, II, arrd UQ. To rrasnrereliable data Uauafer,the foUowiug
signal timiug resmcuons shall be -~ OfC41UIP_tS mVOkd. ~c. tiMiUg.$@fkf hacin is pltditi
on and iucludes propagation times fur a cable 1000 feet long. The nominal propagation time is 15 na/fnnt or
1.5 IISfor the 1000 fnnt cable. Unfcss otherwise specified herein, the timing requirements aball be m?=rsnrcd
from tie leading edge of the syncbrunimtion pulse rraauciatd with one event tn tie leading edge of the
syncbmuization puke associated with the succeeding CVCIILEach of the fnUnwingtiming mquimurmts refer
to the timing on each individual cable
a. Consecutive mntml frames. The tirm between mnsmurive mnrxol frruuss (trarramittcdby the
same equipment) shall be not leas thau 20 ~s.
b. OECF or ORCF. Tbe rim between mmprrtcr h’ausnrissionof au OECF aud the receipt of rm
from a peripheral equipment sbafl be not greacr @an 10 pa.
22
MlL-STD. 1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
c. time exccedcd. If tis time cxcceds 20 IISthe ccmrputcrshall bc required to

send --- -—. .——m rransfer is still
——----- -_ ___ desired.
___
d. ORCF m rfnra Tbcre shall bs not rime limit between rhs tints tlrs mnqrutsr rsceivca the ORCF nnd
_ = computer uenarnirs the requsstcd OD wnrd.
tbeon=ti
e. output Irn swrcbmnization. The tires Lrsewemthe mdfing edge of ths last word and next
b’ shelli be not less rhsn
---------- -.–. 200 ns.
f. Et%m ~n’~~$~~imc between receipt of en IRCF and the “the fECF shell be not
grenter
.—. .—rhn -- ---
& IECF bernf @pSDMI abeffbe rt@ird S0trnmmit an hlptll WOldwiti 15 W Of
: m “’mL
receiving ‘~~~~trvam
sn U?( rmnsmisainnof en ECFend tbcreseiptnf en input wnrd
ahallbenntgr
h. mization. Ths Sims bstwecn the trailing edge of Ore.fast bit of an input word to
fnprn to SWcfm----
the next IRCF b11ahan1 bs nnt less tbsn 200 ns.
i. Except when the oansrrdttar is mmsmkdng, !hc receiver abdf m=ive
j. Tisrdng requimmnts of the bipnler pulses alrsflbe as shown nn tigum 23.

5.3.9 TVPSD elesirical interface (cntsgories 1, ff, and fIQ.
5.3.9.1 Temrdrratien. lle Type D interface tsmdnednn shelf be elecrricaffyes shrmmon figure 24.
The cmtxisdaliield ahaff be cnmrected tn signsf grnrmd at bnrb ends end the coaxial nmmr sbrdf be mnnectsd
rn cabhet gruund at Lralrends. Both the oammittcr snd receiver abalf bs rsquircd rn incur no dmrragennd
Sbsll mums normal opemtinn after a sbnrt circuit between the ssrinf intafacc lines either at the mexief
eonneceor or at the o-ensmiteer-nxeiver conrrectinns.
At tlss oansmitrcr end, the bipolm pufse of * 3.25 volts abeffbnve tbs drrdng,
vnksg~;~~s.o-tirirsresss abnwnon fi.gere23. Tbebi.bmfrrdaetminahelf rcpmsmtthemriel
binary dsts abnwn on figure 25.
5.3.9.3 Switchin levels. Tbe receiver input volrngeswitching levefasbafl bs as folfows (input vohnge
refers tn the voetiver input pins):
a. The seceivrr ou ut shafl remain srable (not switch) wbm the input voltage is fmm
0.0 tn +03 ? dc.
b. Tire receiver ouqmt sbaff switch whenevsr the input voltage exaeds + 1.25 Vdc (ebsnlutc).
5.4, Tm E iererfece, ~ TIE Type E (Low Level Sexiaf&f-S)) interface is dra’iv~ ~m STANAG 4153
and apphes m catsgory , , and ID interfscm. The Type E pmtesd does not SJmge SC8WrflCSS of wberber
tbeintiece is frmcdoning asmecgory I, Ifor Ifl. AType Ef/Ointerface mmists of en nurput functinn
(snrrsce)end m input tirrsction(sink). Type.E operation requires intamsrrreuiorr of a amrrce to a sink. The
snume ia thst end of the irsrerfacewhich trnnsmits inforrnsdnn fmrms (D%).‘he aink is ehet end of the
interfece which receives II%. BntlI the source and the sink abaffbe capsble nf o-aeanrittingend receiving
mnunl fmrma. A Typs E inrrrfnm shelf trsnsfer ffs fmm the snurce tn tbc aink after tbe exchange of mnuol
frames. A Typs E snrrra to sink imcrmnnection is shown in figure 2.s5.The serum and the sink Iimctions
shelf bc present for a two-way data transfer. A Typ E interface full duplex signrd flnw is shown
in figure 27.
5.4.1 Frarnsa. Type E intcsface ahafl use two franc types: mntd and information.
5.4.1.1 Cnno-nl frernes. Conoml frmms abeffbe used 10mnrdinare the trnnsfer of infnmration over Lfre
Type E interface. Aff mnuol fmmes ahafl bc 4 bits in length with nn psrity checking. There sfraffbe two
types nf conrrnl thmss snusce sums conunl fmmc.sand sink warm mnoul frsrnm.
5.4.1.1.1 Source somuscontrnl frsme. The snerce abrdfunnsmit source status (SOS) contrel frmncs tn
indicam the status of tbe source es shown m figure 28. The fourth bit of rhe SOS mntrol f- shall be sero.
This bit wns reserved prinr to Revisinn C of MILSTD-1397. The irrdividusl equiprmnt specification sbnfl
defiie wbe!lm cornpatiblfity wiOrequipment bnving rmdefmcd setdngs for this WILsbalf be reqimxf.
23
MfL-STD- 1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
5.4.1.1.2 Sink status mncrcd fmmc. The sink shall tmesmit sink status (S1S) control fracms to indicste
the stetus of the s’mk as shown in hgurc 29. The fomtb bit of the S1S mntrol fmmc shall always be one. This
bit was reserved pcinr tn Retilnn C of MIIXfD-1397. ‘he individual equipment specification shsll define
whetk? compatibility with equipment bnving undetincd settings for this bit sbnlf be required.
5.4.1.2 Ioforrrration fmmes. The Type E inccrfsce sbsfl w iccfocmstionfmmes (IFs). sbnwn in tigure
30, m oaesfer information from the snurce tn the sink. The T~ E interface shall use two rrrdc.s of F
transfer singfe word mmsfa (SWT) IFs and burst Oaesfer IFs.
5.4.12.1 SWT informsticrnfmmc. The SWT IF Shaffmmist of a Symchmnization(s) trk a word
itfcntitier (WI) bit. me 32 bit”mfocrrrsd”mword (fW), and me optionaJ parity biL The NV shall consist of
eitfmxa dsta werd m a mmrnanrWmenncptword (CIW). ‘flmdate word tmesfers darn frnm snurce to sink.
Tbe C~ imnsfcrs m-cls frnm snmce m sicdr. The CIW shall always be scrrtas a SWT. Fez Navy system
m~ttbfity, ~e-n-nfbitsti thcinfnrmstion wod.foreihera&m wordoraC~, sballbe
32 with no parrtyor 3 WItbpsnty. see figure.31. The SWT IF is the &Gmh nmde.
5.4.1.2.2 Burst nmsfa ieferrnadon frame. ‘flrc bmst Lc_smfm~ m bS =M~ tc!tbe ~sf= Of
dEitllWCdS. lleburst tmnsfcxlFabsObevarisb fe in bmgtb within tbe range of one &ta word to a msximum
of 32 data wer’ds. The burst transfer IF W consist of me synchmnimdne (S) bit nnd one word
identificdnn (WI) bit foffowed by a minimum of 32 biLSin the dsta word with nn parity or 33 bits with parity,
tn a maximum of 1024 bits with no pmity or 1056 bits with psrity. See figure 31.
mplemmtcd, the snurce shall generate ndd pmity on
oanA4~2~5~V panty aball
WW beis grsrerntcdusing
i the Wf bit and the 32 bits of eitbec tbe data
word m CIW ns shown in fi&re 31. For bmst ormsfa IFs, tbe parity bit for the fmt 32 bit data wed shall be
gcncrrrtedintfresmm manna as fortbe SWTIFnmdc. All mcceding 32 bit words in the burst tr-rmsfcrIF
shrdl have ndd parity gerremtedon the 32 bit data word nnly. The parity bit for each wnrd shall follow tbe
last bit of Oredata word. See figure 31.
0
5.4.2 Pretncol. The Type E interface sirrk and seurm sbalf opemte per the foUnwingpmtnd
a. Tire — transmits eitk a SOS control frame or err IP and receives S1S mntrol fmmes.
The SOS mntrcd franc iedimtes the availability of an fF at the source.
b. l%e sink mceivea SOS camel frame-sand IF’saed tmmmits S1S cmrucd fmmes.
The SIS mrroul frame indimtca the ability nf the sink tn receive an IF from Lbesource.
c. llre sink shalf be quicsccnt rmdf it receives a SOS camel frame.
d. The source shsll Mince channel acdvity by serrdmg a SOS ummol fmcm.
e. llrc saurm shall nMrammit a SOS mntml clam?.if the S1S mntml fmrne tinm tbe sink is not
received within the mspasc b tiL
f. ‘fle sink sbafl recognizz an lF by the fact that rmrc tbrm four bits sm. received sequentially.
‘fhe source and sink sbaff exchange mntml &mm even wherethere sre no fFs to transfer.
E: Theability oftbesink toacceptae IFsfrsfldetemdn e the coding of the S1S mntrol fmme.
llresnurce shaflnse tbe SISmntmlfmmc tndclmcmr e which IF type . . (data or CfW) the sink is
capsble of receiving.
i. The same shall deter-minethe mding nf the SOS cwnmd fmme based upon the fF type (data nr
CIW) avrdlable fnr unnsmissinn. lle sick sbrdl usc either a SOS control frame or IF tn oigger
the next SIS control frame The sink need not decode the ‘2ndand 3rd bits of tie SOS mntrol
fmme. The cede maybe used for pmpnses such es mnnitoing md amdysis.
j. A,C~-trrmsmi~ withnut the preceding S1Smntrnl fmme indicating a readiiess tn smcpt a CIW
ISaetcml as a torced commsna.
5.4.2.1 Fnrced co-d. ff rcqdrcd, the use of forced commsnds SW be as specified in the
idvidual equcpmmt spemhcatmn.
24
MffATD- 1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
5.4.2.2 Transfer Seauence. Ibe Type E information mnsfrx sequenm shall be ns follows
a. The sonree shall smd a SOS control frame tn rbe sink.
b. The sink shall aend a S1S mnoul frarm m the source.
c. lle source shall send a SOS conoul frame nr fF D the sink in accordance witi Ox S1S mntrol
frame tvm. received and tie source mndirion, afl in acmmfancewiti rable fv.
d. Steps “b”’~d “c” aball be repeated mndrmnualy.
TABLE fv. TWSCEsnurmmsun me tn S1S mm-cd fsmm.
Source Condition
Nothing m smd HaveClw Have Dara Haw BOIII Have Forced
SIS RcceNed CfW and data Command
Not No fn~nation Haveefw HayaDaM
Rmdy Have BOLII
SOS Cfwk%-alm
Ready No h$oDsti021 Cfw Frmm Ha:ama
for Clw Clw Fr-am? CfW Fram
Ready No InfWf f.koy Data Word
for data Frame OaoIWord From CfW Fram
Ready No fm%onadnn cfw Frmm DaFm~d
for either CfW Frarm Cfw Fram
S.4.3 -. TkEType E in&rfacz timing between frames shall be as shown in table V.

TABLE V. Tw E dnrirw imerwda.
Respnmibiliiy Fmm To Tires Inkrvaf

Sink Trailing edge of Leading edge of 500 USmin.
SOS control Game or fF S1S conwl frame 150 ~ max.
Source Trailing edge of Leading edge of 500 ns min.
MS Cnoml fssms SOS conoul frarrE or IF 1 m Imx.u
M Tbe 1 ndlliaecond (MS)maximum interval fnr the mum re-spnnsesbolf be imposed to psrmil
indcpmdem line moniroMg, or 10permit LIEsink 10detect a source or cable faifwe by rbe
cessadnn of repetitive signafs fmm rbe snurce.
5.4.3.1 Reinitiation. A source r-iving no S1S mnowl frame rsaponse shall mmsmit control fmmes at
a mte of one frame every 300 W * 100 ps
5.4.3.2 Sink respnnse. If the sink cannnt oansmit tie S1Scomrnl fmme witi lids sbnwn in table V,
the sink sbafl not smd any S1S conmsl fram?.
5.4.3.3 Receiver recovery. The receiver sbafl be ready m rsspond tn tie frames specified herein except
when rbe Oansmver !s Omrsmtdng and for a minimum nf 350 ns tn a maximum of 500 ns, thereafter.
5.4.3.4 Modulation ti . The mndufation rate shall be 10 million birs per second with a Inlemnce of
0.1 percent. l’he bil timing be as shown on figure 32.
25
MffATo-1397c(sH)
1 June 1995
5.4.4 Modulation. The Type E interface fmme bit amdufatinn shall be Manchester 11split phase
mndufation @sn known as bi-pfraselevel mndufatinn). A one bit is represented by a positive pufse fcdlowed
by a negative puke. A zcm bit is rcpreacrmd by a negative.puke foUowedby a pnsitivc pufse. The one and
mu puke phases sbafl be as shown on figure 32.
5.4.4.1 S cbrnnizmion. lle exchange of signafs on the Type E interface channel sbsff be
=W~~._W~nn impli- qI ie~ndmt~lwk~m (ml in syecbrnnkmbw at..
w ~UMCY) M =h ~IVW. CI~ infnrmatmn sbaff ~ +rIved fmm @s received signal at the receiver.
The tirst bit of evsry tmnsrmsslon, d.xgnatcd the .synckmuzannn bit, sbafl be a one.
5.4.5 Ekaicaf CkUSCUriStiCS.
5.4.5.1 Chuxmtcharacteristics. MeasumrrMzNof the output voltage, waveform distordnn, output nnisc,
etc., absfl be made fme-m-be at the equip-[ J/O mnnecmr wbm the output is terminated at the f/0
mmectnr with on impedance of 50 * 5 ohms.
5.4.5.1.1 output pnwcr. Tbs output shall dxive the cnkdereferenced in 5.4.6.1 terminated by nne
mmsmiver circIuL
5.4.5.1.2 Ou ULwaveform. The output waveform envelope shall be as shown in figure 32. The
❑onrinaf mqut v~600 mV. llre output signaf shaff have the bring, vnhnge levels and
oamition dmsa as dmwm iu @urs 32. There shaff be no revwaaf of dimcdon of vnltage change whife the
tid is ~ he O=sition mgon Of * nfJ mv. ~r OUtfmI~vefo~ ===~n~. tie ~ginn~g Of @e fit
bit &fl be mcaaumd fmm the +60mV level, and tbe end of the law bit if it is O,it sbafl bs nrmsumd frnm the
+60mV level, if it is 1, sfrallbe mmsursd fmm the -60mV level..
5.4.5.1.3 output noise. Output nnise shall nnt be greater than * 30 mV pmk-tn-pmk with the power
on but nm transmiuing.
5.4.5.1.4 output wavefnrm distnrdon. The cerrrbiition of ovmsbnnt end rmdembnnt distortion SJUW
nnt excccd 150 mV. The readuaf hansmitter voltage distrdon &If not exceed *60 mV in tbc interval
betvrecn the end of the last bit and 2 bit times after the fast valid uansition of the last bit. The totaf Oansrnitter
output noise sbalf nnt exo.xd i 30 mV in the interval bsnvem 2 bk times aftsr the zem crossing in tbe middle
of the fast bit and tbe next o’ansrnkinn. ‘fk output waveform distnrdon abaOconfnrm m the waveform as
sbnwn in figure 32.
5.4.52 fnum characteristics. fnpm requirements apply at the equipment UO cmmectnr, rnmaurcd
Un*t*line from a nnrrdd source impedancz of 50 ohms.
5.4.5.2.1 Input compatibility. The input sbalf bc compatibk with the inmming signals ~own
in tigm-e 33.
Tbe remivcr shafl respnnd m input signafs having peak arnpfitudes
e r-iver sbafl nnt mspnnd to input signafs having pmk amplitudes
not greater than 155 mV, or a volt-time prnduct equal to or leas :han W-9 voll-semnds.
5.4.5.2.3 Receiver puke widh. fnput sbaff decode mccived signal pufse widths specified in
figure 33. The minimum pulse width S&U be 5 ns as rma.sumd at the * 220 mV level. For input wavefnrm
rmasurements, the kginning of the fit bit sbaff be meesured fmm the +60mV level, and me end of the last
bit ifitis O,itsbsflbemcamred fmmtbc +60mV level, ifit is 1, abaffbc measured fmm the -60mV level.
26
MIL-STD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
5.4.5.2.4 Im edunce. With the equipment either on or off and the trarsmdltsr not tmrrsrrduing,the
magnirude of tbe+’amp x ISIpUlrmpufom%Z shall be SOohms nominal. ‘k imPCAMImprcsentr.d 10UK
intsrface cable at rhe equipment f/O mrmeaor sbalf b .mcb that rhc retrim Ioss from 1 MHz m 60 MHz dues
not exceed rhe Ievcfs spsdkd in figure 34. Ile shaded arm in elmfignre 34 rc+m.sentshe range of
acceptable values across lbe frequency mnge of iDtSSWLConformance wilb tbc remm loss of -22 dB~as
measured widr a ustwork analyzer betwsen 5 MHz and 10 MHz, mrrespnnds ru an imptdanm magmtude
range of 42.6 obrrmto 5g.6 ohms. Conformance with the remm lUSSpmti of tigurs 34 sbalf be
demunstmted by passiug L& L%3as defined in 50.1.1 of appendix C.
5.4.5.25 Reffeuiuns. The input impsdeoce sltaIl be sncb (bat with tfrs use of the cable.specified in
5.4.6.1, firerdected voltage due men incident waveform shown in tigrn’s32 with a psaff amplitnde of 750
mVaudriscJfrdl tirmof6Sln7.O os(lOto SO%)shaU benotgrmfer ehau*’250mV asobssrvcdaStfre
so- iuteafacc200 us efrer the fast vafid ~sition of ths fast bit of rfrcfmem. Cnnfurrneme to this
r~e=.nt sblf be rfcmunsrmrd by passing the reflection M ss &fmed m 50.12 Of Wptmdk C.
5.4.5.2.6 Comousire swkm channel noise. T%emmpmiee system charmsf noise at the cabiiet
mnnecror interfecx m rbe oms permd of 400 us afecr the fast ram vnlfage uossing in tie middle of the lust bit
of the frame and rmtil the smnsrnissh of UISnext EramEdue w all UIUS=S (rcfkdous. Wmsmimr OUSPUI
noise, Oasmbta residual noise, ets.) sbalf not exceed 200 mV ~-m-peak as sbnwn in iignra 68.
Confnrrmmectu tlds req@renrmI shafl be dsmunssrmtd by pessmg k composite systsm channel nnise test es
defined in 50.1.3 of appendis C.
I 5.4.5.2.7 Commm mnde reiection. Commun mode signals fmm DC to 2 MHz with ampfiordes up m
20 volts, peak-rn-pmk. andsrgoalsfr om ! MHs tn 20 MHs with umplimdcs up to 5 VOIIS, pmk-tn+eak, shall
not degrade the paformaurx of the receiver.
5.4.5.3 Intufam circuits. The iorerfam shall not bs damaged by cable opm cirmiLs or by shorr circuits
of the fOUOwingtypes
● a.
b.
c.
Lmc404ine.
Liu~to-grmmd.
Voltage sourms of O ru 115 VAC, 60 Hz, lm~m-grmmd.
5.45.4 ,~&,
Gmnndin The tYo~~g sys~m ~ in accnticetiti DGD-STD1399, s.ricm406.
Additional gronn g requrrcrrcrrts fur tbe Typs E interface.shrdf bs es follows
a. The cable gmrmding sbalf be as shown on figurs 26.
b. llrc ours sbisfd shall bs considered es a condmradon of tbe cabiiet ground end sbafl nut be used
as the.si@af ground.
The ours shield shaff bs terminated et cabinet geurmdat boor tie source and tbe sink.
:. Both ths signal mnduaur (ecnter umductor) nod tbs irm~ shiefd (nmrru) shall bs isolated from
cabma grmurd and signrd g?mmd
e. TIE signal ground slsall be isufered frnm the cabinet ground within ebccabinet.
5.4.6 P~icef interface.
5.4.6.1 C&de. A 50 obm uiaxial able shall be the medimn ftx the Typ E imerfac-?. The oiaxird
cable mnsists =antcr couductur, an inner shield end arrmrrer shield. Tire muter mnducmr (sigual) and
inner shield (renun) provide tie rrammission lime,and burb shoff be wlated fmm tie OU~ ~eld (c~~et
ground). MIL-G17/134 -58) cable SbSffbe.used for cabfes krqlths up to 120 rrmcrs and MU-f2-17/135
(TRF-8) for cables lengths up to 300 metsrs. (See 30.1 nf appmdix A).
5.4.6.2 Crmnccsnrs. The wmnmror rmumed on the cqniprsrcmbulkhead sbafl be idmrim.1,in so far as
rbosr.potions that fie outside of tbe caMmeLwirh the bulkhead jack spedtkd in MIL-CAt9142/02. when
rising the cables defined in 5.4.6.1, the mating plugs specified in MIL-C49142/01 (refer m 30.3.2 of
appendix A-) sbafl be used.
27
ML-STD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
5.4.7 System integrity features (SIFQ The Type E inrerface SfFs abaUbe implemmtcd for improved ●
diagnostic capability acrdsystem reliaknhty. These error detection features impmve the integrity of the system
by detecting loss of comrcceuication,prutecol violations, and data corruption. The SIFS operation, which
iucIudc source timeout, sink timeout. sti ptity, SM timing. afi fiegfl cOnditiOn,md mnwOl tie
validating, is dcfmecliu the following paragraphs:
5.4.7.1 Source tinrenuL A source timeout ccmr sboUOCCCIC
under the two folfowieg conditions
a. The.sink fails m mrfxrnd within the anuccctirumut period cu SOS control fmme-s
indicating that the anurce baa an fF tn acrid, or
b. The sink respcmdawithin tie snnrce timeout perind and the S1S cmmul frarrrcresponse
doca not affow tbe source te transmit the IF.
When tbe source has an fF avaifable for trausmiasion, il abao start the antuce timecmttimer. Failure of the sink
tcrrespond with a S1S control fiaroc indicating it ia ready to accept the fF within tbe aerrmerinrmut period
aball be dcteued aa a anurce dmmnt c.rmr. Tfcetimer shall be react upen receipt of a S1S cuntml fmrm
iudimdng the sfnk is ready m receive the fF or whee the aorrrceis no longer reedy m trausmil the IF. Upa
tbe timer rcactdug the timeout valnc, ae errm bit shall bc.set in the channel status rcgiater, if implemented. ff
the source is beard within equipment having sturd prngcacncapability, err irttcrntpt ahaff,be gfrmcated. If
tbe soerce does not have stnrd program capability, an qrripnxmt indicator or oclrcrnreans of operator
notificatiuu sbafl be used, if implemented. The value Of tbe SOUKW but ti~ Ml be SPC~l~ by tie
individual application. (See 40.2.1.2.1.1 in appmdix C.)
5.4.7.2 Sink CiIDCOnL A sink timmut error eccrrra when the source decs nnt rmpend with a SOS
wntrol harm nr Sk wdm the timmut peried. A sink timcnrn dmcr abafl nrmriter the mmmuuication of the
suck vritb the source.. The sink timeout drrm shaU stan when tie siuk is ready to receive au fF. The dmcr
ahafl reset upen receipt of a SOS ecnmol fmrm nr fF, or when the sink ia nol ready to receive m fF. Upen
the expimtinn of siok timeout timer, au error bit sbafl be set in the channel status register, if implemmred ff
the sicdcis Inmted within rquiprmnt having stnruf program Capabtity, au iotemupt afraobe generated for the
channel. If the siuk &es not have armed progmm capability, an qrdpmecrt indicnter (i implemented) or
ocher rnmns of opmater no~lcation nray be craed. e
5.4.7.2.1 Sink timcmrt oerind. Tbe value of the sink timeout perind shall be 1.5 cm.
5.4.7.2.2 “SOS StarI” rrmde. If implemmrcd, the “SOS Start” cmde alraffbe a selectable. Wbcrrthe
“SOS Start” de k disabled, dre sirrkdtnmut timer shall operate aa described in 5.4.7.2. When it ia enabled
upon either system fxrwcrup or initialization, one SOS mntrol frame sMU be received befnre the sirtk dmwu(
function ia mabled, cbm sink timeout timcc opemtion shnUbs aa dmmibcd abnvc. This sbaUbe used cu verify
the host inrerfacc ia operadng before monitoring sink timeout renditions.
5.4.7.3 Sink tit . Tbe Type E chaeuel sink ahaUmonitor the fF received fnr cocrca parity.
SOS and S1S a-s dhslf not be mnnicmed for parity. Parity error detcaion as defiioedby
pamgcaph 5.4.1.2.3 aud figure 36 shaU rcault in a bit set in the cbacmelstoma rcgiatcr, if implemcutcd. If the
sink ia lecated within equipment having atercd program capability, Cbeaemingof this bit in the chsrmcl status
regis~r shall result irr a cbanuel imcrrrrpt. ff the sink is beatcd wihin qrripmcm witi no stnrcd progmm
capability, the setting of the bit in the channel status register abalf rmcdt ie the tmusrniasieu of the cbarrnel
sti3Nsregister by cmacrsof the snnrce channel, if onc is implemmted. Otherwise, an equipment indicater (if
implemented) or othm means of opcmtrrr notilcation may be used tn indicate the sink parity error.
5.4.7.4 Sink timin The Type E channel sirdcshaU rrrurritorthe IF tn verify the reception of the
currecl number of bits. $or SWT, the chacmelhall verify the receprinn of 34 bits fnr no parity or 35 bita with
parity. For burw transfer, the sink shall verify that after tire First34 birs have bmn received for no parity, or
35 bits with pari~, that tbe rest of he bits in tie IF are rtudtiples of 32 for nn panty nr 33 with parity.
Reception of Icss than or mere than the correcl number of bita sbafl mult irr fhe sctrieg of a bi~in W channel
stanrs register, if implemented. If the sink ia located with quipmem having stnrcd program capability, the
setting of this bit in rfrechannel status regiatcr sbaUrcscdt in a cbaeuel icItctmPL ff the sink is bc.atcd within
equipmcrrt having no slnrcd program capability, Uresetting nf the bit in tire CbaMel status mgiStCIstralf result
irr the mmstission of the.channel status register by means of the source channel, if one is implemented.
Otherwise, an ecpripmcntindicator (if inrplementcd) or other means of operator notification maYbe used m
indicate tbe sink timing error.
o
28
I
MUATD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
,0
5.4.7.5 Sink ilhxsf condition. The Type E clranrrel sink skall vsrify that when the “not ready for CfW”
or “not ready for da bave been rraasrniteed by nrmns of the S1S control f=. UVXtie =~e
deca not respond wi% %;m=nding fF. If rfrs sink receives ass fF with a data word aftsr erarrarrritdng a
“not ready for data” bit irr the previous S1S control frame, the sick shall set se arrrr bit in rbe cbaeael status
rcgiarm, if lermnted. ff the sink rc.mives an fF with a CfW after harmnitting a “nnt ready for CfW” bit in
the previous‘%’ IS control frame, the sti afralf set m mr bit ~ tie -els- ~gia~. if @l~@. ff
the sink is Psredtred m accept fnrced conmrands, &. sink shall not set an crrer bil in the cbarsnel SOILUS
register whm the sink receives an IF with a CfW after transrnitdng a “not ready for CfW” bit in the previous
S1S contrel frarm. If tbc abrk is lncarcd in eqeiprrmt having stnrcd prngrarn capability, an interrupt ahaff be
generated for the cbarroel. If the eqrdpmcet dnca nnt have stnrcd program capability, an indicator (if
impkmmtcd) es other rrrmes of operator notifcstion may Ix used.
5.4.7.6 Cnnunl frarnc til&tion. When irrrpfer=nti, tie mn~l ~ VDU~m ~ O_ W

defined in this paragmpb. we senrce and sink alrall r.rrnnitnr received mntrnl frames for validity. Frarrrcs of
less tharr foer blrs abaft be rkmrded by betlr anurm aed sink. The snunx sbaff detect arr error rrpen receipt
of a cnntml frame in which the 4tb bi! is not a logic eee or upon receipt of a fmme. of grcata than fnur bits.
w cink shaft &tece an error upon receipt of a control -in which the 4tb bit is not a logic zro. Tbesc
mndkions arc indimrierrs of shorted or open cabka. Detection of tlreae errers shelf remft in the aesdeg of a
bit in rbe drarinel atatua register, if irefrlemmtcd. If the equipment has stnred prngrarn cepabtity, an imerrepI
shall bc gerrerakd for tbs channel ff the equiprrsmt dues not have stored program capability, an indkator (f
implemented) nr other msans of operatnr nndfication may be used.
S.4.8 Tme E cbaneel re@ers. Type E channel registers .shaUbc as spscitlsd in 5.4.8.1 and 5.4.8.2.
5.4.8.1 Cbrmrref srstus regiatsr and brdicarnrs. Each Type E clamnet sbsfl have at least me stama
regisltr or eqrrrvafcnt eqwpmmt mfwators tn urdmatc tbe foffowing starn.s (error condition) information
e. Snume timmrm
b. sink lirmnm
sink parity.
:. sink timing.
e. Sink Ufegaf condition.
f. Conool frame vafidstinri
5.4.8.2 Channel suede register. Each Type E cbeneel sfrafl have a rnnde register or control switches to
provide for mab Ihgeeddisab” @ follnwieg conditions
a. Burst trarrafer.
b. source parity.
c. Serrnx drneout.
d. Sourcx forced corrunand (if required to bs eaablcd by hnrdwarc actinn).
e. Siefr parity.
f. Sirds “s0s starL”
g. Sink forced cmrmraed (i rmeiving fnreed CfW cepabifity is suppertcd).
b. Corm-d frame vrdidarion.
5.4.9 SrrurcdSink logic flow. To cm~e that au eqnipruent foUnws identical apprnmbes to
rnechanimrion, lngic flow ~ ~ prOvlti ‘fhey are sa fnlfows
a. Sourve diafpaer (see figure 35).
b. Sink diagram (CCCtigers 36).
Eqrdprmnt employing TYIX E cbsenels shaff be in accordance with these logic sequences or have deviations
apprOvcd by the conh’acting agency.
29
MIL-STD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
5.5 Type F imerface. Refer LOMfL-STD- 1553B (aircraft internal time division mrftiplex bus).
5.6 Type G interface Refer to RS449/RS-232 (RS-449 compatible wi~ RS-232).
5.7 T e J interface. The Type J (fiber optic LLS) interface is Ihe fiber optic implementation of the
Type E .~w (4) optical fibers. TbeType J imcrface shall be identicaf tn the Type E imerfacx
of 5.4 except aa deacribcd in the following:
5.7.1 Framing and protocol. The same comrd and information frame-s aa the Type E intcrfaw shall
be used for the Type J interfa Tfie promcol for tk Type J interface shall be same aa the Type E imcrface.
See section 5.4 and appendix?;
5.7.2 Modulation. The Type J interface frame bit modulation sfd bs unipnlar Mmtcbcater II.
Manchester 11code uses a level Omraition in the middle of each bit pcrind. f% a binary one, the fmt half of
the. period is high, and the second half is low. Fm a binary zero, the fmt hrdf is low, and UK second half is
high. Tle relationship between the electrical signafs wbicb are tmmmitted over the biaxial cable of the
Type E arrd optical waveform on the fiber optic cable is shown in figure 37.
This se-ctinn of the somdard sbalf apply rn point-m-prim connections using fiber optic cables. The
Type J imefiace, apcciiles unipnlar, baseband, Manchester II modulation of the optical signaJ in the pfacc of
the three level, hi-phase mndufation of the elccrrical Type E interface. In praetke this affecrs the fmt and the
Iaat bits. The Type E imcrface prmtncol specifics that the fust bit sbafl bc a binary one. The fiber optic
channel shall be driven from the low to a high stale on tie first transition.
5.7.3 TImin The Type J inicrfaw timing between frames sbaU be identical rn table V of the Type E
intake defmiiiG#kdulatinn timing is shown in figure 38.
5.7.4 0 ticaf reqeirenamta.
5.7.4.1 fnterface definition. The intcrfacc abafl bc dctiml with respect to tie bufkhcad connector.
Each half duplex cbamr el rquire.s mm tibcrs fnr txmsmitig infornratinn and control frames. The fibers for
●
each W duplex channel are comaincd in a single cable mminarcd in a mufti-pin cmmcctnr as shnwn in
figure 39. fn the case nf a fufl duplex channel, two baff duplex cabks (eaeb with 2 tibm) nr a single cable
containing four (4) fibers ahafl be W aa shown in figure 40.
5.7.4.2 Cable plant aasembly. The optical pafamaers are detincd nn the bask of a nmfti-mcrde, long
wavelength, 13111nm transmission systcm using a tibcr with a cor’dcladding diameter nf 62.5/125 Km
imcrface connector. The fiber nptic imcrface comectnr sbafl meet the
Vm fiber with a maximum insertinn 10ss of 1.0 dB.
5.7.5 Transmitter nmicaf interface.
5.7.5.1 Dpticaf power output. Tbe imnsmittcr shalf be capable of coupling optical pnwer into the
mating fiber nf ihe nmput opucaf comecror witi the range specified in tigurc 38.
5.7.5.2 Optical oumut waveform The tmnsmit[er shafl produce tie modulated opticaf signal
waveform as shown m figure 38.
30
MDATD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
5.7.5.3 Emitted radiation. T& nominal peek wavelen tb shall be within tie mage of 1270
and 1380 mm Tbc SpCCmdwld th(FWHM) sbaUbelmsrhsn2 f% nm.
5.7.6 Receiver ooacal imcrfam.
5.7.6. I fnpm omiml wnvefmm ‘l%e.receiver shafl respond to tbe optical signal spccit%d herein. The
bit error ratio (see 5.7.6.2) appliea for remiver input pnwcr level aad timing as showa in figure 38.
5.7.6.2 Receiver bit mm mtio. ‘flas bit error mtio (BER) at the output, with respecI to the tmmsmiuer
input, shall not exceed l&12.
K intcrfacz. Tbe TW K (SCSI-II bus) interface is derived from tbe differcndal version
oftbc%rr##SI-K3T928&109 Rev 10h SmaU CmnfruterSystsms hcrface-fl standard (SCSI-
fl). Tbe Type K interface shall adkm tn SCSI-II except m rfcfmed baein. If implemented, any SCSI-II
nptiooal commands shafl adhere to appendix D (Type K Cnuurrand Sa ). Refer to appmdm E for design
guidance..
A Type K imen%ce shafl fnncrAm as eirber a target or inMatm, or bntk Type K o-on reqoircs
intcmmmction of one or mm targets to one or rmre initiators. Dcvicea sbafl mppnrt nne or mm of the
following mrnbinadons single inidatmkingle targel. single tilriatnrhnufdple rarger. multiple inidamrlsiagle
target, and nndtiple initiatnrhnultiple tMgeL The maximum number of dcvkcs thal shall be on a bus is eight.
Tbe Type K intcrfacc shafl apply en retegory I, IL and IIf interfaces. Tbc Typs K protnml does not change
mgardka of whether tbe iaterfare is fumioniag es category 1, fL or EL
5.8.1 Fhysical chamcmistics. W cables and maaectms qrmifkf in eppcadm A shafl be used for all
Type K irdaces.
5.8.1.1 Phvsical description. The efecrrkd pm-dnn of the Type K interface shall be a bus
configuration cnosisdng of aerks-cnnnected, elsisy-chained grouped pamllel signals. The imerfnm shelf
mnaect two or rmre devices facilitating tirm shared di@aJ inmmnmrmdcation between de~m. Tbe cable
system shall bc mmpriaed of several ioternal and extmnal cable segornts. Exreamd cable segmmts sbdl
mnsist of Umac mblcs and mnmctma exrmmfly mceaaible to tbc devices. fntermd cable scgrmm shafl
masist of those mbks end mnnectnrs inside tbe device mMneL Each Type K device shall provide a pair of
identical WMOXXS nn tbe Cabiiet M eockrsrrre extcrirrr. Aa external &riVe rerrniaation shall bc rcqaired
at mcb end of the ceble system as shown on figurs 41.
5.8.1.2 Cable requimmcnts. Tk tntal bussing system Iengtb inclndmg internal and external cable
scgmmms rhali not exceed 25 mtcrs.
5.8.1.2.1 External cablin AU extunal cable segmmts shall conform tn the cable reqnirrmmts in
appendix A See~ gore
5.8.1.2.2 fmemal cablin . AU iotermd cable scgrmats shall adberc to the aamc electrical rcquircmmts
as dcf--ed fnrex~teraal ceble kngth shall be a minimum from the equipmcm receptacles m
the bus transceiver circuitry. l%e stub length shall not exceed 20 cmtirnctcrs (cm) with a capacitamx of less
than 25 pF. For imcmaJ cabling, stub spacing sbrdl be a mioimum of 30 cm S* figure 41. Differences in
the stab Iengbs between all the signals sbafl not exceed cam than 4 cm
5.8.1.2.3 Cabling elecaicel characteristic rmtricdnn. me intanal wiriag baraess of LheType K dcviccs
rhall forma pan of the tntrd intcrfam. bus end prowls a IbrOngb path for OLberdevices mnnectcd tn the bus.
This mnnecdtity ahalf be provided fen other devices even if/wbca the. dcvicc in questinn is powered dnwo or
innpmative. Tn casare mmpsdbility in all shiplxxard configurations, certain rcsoictinns on the intcraal wiring
harness shall be imposed.
MLSTD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
5.8.1 .2.3.1 Simral-tu-simnf maximum skew rimes. Any/alf signafs on tie Type K bus sbalf eshibit a
maximum signal-m-swmd skew mm of 1 ns per stub when meaaurcd from exrernsf comccmr to extemaf
connectur of the cabinet.
5.8.1 .2.3.2 fnaerdon snd remm loss. Any/all pans when ~d sbaff exhibit a maximum return
]0SSof 15 dB fr’Um0 m 50 MHz. Anykdr puns abaff exhibit a mmimum inacrdon loss of 1.6 dB at 10 MHz
and 2.5 dB al 50 MHz.
5.8.1.3 Comector rcmriremema. The external Type K cabling and nradng corrnectnrs and jacka on
each cabiuet OFeach TW K devwe me the requiremmra specified in 30.3.4 of apperrdix A. Comectora
wired to sxrauaf cables and jacks wbed to inrernel cables sbalf be in accordance with the signaf deraifs
provided in 30.4.1.3 Of apflSndiX A.
5.8.1.4 Address selection. Tbe ad~e.ss selection of each device strafl be user selectable. The address
selection mdranram abrdl be as apec~led m the individual equipment -Icatim.
5.8.13 Extcrrraf temrirration. An impedauce msrching rcmninarur shaff be placed at cacb end of the
TW K brra ayatmu. AU tesminstora shafl be exteriur m the cabiiet of the Typs K device. The extcrnaf
termbretion abalf cunsist of a rusting plug rmd a sealed backafrell conodnbrg the termination networks wbicb
can be placed on any Type K jack of a device. See 30.8 of appendix A,
5.8.13.1 Terminators. Each terminator network sbaff provide a resistive tcrurination for each bus
signaf consisting of a series cmmectinn of one 330, one 150, aud one 330 ufrm rcsiatma. One 330 ohm
resistor sblf be comected to gmrmd, rfrc other aball bc connected tu a 5 volt (nomirraf) aignaf called
l13RMPWfL’ ‘flia resistive impedance combination m the signal pair wfdcfr is terminated at each end with the
150 ohm resiatnr ahaff be 122 ofurra (measured across the 150 ohm resistor). SW !iguse 63.
5.8.1.6 Electricef desa’iption. Type K shaff be irnplemmred aa a rrudtiple user bus architecture
raninibrg all the features deurifed in SCSI-II except as nod. ‘fbe rmdti-user bus pmtncol aball be maimained
for aff implermzutations including puint-t~point. Each Type. K differential bua sigrmf sbafl be implemented
sa one of ths foffowiug five electrical signrd types
a. Gmrplerneutary Orivsn – complermurmy driven siguafs sfraff be activel y asserted, actively negated,
and corrtaiu an off stats. Aaerdon, negation and off slralf be acnssd by the receiver in a
dtiferentisf manner.
b. Wti-ORed - tied ORcd signals sbsll be actively aaaerkd, psasively negsrcd aud mntain rm off
stare. Aasefion mrd negation abaff be sensed by the receives irr a differcnrisf manner.
c. Signaf Ground Lima – ahrdf provide zcm voltage rsfereuce esrd abrdf be provided isr pa.ira (GND).
d. Temrriuator DC - ahrdl be 5 volt (nombraf) and W be provided in @s (Tf3RMPWR).
e. Dfierentiaf Sense - Safety Feature Control Line, S@fe Ended @fFFSENS).
5.8.1.6.1 Output cbemcrsristics. The output drivers for cunrplemenrary and wired-ORed rhivers sbaff
conform ru the requirements of 58 1.6.1.1 end 5.8.1.6.1.2, respectively. Vohagsa on the TW K bua sbaff
be determined uaiug Ore average ~aaured cumpusire DC vohage (VAM) described fi 50.1.2. I uf apmd~
E.
5.8.1 .6.1.1 Cumplemcn w driver cbsracrcristics. Each individual complementary driver cirmil shall
mnsist of a tw~purt network contarmng two clam ally matched, single-ended, three level mansisrnr driver
circuits. For aaaertion aud negation bcib tmnaistnr circuits ahso be driven sirmdraneoudy to upposirc voltage
states as complemmm-y signals referred to as SIGNAL(+) and SIGNAL(-) lines. Cuntml line rraaerrion or
negatiun andfor data bit binmy logic states ahafl be indicated by wltage diffemnm.s betvmm Lhe SIGNAL(+)
aud SIGNAL(-) driver mrnplemcntay OUtfmlS.
fn sddition m rhs mm complenrcrrtary driven states, both SIGNAL(+) and SIGNAL(-) UUrpUItiuita sM1
have the abifity m be simultaneously “m-staled” (both porra sbaff have. n high impedance atatc) which is during
&u reception periods ur to indicate a TW K bus inactivity srate (Bus Free).
32
MlL-STD. 1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
● 5.8.1 .6.1.2 Wire-ORed driver cbaracleristirs. Each indlvidnalfy wim-ORed driver shalf consist of a lwo-
port network contsbng two electsimll y matched transistor driver circuits. Fnr assenion, Mb Oansi.wnr
circuiw shall be driven simultaneously to oppnsite voltage sum% as mmplemmtsrsy signals referred 10 as
SIGNAL(+) and SIGNAL(-) lines. Cnnuol line assemion sbalf be indicarcd by a positive vohage difference
between the SIGNAL(+) and SIGNAL(-) driver mmplementary outputs.
5.8.1 .6.1.3 Driver orrqmt logic state definitions. The three output states of a Type K compIemmmry or
wired-ORed ourput csrmsts shall be detused as folfows and are shown in figure 42
q-aSIGNA4+) voltage which is greater thao + 05 volts from Ihe avesage snmswed mmposite
vnltage rYAM) in conjunction with a SIGNAL(-) wfsirb is Iess than -03 volts fmm the
avaage srseesmed mmposite DC voltage (VW) shalf indicate an assested cramol line state, a
bmaty logic one, or mm state for bntb mmplemmrmy end *OR drivers.
a SIGNAL(+) wlrage which is less bar -0.5 vults fmm tbe avr.mge mmsuscd mmpnsite DC
q~e (V~)irsmrrjunction with a SIGNAL(-) which is greamrrhan +0.5 vohs fmmtbe
av==se UE=WMJ mmposi~ DC vnlqe NAM) M ~dim a negti cOn~Ol he StaIC.a
bimuy Iogic mm, m fafse state for a complesmmasy driver. Wire-OR dsivcm shall neva assume
this SW,
%~~~ SIG~~+)md SIGNAL(-) rn-stat.%fcirctitimpedassms~be grearerthan IOK

end sfsalf mdsmte a refmqmshasem of the bus amllor a deactivated bus (Bus Fsm) or data
~P~ fOr bo~ m~@=W md *0~ fiVSSS. when both signaf drivers cm h bus are
m-stared, the resukmg vohages on the bus lines shalf obey the terminator voltageditilon smtcs of
figure 44.
5.8.1 .6.1.4 Output driver c!ramcteristics. Each complementary e.rrdwise-ORed dsiver output shall obey
0 the following output charm trmsurx
a. Each drives shaff be capable of driving into 30 rmtess of tmmmmed “ LS2U-45 type rable, with the
minimum output draractesistics es shown in figtrse 44.
b. Each device tmmziva (drives and seceiva mrrrbiition) ssrasud at each SIGNAL(+) end
SIGNAL(-) pmt shafl have a ui-smte impedance grmter than 10k ohms.
c. fh# $i~vc~n sfrrdl have a signaf to signal state transition skew risoe less than or eqnaf to
mmsused at tie VAM voh crossing point between any matched SIGNAL(+) and
SIGNAL(-) voltages.
d. Each rfsivcr SIGNAL(+) and SIGNAL(-) output shall have a rise rime bctwmn 5 and 60 ns when
rmamred bet%’= VAM + 0.5 volts aad VAM -0.5 volts.
e. Each driver port shrdl supply/sink minismuss of 5S mA of COM?JSL
f. Each tivcr port shall be provided with ou$mt dsiver pmtmtion for short cismits and shorts to
wlrage SXJ- between -7 to +12 vnlrs. This shelf include voltages supplied from mmmon mnde
source drivers..
I h. Wire-ORml mnuol hues of Type K shall not have a dsiwm low state and will float tn Ihe terminator
power voltages shown in rigum 44.
i. Tbe maximum wltege on any SIGNAL(+) and SIGNAL(-) line shaff not exceed 4.4 volts. The
mirdmum voltage on any SIGNAL(+) and SIGNAL(-) Iioe shall be gr.mtcr than O volts. ‘f%e
masured avenge DC vnltage difference between any SIGNAL(+) and SIGNAL(-) pais shall not
exceed * 0.5 Vdc. TIE minimum peek to pmk amplitude shall be gmatcr !han 1.25 volts.
j. The driver output chamaem tics shafI mnform to EIA RS485.
e
33
ML-STD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
5.8.1.6.2 hrprrt cbarrrctr.ristics. The minimum values delivered on tie brrs tu an irrput circuit from each
oftfrethrm. states ofa Type Kdi ffermtiaJ irrprrt circuii shalt be as follows
5.8.1 .6.2.1 Receiver characteristics. Both conrplermntary arrd wire-ofled signafs are sensed by aff
Type K receivers irr MSideuticaf cliffermtiaf rxranmr. The sigrraf starea shall be dsfimd es folfnwx
X?ML) - a diffemn~ vnl~e measrrrcrf between the SIGNAL(+) arrd SIGNAL(-) firms which is
greater h + 1.0 V akrfl indicate an rserted cmrtrnl line state, a binary logic me, cmtrm stare.
M&-:,~~M,volwe~ ktwwn,tieSIGN~+) mdSIGNU-)h. dSiCbiS,,SS

shall indicate a rregatcd conml hue state, a binary lngrc mu us fake stats.
Wats 3 - bntb SIGNAL.(+) and SIGNAL(-) tri-stated circuit impedanrm grmtes than 10K ohms shalt
~catearcfirrqrdshmmtrrf tbebmarr.oradsactivatcd but (BrrsFrcc)orefara receipt mude.
When both signaf drivers on the bus are tri-stated, the rmufdng voltages on the brrs Iiues ahaff obey
the terminator voltagedivi.sion states of figure 44. The input receiver sbaO mnsirfa this resrrftarrt
tri-stated negative diffamdal voltage (- 0.8 V norninaf) vafue as a negated, logic -, or fafse
stats from npm mllmtnr drivem if it is less than -35 mV.
5.8.1 .6.2.2 fnprrt receiver cfraracteristics Each control and data bit receiver brpnt shaft obey the
following characteristics
a. Each port shaft be capable of receiving signnfa at the end of 30 meters of tsrminatuf L.S2U45 type
cable, with the mirrirmms input mmpnsite characteristics as shown ia tigrrre 44.
b. Each device urussmiver (driver arrd receiver mrrrbiuarion) rneaaured at mcb SIGNAL(+) and
SIGNAL(-) port shalf have a h-state impedance greatsr than IOk rdrrsrs.
c. Each device Oassscciw.r sbafl be carable of discerning mrnmsirs siguds with rise arrrkr fall drncs
betwem 5 aud 50 ns.
d. Each driw pofl SfMffSUp@y/SiSlkmmimrrm 0f2rrLA0fcrrrrmIas rmamrcd at the stub.
e. fsrpra circuit pmtinn shall be prnvidui for shnrt circuits arrd shorts to voltage smrrma between -7 0
io + 12 Volis.
f. Comrrnrn rmde noise imrrnmity chaff be provided frum sigrrrds between -7 to +12 volts. lld.s shaff
include ontputs fmm mrsrruun rmrde surrrces.
g. Wir&ORed mntml Hues of Type K shall not have a drivm low state arsd wilf float to the tcroriuattrr
puwer vnhagcs sbnwn irr figure 44.
h, The recziver sensitivity shaft be i 35 mV whereby ass inserted sigrsal shall bs deteuuf frum a voltage
greater than +35 mV arrd a negated signal shafl be detected as a voltage less than -35 mV.
i. The tntrd capacitance of mcb stub length arsd its mrxrqrnndmg Oarssceivex circuit when measured
Innkirrg irr m the stub length sfrafl be less rbau 25 pF.
j. The receiver ~ k-capable of operating with mmpusits diffesmdaf volrages up m but not
excemhng * 4.4 vous.
5.8.1.6.3 Gmrmd si afs. Each T~ K device sbaff supply sigrrrd grormd (GND) which reprcscuts Ore
refereme point b-sigads on thebm are gerrcratcd arrd mmsured. Previsions sfrefl be made to
aflow the separarinn of the sigmd grumrd from the safety or cabinet grumrd m avoid grnrrrrd lunp noiac.
5.8.1 .6.4 Bonding and marrrd h Type K device sbafl extend the systcm crdriiet grnmrd to the
MfL-STD-28S40 connector m act as a y shield for the Type K signafs on the extaual LS2U45 cables
(WC figure 45). The Typs K device shaff rdfow Class B bunds m cabinet extsriors irr emordence with MfL-
STD-131O.
5.8.1 .6.5 Temrinatur DC power. Each Type K devicz SIMOsupply Terminator POWER
(TERMPWR) voltage for p uff-rrp POWSSsrmrce tn the terrrdrrarur networks used on aff bus siguafs. l%i.s
DC power sbafl be diode muplcd m the bus arrd shalf be resuictcd to values betwem 4.4 and 5.25 VOILS
(as measured on tie bus). TERMPWR sources for the Type K bus sbao be able tu supply a rrrirrirmrm of
2 arrrpercs asrd shalt k current limited 103 arrrperes.
34
MIL-sTD-1397c(Wf)
1 June 1995
● 5.8.1.6.6 Differential circuit sense. The diffcmmiaf circuit sense shall be emblcd for Type K drivers.
This 5 volt pmtectron cucuit sigmd s bd be implemented according m figure 46.
5.8.1.6.7 Resmwed and unused lines. AU Type K devicca sbafl provide total capability, whereby all
USIusedbut stiu atilmakd signal and reserve (RSVD) paim frnm the external cable sbsfl be bmugln shmugb
eaeb device at tbe sam elccrncal transit length as active signals fnr texminatinn. Alf Type K extemaf cables
shafl supply extra signal paiss for each layer for signal comectnr rework. ‘f%me spare signal pairs sbnll be
grumrded at tbe Type K device tn the srum signrd grmmd supplied to the bus. l%e upper 8 bits and DBP bits
on all 8 bit Type K devices shall be brought through each device fnr tmminatnr eomect for mmpadbility
with 16 bit applications.
5.8.1.6.8 Trrmsceiver muting and cmrmsnn mnde voltm?e drivms. when rezziving signals frnm tbe bus
or in an off state, the h Vel -ts of lbe h-ameewer shall be hi-stntd(or bigb impedance state). Dsiver
mrrnnm rrmdc vohages shall nnt be a part of the Type K bus elecericaf ebaractuistics in a Bus Free amtc. The
msufdng bas voltages in a Bus FTee srate shall be detmrined snlely by the applied TERMPWR vnlmges and
the terminator networks only. Any common mndc voltages from the drivcz circuits shall be segregated ffnm
the bus via high impedances.
5.8.1.6.9 Additional phvsicaf apeeitlcatirrns.
Harnms Chruacrcri.stic Impedance 90 to 132 ohm (122 Ohmr nominal)

Minimum Gauge Wire for Harnesses 28 AWG
Connector Type (sockets) MJLC-28840 (S3)
Jack Type and Keying (pins) MILX-28840 (P2 or D3)
5.8.1.7 TYPC K bus signals.
5.8.1.7.1 Twre K bus signal descriptions. The Type K bus ahaff eorstain a total of 30 acdvely used
: ●
.
interface Signrds gmupcd into 3 cliffercnt categoric-s. TIE Type K bus signals are as foflc.ws
The following si@s shall be used to tmnsfer digital words of

.forr%:rr%;e%%
a,~;=~ Type K interface bus shall eorrmin 16 bi-diredomd darn signals labeled (DB 0-15).
shall oasssfcr data, cnmmands, s!ams, and rmssages. These signals aball sdsn be ad
fnr the bus device ID codes. The fD males abrdf be numbered from O tn 7 corresponding onetn-
nne with the nsserlimr of the sw numbered data signal line. Seven shall be h highest priority.
AU &tn signals shall be complenmtary dsiverr I@b/Iow pairs.
~;- pm@tilbemoption inTYWK Aff T~ K deviees shall be capable of odd
P@. YPCK ~ W= wo p~ty biu “Dp” and “DPLm DP is associated with DB C? and
DP1 is assneiated witi DB 8-15. Bntlr data bus parity signals shall be mmplemwar’y driven
higMow *.
5.8.1 .7.1.2 Comrol sitznals. The following signals shall be used to crnrvey brrs infnrmntion and data
dtion between aeticw:
~-~e~siti $dlLw.nrrnfl.by thc.bsrget TbeUDsignal sbalfindicate

r cmrtrol nr data mfnmratrnn is being emnsferred. The negated state shall indicate data
I?Ie asaerlrxl state shall indkate cnmusmd starus or rmssage infmrmdon. The C/D signal shall be
I a complementary driven higMOw pair.
I -~-~e~osid~l,~,mnh~bykqe. l%ef/Osign.shrdl indicate the
hon wmlr respect to tbe ml- ssscrled indicating information tium the target en the
inidamr, negaud indicating transfer fmm tie inidarnr tn the target. The I/O signal shall be a
m e -- The MSG signal sbnll be controlled by tie WgeL The assened MSG signal shall
-w&ven de messages fmm ‘g””wpm”
other mformanon tmnsfers. Tfre MSG signal shall be a complementary
driven higMow pair.
35
MUASTD- 1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
REQ (Rex uest) -- The REQ signal abafl be cnnuolkl by the target. The REQ signal sbaff initiate or
●
swam information uansfers as part of the REQ/ACK brmdsbafce prnmcol. The REQ/ACK
handshake shall be used for alf information tmnsfers bctwmn inidatnr and uugeL l%e REQ signal
ahaff k. a complerncmary drivm fdghrlow pair.
~]-- ~eACKsi@~kmnnlldby tietititir. TbeACKsigrmlsbelf
e asserunn nf the REQ SIgnaf by the @geL The REQ/ACK bandsbeke shaIf be used
for aU infnrmatinn uansfem between initiator end WgeL The ACK signal shall be a
mrnple,-m driven bigMOw pair.
.A~l--~e ATNsi@ ah+lkcmtmuedby.etiititnr. The ATN signaf .shauindicase
e targel that a message IS avadable. ‘The ATN sqgd sludf be a complementary driven
higbnow pair.
The RSTsignrd abaUbeawise-CIRed a@lu. sr.d byanydevice ontbe Type Kbus.
+%kf~,.efWf’signal is~dybytifitimrdtig ~w.up. Targusnmyelm
easd the RST signrd during pnwcr up end Pwer dnum.
.-~,-~~~~ysi~~ha~~ sigrud~in~cates theTYWKbwktim
metm mea the BSY atgnaf during tbe Arlmraoon phase. The selected mrget uses
tie BSY signaf tn tiowledge sefectinn indimsing the target controls the Type K bus. The target
alan uses the BSY sig@ tn panicipatc m the Arbitration phase.
-~;ti~eS~,sl@Mba*OM* mnnUtiby tbeinidator. Tlreinitiator
e SEL sqgud m select a target tn Fcrfoern a co-d.
DfFFSENS (Differcntitd Circuit .$mse ) - The DIFFSENS signal shalf be an active high mabIe for the
fferentmf dn vers.
5.8.1 .7.1.3 Bies simds. Ile foflowing signafs shefl k used tn bias tk bns termination networks end
provide witage rrlerence
TERMPWR Cfimninatnr POwer~ - The TERMPWR lines shelf supply the 5 volts (nondoaf) signaf
by the tmmrinatnr bm netwodca. Afl Type K devices shalf supply a TERMPWR signal.
GND Ground - ‘fbe GND lines shall be dedicated es LIE signaf reference ground US@ by she bus. AU
q.CCSSbidfWCGND.2CI0 vohagercfermcc. ●
e K bus functinn~ TU’PCPCK
afraff use the SCSI-Lf arcbitccture which provides for a pmtncol
a. Bus Free phSSe

b. tlsbisration phase
Selection phase
: Reaeleuion phase
e. Co-d phase
f. Dat.awT;~$r pti
g.
h. Message phase
The Type K hus sbafl never be in mere than one of these pbasc.s at any given time. When tbe Typ K bus is
beswrxm two information hansfer phases, the folfowing restrictions sbaff apply to tie Type K bus signals
a. Tbc BSY, SEL, REQ, REQB, ACK and ACKB signals shall not change.
b. The. CA), UO, MSG. and DATA BUS signafa may change. When switching the DATA BUS direction
fmm out to in. the target alrall delay driving the DATA BUS by at least a data release delay PIUSa
bus sestle delay after assdng h I/O sigeaf and the inidator shall release the DATA BUS no later
than a data relmse delay after the transition of she.UO signef w true. WhcJI switching the DATA
BUS direction fmm in to out, the target sbrdf release the DATA BUS no later than a dcskew delay
afecr negating the I/O signal.
c. The ATN and RST signals may change as defmcd under the descriptions for the attentinn mndltion
and rcaet conditinn.
36
I
MfLSTD- 1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
5.8.1 .8.1 Type K bus thin The bus timing relationships betweur phases shall be as described as
following. Base timmg psmme~gshown in figure 47 shall be used in figures 48-54.
5.8.1 .8.1.1 Re.setdmin The timing of the Type K bns sigeafs ask tire assemion of the
RSTsignalliee-vnr intlgm’c4S. ‘fheseqwnceshall s~fmmb~timof tkmserted
RST signal line end tk com?spmrdieg mlcase of afl sigmals by afl devices rasufdag in a Bus l%? phase
(afta a maximum of 800 us). The RST signal sbrdf be held fm a adnikrmrrs of 25 W. The sequence sbaIf end
with the tmasition from the Bus Free phase to @. next phase (i.e. sef~on phase) iodkated by tk asserdnn
of the BSY signal.
5.8.1 .8.1.2 Arbioadon/Sefection. The timing of the Type K bus sigenfs fnr the ArW’atioa turd
Sekclims pbnses Slsau besssbowainf@re49. Thesequence sbaUsOut fromtbe detecdm Ofti Bw*
phase (once both SEL aod BSY signals are false for a minii of 400 ns) end sbafl cad with the oauaition
from the selection phase te the nexl phase chosen by the selected target. This shall be indicated by the
release of the SIX sigasf by the initizior aad the setting of the Message, Coremsnd, and f/O sigasfs by the
selected target iedicetiag the nsxt phase. To distinguish this Sekctinn pbarx from tJe Ke.sckctinn phase, the
f/O signal shafl be negated.
The initiator may nptiomffy assert the ATN signef during the selection phase to infmm the”selected mrget
that a mcsage is aveifable. However, this line may optinnrdly be essened by the irridatnr at any tiu after
Selectinn while the tsrgtx has control of the bos. The target rmy optimudfy reqnest the message by
transitiorriag to a Message Out phase via assertion of the MSG end C/D and negatinn of tie lfO aigards.
5.8.1 .8.1.3 Arbimatidksektion. The timing of the Type K baa sigssafs fer the ArW’adon rmd
Reselcctimr Phases shssl be es shown in hgum 50. Tbe sequence absff start from the dekuioa of tbe bns free
pbnse (once betb SEL and BSY sigmds are fefse fnr a miaimnm of 400 ns) and ersds with the tmnsitinn fmm
the Selection phase to USCnext (to be sefectcd by the target) phase. ‘llsis shalf be indicated by the release of
the SEL sigmd by the Mietor and the setting of the Message, Co-d, md VO si~ by b *lsc~ ~gel
indicating the next phase.
5.8.1 .8.1.4 . Tlledmirsgoftfle

figuresl. l-he
~nce ,$@f start from, the bus -“~resoicdnas regarding a&m si&f -on PSIthe fMSmd tie
omc reqrnred for & bdhatssr to disable its drivers. The sequencz dmff end when there is no more date to be
seat aed the mrget changes the MSG. CfD, arrd I/O lines to iadicatc nnotk phase. Each 8 bit date exchange
shall be predicated on arr ACK/REQ hrmdsha!se protocol and there W be nn dme limit on each exchange.
5.8.1 .8.1.5 Asyecbmnnns information Transfer timing - inidstnr tn target (ounrut). ~e timing of Ore
Type K bus signals for the Aayncbro nmrs IrsformaOOIrTransfer p~ shelf be shawn in figure 52. T&
sequence shrdl starI ffem tk brrs timing rc.mktinns regardirrg a change in sig&m direction (I/O signal) on the
bos and Ore tinx required for the target m disable its drivers. Tfre sequmce shaff cad wherr tbcrs is no rmre
dam m be seat and the target changes the MSG. C/D, mrd f/O lines to iadicate SUIOthSIflhS.% Ed 8 bb data
exchange shall be predicated en art ACWREQ haodsbake pmtocd which is perforrrd for every byte sad
there sbafl be no time limit on & exchnnge.
5.8.1 .8.1.6 .%mchmnous Data Tmnsfer tirrdrw - target to tiltiator (iput). The timing of tie Type K
bus signals fnr the~ymcbma 1 be es shnwn m hgrme 53. The szqrrence shaff start
frum the bus timing resoicti% re~tib~a signal direction on the bus and tie time rquired fnr
the initiator tn disehle its drivcm. The sequenct shall ead when there is no mere data tn be sent srsd the targel
cbrmges the MSG. CA), and f/O lines to indicate another phase. Dats exchsages shelf be perfornmf in groups
which are plCdiCMtd 00 p~ ed number of KEQ sigarddbytcs which shall& sent prior tn receiviog the
same number of ACK signals in rmponse. TIIe nomber of REQ end ACK tngglcs shall be equal per greup
which supplies a pacing ‘~isrri
37
MIL-STD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
5.8.1 .8.1.7 Synchrnnoua Data Transfer timing - initiator to tan?et (outpu cl. The timing of the Type K
bus signafs for tbe Synchronous Data Transfer phase shafl be as shown m figure 54. The sequence sbafl start
frmn tie bus timing restrictions regarding a change in signid direction on tbe bus aod the lime required for
the target m disable ita drivers. The sequence sbafl end wbsn them. ia no uure data tn be sent and tbe target
cbangcs the MSG. C/D, and f/O ties to indicate anotier phnse. Data exchanges shelf bc p=formed in 8roups
which am predicated on pmderermined number of fWQ sigmdalbytcs which sba.fl be sent prinr or receiving the
aamc number of ACK aignafs in ,qnnac. The number of REQ and ACK toggles shrdl be quaf per group
which .suppfies a pacing Imcbamsm
5.8.2 Lcvrical recnm eumrts. Tbia seaion cnntaim delailed requiremea u for logicaf aapecta of the Type
K bus. Tbe bus phases, bus ccdtions, pointers and mcasages shall be daaifed es folfows
5.8.2.1 Sefeuion tirmxmt prncedure. A selection timeout prncedure sbaff ‘be implemented as pcr
Option (2) of ~somdard. Aasu’tion of the RST signal shaff not be alfowed tn accomplish a
S-ekXtiOIIp- -uL
5.8.2.2 Reselection phase. Tbe Reselection phase sbalf be a mandato~ phase under tAia standard.
5.8.2.3 RcsJectinn tinwout pmcedurc. A reaektion timeout prncedum shall be @demented as per
option (2) of ~7 5 Smndard. Asserdnn of the RST signal shelf not be. rdfowed !0 acmmpliab a
reselection phase timeouL
oansfer. When implemmtcd, syncfunnoua &w hanafer slulf bc in

accordance Wi
5.8.2-5 Reset amdition. AN T~ K devices shafl imple.meat botfr a bard reset end a snft met as pa
ANSI X3’T9~ SUtOdtOlf.‘lb e hard or soft options shall be user selectable and are mutually exclusive.
5.8.2.6
5.8.2.7
Abort rmaaue. The Atat mcsaage sbaff be irnplemmted for off inidatcos.
Diacnnnect rncsaru?e. Tbe Diacomect message abafl be implemented fnr eff Type K devices.
●
5.8.2.8 Swtcbrnnons data uansfer request mssage. The Symcbrcmnua Ma Transfer Request message
shafl bc implemmted fnr alf Type K de WCS.
5.8.2.9 Texminate f/O Prnccss message. The Terminate f10 Pr- message sbrdl bc implemented for
all Type K dc’ikxs.
38
MfL-STD- 1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
6. NOTES
6.1 fntcmudomd hkmsL CC* provisions of tik standard are the subject of intcrnssiuual
smmlsrdizauun ogreerr!eut NA TO STANAG 4153. When chsnge uoticc, revision, m sanceflatiun of this
staudard is pmpuscd which will modify tie intsmarirrnal agreement concerned, she prcpariug activity wifl take
aPPmPriate action through irKcmaUund Somdardization channels, including departnrentrd standnrdfition
offices, to change the agreement or make olher apprupriale uccummudations.
6.2 Subiect term (key wurd) listing.
B@dar pulse
Buffered cmrrmrmd wnrd
Burst trsnsfer mude
Datu dssuuct
Data prcmct
Exwmmf function
Exmrml titC1l’llpt
Exkmmfly specified addrmsing
Externally specified indexing
Fiber optic
Forced command wnrd
IntercorupuLer
Pamlfel
Peripheral
Prntocnl
Single prdsed signul
.% le wnrd transfer
Sirf
Small systems compuscr interface
source
Sy.wcm integrity frarruss
6.3 Changes from Drevious issue. Asterisks sm nnl used in this revision to ideutify cbrmges with
respect tn the prewous mue due to the extensive nature of the changes.
R~AI~S~tiVity
(Rnjcct MCCR-N101)
39
MIL-STD-1397C (SH)
1 JUNE 1995
PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
40
ML--&B&3&7c:sH)
1 June 1995
CABLES, lNTERFACE CfRCUfTS, AND GENEW4L f/O Philosophy
10. SCOPE
10.1 Sco e. This appcdx provides information regsrrkiig Ifw ffO intercamming cables, intrrtke
circuits, .tfGl%enoneCtOr thstrrEettberquirerrentSof this E.taudard. ItaLsu describes the f/O interfn.of
NTDS eurnputcrs to pruvidc an omlrrstaudiug of the funcdonrd operations of rhc cmuputer’s UO sustion.
This appendm fnrms a rnsrldarrrry pert of this Somfsrd.
20. REFERENCED DOCUMBNTS
20.1 GovcrmrEn t Ifnctmmts.
.s.::gw-i:~=”~ -tifouowbg*lmtionsof
In&x of Spci.6carrons &ksue in the
and Stondards (DuDISS) specitied .~,~
soliciwtioo form a part of Uris clrrndard tu tbe extent spccitied herein.
SPECfFICATfONS
MfLITARY
MllX-171134 - Cnbk, Rodio Fmqucmy, Triaxird, 0.245 fnch, SO Ohm.

Waterblocked, Nuo-Watrx Blocked.
MfL-c-17/135 - Cable, Radio Frcqumey, Trisxial, 50 Ohm. Water Blneked and
Non-Water Blorkcd.
ML-C-24643 - Cabtiabadslwd El_l~II Low Srmke, for Shipbuard Use.
● MIL-C-915
-C-28876
-CabIernrrl~Electrimf;
Specification for.
forSfdpbOardUse, Gemrul
- Cmmeuom, Fiber Opt@ J Cirmdar Pkug arid Receptacle Style,

Multiple Rerwvabfe Ternrini, Oerteral Specifwation for (?@ric).
Mn-c4914m - Corrector, s RZfbfrrqay (series m Rec@ncle, Pin
Cnnrscts, Jam Nut Moomfcd. Clnss 2).
Mf&C-81511 - Caoecmm Efcctriral, Cirarkzr~ I-f@ Density, Quick
Dismnncu. Enviro-t Reshrg nnd Accessories General
Specification for.
~C-8151 1/6 - Correctors, Ekccoiral, Cirmfar. High Density, Quick DiSCOUIItCL
Envimrmmt RcsisdnE, mrd Aaassories
Pkug, CximpTypc Conmcts, Clsss & F and E (Sairs 2).
MfI--c-85o45 - Cable, FIMz optical, Wripbnard, Generaf Sp@fication
for (fvfeuic).
M2L-P-49291 - Fiber, Optical, GcncraJ S@:cation for (Melric).
(Copies of specit%ations required by cmmrretnrs in camuection with ~ific aequiskion functions

sbordd be obtained frum the conmtcdug activity or ss diruud by the mntracting oftlccr.)
30. REQUDU3MENTS
~wti;~~_~~=ti’~@,of= msxmrumb’=Wow”&~&on th.?cab,e~~rindthe

Cabfc lcrtgtki fur Wbicb prnper OpeIatiorl is assured
for equipment inmfaccs coufrxrring to tkris stsndrtrd. Greater cable length may be employed with some
@pr=t ~ti SO= cOditiOUS, dCwdillg ptiUWiky UpOUtk cbtllWtrlktiCS Of the be dliV13% end
recavcrs in rbe iudivfdrmi equip~ts. Eech system shall be aualyred for prupcr operation wi h rbe
longer cables.
41
MlL~:;N;&7c~sH)
1 June 1995
TABLE VI. Maximum cable lengths (feerhreters).
Interface I Cable type

} ?Il”rmlw”rl.sl?ll
------ ..-. —--- 2AIJ m 2WA1.U or LS2AU
Type A 300/91 .4 ~o19;
Type B S0/15.2
Type C 10W3O.5 250/76.2
Type H 10W3O.5 25W76.2
Type D RG-12A maxial cable
1000/304 Q -.”
Type E TRF-8 uiaxiaf cable TR&58BW cable

I 985f300 395/1253
Type F Ularaclrxistica as Spxifled in MJL-STB1553.
T~ G As spmii%d in RS-449 or RS-232 M HA Jndustrid Bulletin 12.
Type K LS2U/45 (utcqal OUfy)
82/35 ~!
I I
~1 The length for entire bussing system includes intrmal and extemaf cabfing.
30.2 Cable twrm. The following cable types shall be used with the reapmdve interface type.s as shown
in table Vf:
a. Cablrs for the pamlJel interfaces (TYIES A. B. C. md J-fl
Type 2AU, 2U, 2WAU, or 2UW in accexdanm with M21X-915
Typs LS2AU or LS2U in acmrdtmcc with MIJX-24643 (for the low-smoke re@rermm). @
b. Cable for the Type D serial inserfmx
Type RG-12A maxie.1 cable.
c. Cables for tbe Type E interfa~
TRF-8 oiaxird cable’ (MILC-17/135)

TRF-58 triaxiof cable (MJL-C-17/134).
d, CabIe for Type J irnerfaoz

ME-F-4929116
JvUL-C-85045
e. Cables for the Type K interface

Type LS2U in accordance with MUX-24643145 (26 gauge)
30.3 Cable connczmrs
30.3.1 Tyue A, B, C, and H interface mnnectms. The computer end periphemd equipment J/O
mmectms rssaybe as rhown m table WI, except ha t F181511 is inaaivc for new design.
a. The Typs A, B, C, or H input channel cmmecwr mted on the morputer may be the same as the
output channel comettor rsrmmted on the peripheral equipment (@pheral output channel is
in reference to tire peripheral equipment).
42
ML~-D&3&7c~sH)
1 June 1995
b. The Type A, B, C, or H output ebanael conrwtor mouated on tie cnmputcr nmy be tbe same as
the input cbarmel mnaector mounted on the peripheral equipnrem (periphemf input channel is
ia reference m the peripheral quipmmt).
(Older NTDS ccmrpuree aad periphemf equipment used 90-pia f/O comectnrs as foflows. The W-pin
equipment mounted fM cmmectnr (MALE) is NSN 5935-00-841-6204. The cable ending f/O coaaector
(FEMALE) is NSN 5935-00-888-7491.)
TABf..E VfI. CnmPuta ccaurectnra and cable rmes (parallel~.
T~e cntrqrnter frmction cabinet connector Cable cnaneuor

A, B, C, H 79 Pia input M38999ROWG35PN M38999R6WG35SN
A. B,C, H 79 Pirr output M38999120WG35PA M38999R6WG35SA
A, B, C, H 85 Pin input M81511/01El=85Pl M8151 l/06EF-OISl
A, B,C, H 85 Pin output M8151U01EF-85P2 M8 151 U06EI=OIS2
A, B,C, H 92 Pin input M28840/12AGlPl M2884W16AG1S1
A, E,C, H 92 Pin output M28840/12AGlP2 M28840/16AGlS2
E TriaxiaI M49 142/02-0001 M49141/01-0001
M49142/01-0002
A, B,C, H 9oPia NSN 5935-00-841-6204 NSN 5935-00-888-7491
30.3.2 TE inecxfacc CUaneum. The conncctnr sbafl be in accordance with MfL-C49142 and
edkbead e=mnectors nmunted on the s- aad sink shall be idemieaf and sbaff mate
with the maoectors on the cable emda. Cnoaeuors franatneatfy mounted on equipment shalf be in
accordance with M4914W.MXIO1 of MIL-(X914Z02.
30.3.3 T J iatetface cmmeunra. The fiber optic intexfaee conaeunr shall rmct the requirements of
a requimrmmt for a 62 5/125 fiber @ 1.31 IUDof mated Optid POW= 1c05 1.0 dB (ma?..).
Tbe bufkhcad nmunted receptacles for the aorrme and siak abaff be identiccd and shall mate with the plugs.
30.3.4 T . The computer md periphemf equipmcat Type K cormcclms

(M28840 series) shafl be Vfff. Comectnr seleceinn shaff be as pm table VfIf. The cable
symem sbaff cnntaia co socketed cmmeaors. The cnmmm keying allows the Type K cable aad
terminator assemLrIies tn be generic.
TABLE VIff. CnmP nter conaectora aad cable mates (TYPC K).
I Type computer
SCSI
timction
xx caa be any one of the foUowiag

I Cabinel connector
M2884WXXAG1 Z3
10,11,12,14,20,21.
I Cable camector
M28840/YYAGlS3
.. I
xx is a nxepwfe tyfx.
yyisaplogtypc.
z can beeitlrer Por D.
30.4 JJOcable iotercbaagcabili f/O cable assemblies having conaeciors witfr the same nmnber of
piUS on each errd am irttercban put cables may be interchanged with output cables, either dkectfy as
wirh the 90- aad 120-pin cnti~~&ma, m by taming them end-for-end as with cabks having the 85-pin
conncctora. When the equipment rwquires f/O cable as.wnblics witi differan conacctnr types on each end,
rben tbe input aad output cables are not interchangeable.
43
MIL~;-sT3&7C;S H)
I June 1995
●
I 30.4.1 Cable comectrx Pbt assigmrrems.
30.4.1.1 Cable conrrectmr pin assimmams for T yTXA, B, C arrd H iemrfaa.s. Stendard fwICtiOn tn
cnnnecter pin assqpurreets for @. mmectors Irsud m table VII apedred m mlifes D( rnrd X. The 85-,
~~ and 120-pin rxtnncue,, pin assigemarrs are speciticd in tab~; EC Tbe 79- aed 92-pin comeaer pin
asarsrtqts arc specified m mble X. When a cbarmel bas fewer than 35 data lines, pins assigned te the unused
dam bm need have no mmection within the equiprrrenL Pin 45 of the 90-pitr amrrmor, pin B1 of Ore
120-pirr ceneecror, and pie 74 nf the t35-pirI conrrwtnr may be gruueded (abiefd). Pins ❑ot listed in table LX
or mble X may have no connections.
TABLE IX. Functien te pin assignments 12@, 90-, and 85-vin connecters.
Function 120-Pirr I 90-Pin 85-Pin

fnprrt Orrrprrt Signal Return Signal Rertrrrr Signal Rctlrm
IDA ODA or Ready B-5 A-5 1 11 1 6
fDA ODR or Rearrm B-6 A-6 2 12 2, 7
EfR EFA B-7 A-7 3 13 3 8
EIE EFR B-8 A-8 4 14 4 9
Data bit 00 D-1 c-1 9 19 13 21
Dam bit 01 D-2 c-2 10 20 14 22
Data bit 02 D-3 c-3 22 33 15 23
Data blt 03 D-4 c-4 23 34 16 24
Data blt 04 D-5 c-5 24 35 17 25
Data bit 05 D-6 c-6 25 36 18 26
Dam bit 06 D-7 c-7 26 37 29 39
Data bit 07 D-8 C-8 27 38 30 40
Data bit 08 D-9 c-9 28 39 31 41
Dam bit 09 D-10 c-lo 29 40 32 42
Dam bit 10 D-11 C-n 30 41 33 43
Mbit 11 D-12 C-12 31 42 34 44
ata bit 12 G-1 H-1 32 43 35 45
Dam bit 13 G-2 H-2 47 58 36 46
Dam bit 14 G-3 H-3 48 59 37 47
Data bit 15 G-4 H-4 49 60 49 58
Data bit 16 G-5 H-5 50 61 50 59
Dam bit 17 G-6 H-6 51 62 51 60
Dam blt 18 G-7 H-7 52 63 52 61
Data bit 19 G-8 H-8 53 64 53 62
Data bit 20 G-9 H-9 54 65 54 63
Data bit 21 G-10 H-10 55 66 55 64
Data bit 22 G-11 H-n 56 67 56 65
Dare bit 23 G-12 H-12 57 68 57 66
Dam bit 24 J-1 K-1 70 80 67 75
44
TABLE IX. Function to pin assignments 12@, 90, and 85-Ldn connectors. - Continued
Function 120-Pin I 90-Pin I 85-Pin

-. . . . . 1
Inpul 10utpul Si_ - .=. —
Data bit 25 J-2 K-2 71 81 68 76
Data bit 26 J-3 K-3 72 82 69 77
Data bh 27 1-4 K-4 73 83 70 78
Data bit 28 J-5 K-5 74 84 71 79
Data bit 29 J-6 K-6 75 85 72 80
Data bit 30 J-7 K-7 76 86 73 81
Data bit 31 J-8 K-8 77 87 5 12
Wield J-9 K-9 5 15 10 11
Reservsd J-10 K-10 6 16 82 83
Reserved 1-11 K-n 7 17 19 27
Resend J-12 K-12 8 18 84 85
B-1 45 74
Spare ~1 A-1 ~1 69
Spare B-3 A-3 21 20
Spcwe B-4
Spare A-4 44 28
Spare B-2 A-2 46 38 not W
Spare B-9 A-9 78 48
spare B-10 A-10 79 not Uard
Spare See the B-11 A-n 88
spare individual B-12 A-12 89
Spare cable F-1 E-1 90
Spare drawing F-2 E-2
Spare P3 E-3
Spare F4 E-4
Spare F-5 E-5
Spare F-6 E-6
Spare F-7 E-7
Spare F-8 E-8
F-9 E-9
F-10 E-10
F-1 1 E-n
F-12 E-12
y pins A-1 and 69 are tie secondary shield connections.
45
TABLE X. Function 10 pin assignmsnk? 79- aod 92-pin mnneclom
Function 79-Pin 92-Pm

Input output Slgnd Remrn Sig.wal Remm
mA ODA or ihdV 79 78 1 7
mA ODR or ResuLIK n 76 2 8
EJR EFA 75 74 3 9
ELE EFR 73 72 4 10
Data bit 00 71 70 14 23
Data b,t 01 m 68 15 24
lhta bit 02 67 66 16 25
Data bit 03 65. 64 17 26
Data bit 04 63 62 18 27
Oata bil 05 61 60 19 233
Oata bit 06 59 58 33 42
L3embit 07 57 56 34 43
Data blt 08 55 54 35 44
oak bit 09 53 52 36 45
Data bit 10 51 50 37 46
Data bit 11 49 48 38 47
Data bit 12 47 46 39 4s
Data blt 13 45 44 40 49
Data bit 14 43 42 41 50
lkm bit 15 41 40 52 61
Data bit 16 39 38 53 62
Data bit 17 37 36 54 63
Dm bit 18 35 ?4 55 64
Data bit 19 33 32 56 65
Data bil 20 31 30 57 66
LMS bit 21 29 28 58 67
Data bit 22 27 26 59 de
lhm bit 23 25 24 60 69
Data bit 24’ 23 22 71 .eo
Data bit 25 21 20 72 81
Data bit 26 19 18 73 52
Data bil 27 17 16 74 53
Data bit 2s 15 14 75 e4
LMA bit 29 13 12 76 55
Data bit 30 11 10 77 86
Data bi[ 31 9 8 78 m
Wield 7 6
spares 6 5 5 11
Spal-cs 4 3 12 13
spa-es 2 1 20 29
. . .A
B [ I “ 1 ,,
I 1
n
1
1
I
1
32
%-,
,. I,
51
7.
,“
I
I 1 1 I
88
90
I L39
91
I
46
ML~&DNg&7c~sH)
●
1 June 1995
30.4.1.2 Cable connector Pin assigsmwnts for Twx J interfaces. Tbs Type J signal w connector pin
assigmmsts aball be eaah nwn io figure 39 or figure 40.
30.4.1.3 Cable mnoector pin assimmcnta for Twss K inmr-fams. The. Type K signal to mme-mor pin
essigmmms akd be as shown m tnble Kl sod Jigurs 55. Each device shell mute SO aigeefs thmugb iu
conneetor pnim es indicated in the pin saaigesmet tables. This WW caaum afl eablea am wired exnctfy tbe
same aod efso affows tie equipmmt to bs used in a mixed S/16 bit futnre isnplemeotstinn or in a mmplete 16
bit implementation withnut bevieg to febricats end instao new sables. AO signals afsaff bs mmineted.
TABLE XI. M28S40 Pin aaaignmmta.
BUS StGNN. CONt’ACt’l PU4 C4eLsJPm CALt2EtAYIm

Re@ 82 01 tmcr Cam
3Q+ 73 01 huu care
Acx- 67 02 truu care
A(X+ 58 02 lnllu C.xe
86 03 Laprl
lmMPwst 87 04 2ayer 1
Spire 11 0s byer 1
spare s 05 hyer 1
Ckuld 7 06 hyerl
Gluu16 t 06 I#cr 1
Chwcd 42 07 layer 1
Grmrd 33 07 layer t
Gh 62 08 L.ayert
Gluui 53 08 saw 1
Guxd 84 09 Layer t
Grmrd 7s 09 layer 1
Gnmnd 64 10 SAW 1
Gmurd 55 10 layer 1
BsY. 66 11 t-dyer2
BsY+ 57 11 layer 2
stale 29 12 Layer 2
spare 20 12 IAYU2
S12/ 80 13 layer 2
93,+ 71 13 Llyu 2
S2sPPsms 54 14 layer 2
Csluud 63 14 byer 2
RSt-- 68 15 layer 2
F1.s7+ 59 15 L5yer 2
Sw.re 13 16 layer 1
spare 12 16 Layer 2
A’t74 65 17 Layer 2
AlT++ 56 17 layer 2
Smre 30 18 t-dyer2
spare 2t 18 Mu 2
h49i- 69 19 Sayer 2
MsG+ 60 19 t.nyel 2
s- 31 20 layer 2
Sp?.rc 22 20 tx,yer 2
lm- 83 21 Layer 2
m 74 21 Layer 2
47
MIL-STD- 1397C(SH)
APPENDIX A
1 June 1995
TABLE XL M28840 pin assignments. - Conliousd

BUS SIGNAL CONTAC7 / P04 CABLE Pm CArsM IAYE3t
spe 51 22 Lawr 2.
Spin-e 32 2?. Iayer 2
aD- 81 23 Layer 2
UDt 72 23 Lwcr 2
spar 79 24 Layer 2
SLuJre 70 24 k.yer 2
DBCL 8 25 k layer
DBO+ 2 25 IMu layer
DB& 43 26 Dma Mm
DBS+ 34 26 IXIu bycr
DBl- 9 27 (Mu layer
DB1+ 3 27 Iau17 IJwr
GlmIr02 85 28 O.ea km
Gmd 79 28 (Mu Iayer
DB2- 10 29 Omu Layer
DB2+ 4 29 Chuu Lawr
DB9. 44 30 DulcJIAw?r
DB9t 35 30 Dlmu IAwr
DBPl- 61 31 CmIu Inyer
DBP1+ 52 31 Glua layer
DB3- 23 32 (klu Iqu
DB3+ 14 32 Gulcr Iaycr
●
DB1O- 45 33 -Sayer
DBIO+ 36 33 IIIlu l.ayr
DB4- 24 34 Dum layer
DB4+ 15 34 Oum Izmr
DBll- 46 35 Dmu layer
DB1l+ 37 35 rmu lam
DB3- 25 36 Mer lap
DB5+ 16 36 DuIa Layer
DB 12- 47 37 Dam Iayer
DB 12+ 38 37 GukJ Mm
DB& 26 38 Ouw law
DB6+ 17 38 CMa layer
DB13- 48 39 Cuw Llyer
DB13+ 39 39 Glua sayer
spare 91 40 CMa Layw
sFOrc 90 40 CharxIaycr
DB7- 27 41 Dutu layer
DB7+ 18 41 Dau Layer
DB14 49 42 CMu Lap
DB14+ 40 42 Gzuahym
SW 89 43 * Layer
slkur. 88 43 Ona IAycr
DB15- 50 44 O.nu layer
DB13+ 41 44 CM.7 k+er
DBP- 28 45 (her Iay.zr
DBP+ 19 45 Dmcr Ldycr
None 6 NorJe
None 92 None
48
MIL.-sTEB.-sT3&7c~sH)
1 June 1995
30.4.2 Function to color code assignnmm.
30.4.2.1 Function to calm cnde asskmmnts for TW A, B, C and H iamrfaccs. Standmi fiction to
cable colnr cab? assrgtuncats en ha% u table X1l. table.apphes 03cdl es wIJ 00.5or mom wire pairs.
TABLE Ml. Fnnctinn tn cdnr cnde assigrmmms fm 4> to 60-Pair dkitnl l/O omsmission cable-s.
Funminn Twisted Signal Realm Functinn Twisted Signal I&turn

pau no. pam nn.
fL$,.A 40 ORN BRN Data bit 27 28 RED PRY
Y
lDA. ODR, 39 ORH BLU Dam bit 28 29 RsD TAN
or flesumc
EIfZor EFA 38 GRN PINK Dam bit 29 30 RED PINK
131Eor EFR 37 GRN TAN Data bit 30 31 GRN ORN
Dsm bit 00 15 WHr BLU Dam b1t31 32 GRN BLU
oats bit 01 14 WHT ORN ] Dam bit 32 17 WHT Gf2AY
~tp---.--
hit m 7A RED
.— I BLU
——- 1 Dats bit 33 36 GftN PRP
Daua bii 03 I ii I WFfr PfNK Ii Dam bit 34 16 WHr BRN
. .I.;*M
DatL ..- I 20 WHY TAN ] -L. bit 3S 3s GRN YEL
.“ .Wnl
. -r $iPAKE
Data bit051 IB YEL 41 OBN OKAY
Datn bit 06 19 WHlT mD
. .. <
m JPARE 42 OKN YEL
Dam bit07 7 BLK GRAY SPARE 43 ORN PKP
Dam bll 08 1 BLK WHT SPARE 44 ORN TAN
Dam buo9 6 BLK BRN SPARE 4s OKN PfNK
~ bit
... 10
.. , -5 RI.K
-—- I R1.U
--- SPARE 46 BLU BRN
,i* 11 1,
Dam b.... 1-4 I, WHT
.. . . . 1 CRN i
I iPARE 47 BLU ~
~Dam bit 12 ;~ GRAY SPARE ~ BLU YEL
Dam bit 13 I 25 I RED BRN SPARE 49 BLU PM
Dam bit 14 I 22 RED GBN SPARE 50 BLU TAN
‘~oihit
---- 1S
-- I 7- I R1.K-
_—. RED
-— SPARE 51 BLU PINK
.- L,. . . , 0 r.. c
Dam 01[10 I o- “ -
SPARE 52 I BKN GKAY
Dsm bit 17 I ; ELK E SPARE 53 BRN YEL
Dam bit 18 I 3 BLK GRN SPARE 54 BRN PRP
Dam bit 191 4 BLK ORN SPARE 55 BRN TAN
Mm bit201 lo
-. RI.K
--- TAN
-.—. SPARE
-. .—— I S6 BRN PINK
Dam bit 21 I 11
,I RI
----.K I PINK
----- I SPARF.
“. --- [ i; I GRAY
--- . . 1 YE. i
Dam bit 22 ;; m RED SPARE ~i GRAY PG
Dam blt 23 33 GKN BKN SPARE 59 GRAY TAN
lhtn bll m 26 GRAY SPARE 60 GRAY PINK
Dam bit 25 27 RED YEL
Dam bit 26 23 RED ORN I
30.4.2.2 Simml 5 cable m M28E40 connector for Type K immrfac=of~ec~,-rnmt

of T h?pairs is given in table XI F“ M
28#wKmb~m? g of Type K bus sign~ to’~mccm~ ~hp~ as given in tnble XI.
Figure S5 slso includes a cross sectinn of tbe LS’2U/45cabIe type.
49
MfL$T;&3&7c~sH)
1 June 1995
30.4.3 Alternate color code assimmtems. Alremative celor code assigamenta are specified 10
standardize the use of cable w]rb lsas &m 42 wire pairs.
30.4.3.1 Color code aasimmmnts for 3&Pair cable. Table I(ID specifies fuecdon te color cads
assigmnam for use wulr 30-pair fmr-alleldigitaf f/0 uaesndssion cables. Tire 30-pair cable may be used witfr
any 16- or 24-bit pamllel f/Ocbaanel.
TABLE XfU. Functiea 10ecder wde assimrraents for 30- rrairdirntaf f/O tmrrsarissioncables,
Faecrion Twisred pair 110. Sigoal Rcsrrre

fDR, ODA, or 30 RED PmK
Ready
fDA, ODR, or 29 RED TAN
Resume
EIR or EFA 28 RED PRP
EfE or EFR 27 RED YEL
Dare bit 00 ~
Data bit 01 14 ORN
Dam bit 02 24 RED BLU
Dan bit 03 21 WHf PINK
Date bit 04 20 WHT TAN
Da!a blt 05 18 WHT YEL
Dara bit 06 19 WHf PRP
Data bil 07 7 BLK GRAY
Data bit 08 1 BLK WHT
Dara bit 09 6 BLK BRN
Dare bit 10 5 BLK BLU
Data bit 11 13 WHT GRN
Data bit 12 26 RED GIL4Y
Data bit 13 25 RED BIW
Data bil 14 22 RED GRN
Dm bil 15 2 BLK RED
Data bit 16 8 BLK YEL
Data bit 17 9 BLK PRP
Data bit 18 3 BLK GRN
Data biI 19 4 BLK ORN
Dare bit 20 10 BLK TAN
Data bit 21 11 BLK PmK
Data bit 22 12 RED
Data bit 23 23 RED ORN
Spare 16 WHr BRN
Spare 17 WHf GRAY
50
MfI.-STD- 1397C(SH)
APPENDfX A
1 June 1995
30.4.3.2 Cnlor code essigmmms for 19- and 24-txaireablr.. Table KIV specifies fimcrion o color code
sssignrrrentsfor use wrrh 19-or 24- talDC) transmission enbles. The 24-freirable mey be esed with
I/O chaaneL ~~%#r cable nm bs used wilb M-bit pamlfel UO channels where tbc
~*~~=tiOn is not implcmmud (m? 5. Ll.1~, 5.1.1.2.2, and note 1 to tables II and Ill).
TABLE XIV. Funsdon m alar cede essigrrmmts for lY end 24-Peir dtgitsf UCtrrsnsrrdssioocables.
T
Fuection Twisted @r DO. signal ffernrn
mfDODA. or 19 WHT PRP
Y
fDA, ODR, nr 18 WHT YEL
EIRor EFA 17 WHT GftAY

EIBor EFR 20 WFfT TAN
Data bit Of) 7 BLK GRAY
Data bit 01 8 BLK YEL
Detsbito2 14 WHT ORN
DaL4bito3 12
Data bit 04 11 BLK PINK
M biI 0s 9 BLK PRP
Dsta bii 06 10 BLK TAN
,Darabito7 5 BLK BLUE
Date bit 08 1 ELK
Data bit 09 4 BLK ORN
Dma bit 10 I 3 BLK GfUi
Databil 11 6 BLK BRN
Dsts bit 12 16 WHr BRN
Daes bit 13 15 WHf BLUE
13stablt 14 13 WHl- 1 GffN
Data bil 15 2 BLK RED
- ~ ~
spare I 22 REf3 GRN
spare. 23 RED ORN
spare I 24 RED BLUE
30.4.4 Connecter keying.
30.4.4.1 Comream ketig for Type& B, C and H intcrfarxs. Keyed connectors used on cable
asscnddi~ am keyed wrtb h maung mrmectnr rmrm
mmrmtms sod previdc rdigaomt of male amamtor pins
w 0“”“’
wtb the‘p””’
female cnrmectm.
m ‘vat The
‘m#m%G:&
mmrsctom have the.sanE keyed input aed OUtpUL Gmstruction of cables using the 8S-pio mrmmtom mny
use an input commter io mcmdance with MIL-C-81511 and MTL.-C-8l5ll/6 for type M81511/06EF-0151
on one end and SDoutput mrmmter. Type M81511/06E&01S2, on tk otbcr end tn be mmpafible with the
mbfc eomeanr rquircrrimts of rbis standard.
30.4.4.2 Cenneuer keyimr fer Tnre K interface. ‘k mrmeetm keying code for the T
LrscsUmrrn5n Secketaf Cnnmctnrs Wflvsrare dlffrmm than the ems SfWifiCd forTypc A, B. %~Htibti:w
~~1 m Mfc ~fmiOO WfWO imtalfimga systsm eontainie8 both Typs A, B, C or H channels and Type
Kcftenndstbtnmt besame~cnmctnr. _fhckc@Igcds~olm spxifii to beinrplsomtred at borft
ends of tbe Type K cabIe. ‘fire ype K cable system is not a ~rnt-te-poim bus like Typs A, B, Cor Hsnd
does not need te diffcmntire cable cads as ‘IN” or ‘OLfT. y supp.m-tinga cmnrmn keying mde on beti
mds of the Typs K cable system arid tambmtnr, UreType K cable ear be generic.
51
L
ML~-s:&3&7c~sN)
1 June 1995
30.5 Cmrtrrrtcr interface. A compmsr tmnsfem dare tJn_ougbthe use of an f/O interface. The oamfer
of darn between rhc.computer and rhe outside worfd, IEPrescntuf by @Pkak, is ~nrm~cd by b
interaction of hardware defmcd operations and a compnw program cvrraisdn of UO fnarmctions. The.
relationship that exisrs between the computer nod the pmipbcxafsduring nay + O tmnafer is us follows tfrc
COmpureris ~e cmmolfing *tics or msstee while the pariphmrf is tfrcmmmffcd device or sfavc. Tbc two
basic modes of ~sfer are UIputarrdoumut where rransfrm are afways defined in relstierrahip LOtie
computer. DmAIS OWUSnW~in either a send or pamflel mwmcr depmding upnn the pbysicaf rxmfigurstion
of the cbaueeL Since the bas]c f/O pbilosephy is refntivefy indcg-mderrtof the technique. this appcndw
describes the f/O phifosnpby using only pamlfel interface .=xampIrs.
30.S.1 Cbamrels. Periphamls are mmemed tn the cnrnputes by cables that ormsfer both data end
control sigrrak~put cable and an output cabIc maks up a physical cbmmeL The usuaf pracficc is te
cmmmt me puiphamf device te the computer rluungb a drrnuef. Each channel is bkfimctionaf aud able to
handle data rmnafczsup to a specifred JfO word bmgrh. The data sise uaosferrcd fmm drc paiphsmf may hs
any size up to no I/Oword in length, but m the cnmputcr it wiff always appear to bs amI/O werd in length. For
data tmnsfcrs from rhs computer, the computrx may tmnafar dam whose hmgtb is
pmipfreml may (because of its function) only sample a pordoa of that data
mm word.~~~~:~:t~s%
arrange cbannefs in a cumpurer in groups of foor in orda to censave tocmuing of
inrcrfnce Ievefs. WIIWchannels are grouped, one output data regisrcr aud data fine drivsr w is used for four
output chnrrne~, however, scpamte cnrrtrol line cimuits arc used for each clraanel The input cbrmuels, eidrer
grouped w sepamtc, have scpamrs input ampliikr sets and COUOOI line cirmits for web channel. Dara and
mutrul signals rut maintained on the clramrcfsby a specific voftege level cidfed the cbremel rntcrfacc. ‘ffre
iuteefmc Ievel on my channel m channel group rosy be NTDS fast, (-3 V), NTDS slow, (- 15 V), ANEW nr
High ThrougbfrotPrtmlM (+3.5 .V’),NTDS acrid (+ OC-3.25 V), NATO sexiaf(+ m -0.6 V), fib O@iC
NA’N3aerial, or SCSI-H (S/16 bit fast).
activi~”-!lceeff
‘fbc co utsr is able te have aff cbatrneIsactive aimuleaemaafy. Becrmaeof the
=e.,.ecmnpvrta sbrdfmaintaiiar?yarsmwfr.maflcbann.cnnbc
m-vital witbnut letting any one ctuereel duruinatc the computer. Par this rearcm,a priority system caffed
●
channel priority has been cstabfished that allews for erderly pmrmaing of dam transfers 00 alf cbatroefs. fn
addition, b-xaoae a channel is able tn crmy on data transfers of mom tbao me timction CmprrL OUtpUL
extrmaf fuuction. eud interrupt), a priority dents for funetinn has also been escabfished. Tbc pnmiry
scheme operates to resolve conflicts when more than one request exists at any ene nmmnt in tbc computer.
While multiple activities on many cbrtaaefs may be pnssib~ the actuaf nomber of requcsLspmacnt at any one
time may be fcvmr beams of Oreasymcfrronourmtum of the peripbemfs beiig serviced. In other wnrds, afl
eetivitics on rtflchannels rviffnot mrfre requests at tfMsame rmomt in time.
30.S.3 ~. llre exchange of mnrrol signals or handshaking bctrvem mmpuea ad peripheral is used
m cmmrrl tbe rmnafer of dam ftetwwn the cnmputa aud paipbcraf. A control sigmd caffcd a request is scm
by the puiphcmf en rbc computer whenev~ it is ready m tmrrsfer a weed of data to, m desires a wed of data
fmm the mmrfsuter. When the cemputer rcctrguks this mnoul signaf, it @f affew the mmsfcz of data tn take
place sad geusmre a cantml signrd tu she pmiphmd, called an acknowledge. This ackeowfedge is inte.rpretcd
by the pcriphemf es a signal rn rake rbe data off the Iirrss or clear rhc data fines. Once rlrcackuowlcdge siSrraf
has hem mmgnkaxl, the peripheral is free ro prepare itseff to accept nr card anothcz WOKLFor web word of
data tmnsfemxf, one rcqrrcxtis generated by the peripbeml and mre acknowledge is generatsd by tbe
~~urcI. fII_ wcs Of~sfw mfe~ m us o=msfem~tfr for=. the cmnPu$z can send a WOKIm a
peripheral with no r’equcstfrom the psriphemf. fn any event, a handshaking typ of imcefnce is used, and the
degree of handshaking is specified in section 5 of Urissrandard for each type of interface.
30.5.4 Basic oansfer rypes. ‘llrere nm four types of trrmsfeax EF, EI, OD, end IO. when dam is
tmnsfeued out of or mto ~ IXOIIPU@. tie Q=sfcr Nc.$ PfOCCfrom * memou tn rbc peripheral or vice.
versa. The lnmrion in maiu mmrury is called a buffer and is cmnpletcly nuder the mntrcd of the
progmmmcr. llte foflowiug dkxussion of buffering is not intended en specify bufkx mqnimmems of any
one cumpurcr, it is included to mere completely explain the I/O pbifosnphy. ‘k programmer defmcs the
buffer osing buffer corrrrcdwords (BCW) m describe twn addreases, the initial address coutrrd word (fACW),
52
ML.A;AT3;7C:SH)
● 1 June 1995
and tbe terminal address cuntml word (TACW). The location in main memury affected by the tmnsfer of
data is spmifkd by the lACW of tbc BCW. The lACW is the initial memmy Inmtion in tk buffer that will
be f~ed on input or emptied on outprIL Ilre TACW is tbe final memsry address tifled or emptied. Tbe
sim of the buff= is fimiterfby the fengtb of she amard word and the mmcry sise of the wmputa. The
buffs may mnga iu size fmm one word. in wfdcb case OreIACW emdTACW are the smrc, up to the limit
that mu be deseribcxfby the mmml wnrda. For eaeh transfer of data. the follnwing opemtions coummiug
tbe BCW take phlO%
n. Tmuafer of data nwrmi.
b. Compiirimn of fACW and TACW is made.
(1) Ifcquali all uansferbave hem made.
(2) ff Unequaf,mom Uausfcrs can be Imde.
c. Tbc fACW is inaeomted by 1.
303.4.1 Tsansfcr te spwiaf or maimed nmmnry. ff tbe enmpma finds that 00 equafity exists, Uw
Iraeafarofda tawilfbetmninated equality exists, anotba Omtafmcan take place. fn both instancw,
IJlcfACW is iaa—euKll ted. Thee&qra~mb apecirdoraaaigncd mwkmYlomdms Omt~bOfdthe BCW
while buffers axeactiw. ASoan of the initiate buffer instruction. BC!W%am mmafrmed fmm a ommam =
of maia erErmry to Speciafo-raasigned rmmm-y leeatious. Eaeb Incadnn cmmsponds to a @“cufR frmcdnn
on a partiarlfo eisanncl.
[.~a)~~mml=mmo aod 305.S2, respectfully.

~ofEF~fer,W-wmdw~hf-
fn eitha mm, the pmpm.e of the EF oauafa is
tn aend a mmmand to the paipkaf davicc tn teff Oreperiphaal what tlmcdena, witfrie its wpabiity, to
perform fnotkrwa-d% EFwmmandame iwauctiona within the mpatnire of the paripheml tn telf it what
redo. h=w~dti tidh-, fmwle, w%tia~~tiofo~on. Itis
impmsanttn notctIVAthe F=ipbeeal devicaabau atomthe EFeommaad in its iutanaf fwaina register
throughout she entire dumtina of the pasdmdm eraxfeof upaadon. Tbia is nwmsary so that the paiphemf
willrernaia iutfres.elecred omdeaadthos kwwwbatopaatimr itispafomring.
3035.1 Buffered EF. Bnffaed EF tranafen me VW aimifa eo OD tmnafaa witlr the axcqtirm that
the wad smt to the peripkaf iaacommaud wordandmtt adata wotd. Toeaummt EFtmusfa to tie
placc, tkpaipbaaf awdsau- totbeeompata. Mtim~uMkmWMertim,itti-tie
ememraadwmdf
mmnmnnryaada end itrmson tba ODlineaaccomprmicd byao EFA Tbecnrmmnd may
be more than one word ie Imgth, but only one word is scat for each mqae-stfacknowledgesequence. In this
msetharequeadackrrowladgeia lhefZFWEFA lltmefinm, EFfWFA, areueique tntk EPfsausfa. However,
tfredata Iincsfhat corrytbe EFeomrmmd worrfamcommou to both Output data WOrd O’W5fCIS and =
commaud WOrdOmrsfaa. ~ pcripbentf deteua IJISdiffcomee between COmmandWO1’dS aud data WWdSby
mmus of their nuique acknowledge signrd, that is, EFA with au EF cmmnand word, ODA with an OD word.
30.5.5.2 EF with form. Many paiphaal devices (designed for mrlia enmpmas aud systems) am not
able to gcmxata an Mlt. Iu tis~,tiem~=mymdm~m~dtimdm EFAwithno
rafnmt~mtiepe@mJ. Tld.ria aaidtnbe au EFwithfwm. Figure 56appfim, exccpt Umtthe EFRIineis
not used. One mrmwud word is mmsfemxf with web fm’cedEFA swt by lhc computer. Tbe wmputer ahafl
be pmg.mrmmd to execute a apeciaf insormtion (the fume EF immmion) for each command vmmlto
oansfmrcd m mder se internally gauaafe the EFR sigard.
opaminn is m mmsf- data fmm a mmpmce memory
b~~z~~w~”’v wmd is ormsfczmd
Of thisfor each requeatkekunwledge. The mqusst that the
peripheral sends IS an ODIL ff tbe mmputi bm an amive output buffcx(that is, the mmpma ia iu a
wndition on tbaespecitlc cbanncI, m that it mu logimffy sense the mqmst), a data wurd is obtain~ l%m
memory and aam se the wrifheml by mmns of tba OD fiWS. An ODA is aeut (u the ~tipblf C0UCM7CIIdy
withtbedaa ~~kkMnn tibmtia ~h~mdh ODAkMti kb~onc~&fmonly
n abon pried of time tbal varies with t~ of iuterfam being used. For acmaf timing, refer m the apprnpriaLc
section of the standard. During acknowledge dxrE,the paripbed device abaflrrcccpttbe data or it will be lost
after tbe specitkf tiu baa elapsed.
53
ML~;:&3&7c~sH)
1 June 1995
30.5.7 ID see fi um 58. The urpose of this operation is to stnm data that is being tmasfemcd from
*C.pcri,kmbi%idm.
cl. e computer. Oue data woxdis tmasfeued for ea&
requcstlacknowlufge sequcucc. fu ti case, the request is the lDR aad the aduowlezlge ia the fDA. The
peripheral places a ward of dat-aon the fD firmanad sets the IDR fine to indicate a dam wmd iS on she fD line-s.
If the computer has ea iuput buffer active (dm is, the computer is ia a comfidun au that specific cbauncl, so
that il can logically sense the request), it wiff stm’ethe data in main msmmy nad mud a fDA.
The data rmd the request rue held in a b~ “one” state uudf the acfmowledge is received by the psripheml.
~sa the peripbcraf rexeives the acfmowladge it drops the request rmd tfmr pmparea the next word for
umsfcr to the mmqsutsr. Wbcn dre next word is ready, 13Epe$ipbard scuds aao~ IWPU?.SL me cycfe
repeas uatif the puipherd bas no more data to scud or the iuput fuaaiun is mmmated (that is, the input
buffer Wmiuatss aud the computer automatically shuts off the lmaafcr on that cbauuef aad rehxs m
accept additioad data).
‘llre pnrpnse of this opemdon is to provide the periplmaf with the abffty m
iucem~~~ ~~ emrp[ may or may uot be acmuqsarded by a statas code geumraed by the
peripheral, If ths Wripheml dncs ❑ot generate a spccitlc iatermpt states code, tbm the.code abnofd kc aff
z.cms. Tbc transfer is W-Ysimilar tn the iaput operation, except that tbe iupot word is a status womi
indicating either a particnfar state of the pmiphamf us acme ccmditkmdatfve m tbs f/O ufwation. A status
word is not a data word siuce it iadicaus that a particafar eqtdpmsat m f/O conditinn exists, GXexample,
iupm npeminn cnmfdete, parity error, quiprusut deaii ta iuput tu the mmputa, aad au forth The status
iaformstion may be several words, but mdy nne wnrd is mmsfcrmd for each reepmstfacfmowledgcsequcuce.
fn this case, the seques/acknnwlcdge is an EfRAOA The cnmputa umtrofs whctk tho periphaml caa
fnrmulatc aad mad au El by mxms of the EfE fine. This fiat is active if them is au active EI buffer (au active
EI bat% merms that the cumputer is ia a mnditinn, on that par&edM chaoneL eo that it cm receive iatemapt
data). If its acdve, the peripheral may fnrmufate a sfatns word. The paipbarsd pats tbe statm word uu the
data liies aud sends m EfR m the umrpwer. lhe computa rcspnruk by accepting the status wnrd nn the
iapm fines aad sendiag a fOA en the pcripbemf. The fDA is used for citfmefD m iatasnpt daIs. ‘flmefore,
tiepphed sMlhhlemtiti-m bmmm~Amm~dm~Amm~R SuUmttbe
periphcrnl ma differentiate a data word acknowledge nod Ef states word dnnwledge, tbe computm wilf
dativti tie=hewtie tie~Akwntti_=mm~ Smm?conqmMs donntbave the EfEfine, o
sad thsrefom iutcrmpts are rdways enabled nnfcss disabled by pmgmm hmocdou. Ef am viewed sfigbdy
differently depeading on whether you are lnnfciugat Ilrem fmm the compnta m fsesipbeml.
30.5.8. f Fmm the amuxrtce viewpniat, ‘fbcfe are nvo basic typca of iaterrapts: tbme are the extemnf
nud the internal mlcrmpts. The M ongmate m a periphemf device and have status wnrds (intmrupt code)
associated with them. Tbc iatenrrd interrupts are gsaerated withiu ths camprrtrxgcacxatfya cmuft of some
intcmal status cmwfiticm.For the propose of LM appendix, mdy the Ef wiff be discussed, siuce their origiu is
Umperipheral device.
30.5.8.2 Fmm the pcsipheml viewpniut. Wbemau Ef is genemted ia a pcriplmaf device, that &vim
provides a status wendas iatormation tu the computer. The amtmt md format of the seams word is uuiqus to
tiat devica. The cumputer. upnn detection of the El sigmd fmm the peripkmf, stems tie smtus word in a
memory location and sends a IDA to iadicate that the status word has been stored.
54
MfL#hD~7C~SH)
● 1 June 1995
30.5.8.3 fncerru t codes, EI indicate quipmera swus. The nmrrbsr of unique sums renditions is
proportional m _oftbc peripheral device. Whmevcr there is orore than omstatos cwrufitim,
aume rrmns of idmdflcation of the partimlar conditions is necessary. A mstbnd cmrnnunly naed is m
assuciate a partimfar condition with a number or rode. Thus tic rerm intcrrept mde mmns tbst a particular
number (code) is associated with a pmicular stoma condition. The acnad code mmcimed with a sratos
cnndicionma be very simple, for esarnple, squeutiafly numbering the status conditions and using that
number as the interrupt rode. Anotba possible medmd of idmdfying ths smtoa condition is m amigo a btt
position m mcb status mnditinn. Thus the iuttmupt mde mu indicocethe codrs status in uric word, tit is, a
I bit is set (binary nnc) if the status rzmdltion exiaca. The parcictdrumuhed of mdiag status c4rnditi0nswill
fmve to mmddcr the following
a. CmoPkxity of the device.
b. Use of the device in a particular system, that is, how dam ~ @@ M* ~C o-
epcration of tbs system
c. How many status conditions are rmfiatic from a system srand pnint znd how complex the
f=mmu~ Pm-need be in nrdu m effccrively utifim she pm-iphcm.d.
d. De not include oIcerrapISfor the sake of having inwrepL$. Some devima do not rwquire
Oreirimrporation of intermpta, eirhr.rbmaesc of Iheir simplicity, or ~ OfOICiiUSC
in the system.
30.5.8.4 Desirm mnstminra. fn tie design of peripheml eqaiprmnt which utilize EI, tbcze are cwo
major design mnsmamrs
a. The peripheral shall lx m dcsigeed tit it is impassible for the paiphcral m
shradtaumaalyset or set sqamdaOy Ibe IDR and EIR sigaala so that both signafa me
prmmted tn the mmputer foc the aarm input word
I
b. Sorm mmus of determining that an fDA is a rrspcmse to an EfR rather than an fDR (since
the scum acknowledge Sigmrfline is Usedfor beth) Shau be inmrpnmted intn the
fxxipheml device
‘e e.. Cnnva’asly, Seine Or.aas of &mmdrdng thatshs lDAsignal iaamspnnae teanfDR.rather
than an EfR abaff be inmrpuratcd inte she design of the pcripkrsl device
‘flte.secoosoaima am further explained in 5.1.1.2.
I 30.3.8.5 EIff/lDR intcrfock. llre EIR/IDR mnstr-aints indicate.an intrxlock ia reqnimf between the IDR
andthc EfRarriba.tbuthth c comptm.r aed the peripheral device wiIl fmow which is which. The sraedard
sutitwti tie~RsiA WMcI~Mbt 20mbefm tie~abwtmd~~ This
&aaatbac 20psafta&fDRsigeal Iussbcc rckaredkc
auseofth erccziptoftbe IDA, Ureintenuptmde
mn be generated and the EIR signal ma be set. TM timing rrsniction fosther sratea that the EfR signal shall
kcltimkt~~Momk~Rsi@dwkseL Thiarueaas rhatifthe fDAisarmpooae toao EIR,
the EIR signal shaff k. in tie ckared state as km 20 I&.,due to an input ackaowkdge (1A)in rcsponac to the
EfR, bcfnre the IDR ma be SSL The rmson for the above rsstrictinns is so @ the paipheral and the
m-u~r do not km- m- about fD and El SIASUSdate. h ahmdd be noted, upnn examination of the
input cable interface signals, that the ID b aad the fDA signrd arc mrrmmn to bush fD an H statas data.
The only differmce, fnrm an inter-face signal viewpeint. betwmn U) and EI status dare is that fD is aignifkd
by the D3Rwhife EI stares dara is signitisd by the EIR signal. Tbercfnre, the peripheral device ahaM.m.sum
tititadektie wknm~Akaq=mm fDRandwhcn the fDAisareaponse tears EIft,
otberwiac, bntb mrnputer and peripbcral will bmume confased. The IDR/EIR interlrxk can be accomplished
by timing triggered Gom the IDA.
55
MU$;;Nl:&7C~S H)
1 June 1995
30.6 IC interface philososrhy. Tbc IC mode is used when IWOcmnputcrs tmasfcr data betwsen each
I other. Computers cm be design ed so that normal data channels can k convened, by mcaas of switches, plug-
in mndufes, primed circuit cards, and so fonb to operate in the IC mode. When a normal data cbmmel is
converted for use in the IC mode, onfy the output charmel requires tmdiikation. The inprrt channel is not
modified. IOorder to convert a normal output channel to opcmtc in the IC mcde, the frdlnwiog osodifmirions
are reqrkd
a. The EFA is not a singfe pofse as it is in a normal cbamrel; instead, the EFA, wbeu set to
tie bmasy one state, shaff remain set unto a Resume siguaf is scceivcd.
b. The norzml channel ODA signal is fabekd the RcadYsigual for IC mods. The Rmdy
sigrsafwhm SC1to the binary one ssata shell remiss set until the Resumc signaf is
rmeivut. fn other words, the normal chaouel ODA has bcm rcoamed Rmdy aorfis not
siogle pofsed es it is for nonunf chatmef opcmdoas.
c. The normal channel ODR line is reoamed the Rmunrc for [C orude. fn addition for the IC
mode, the Rmome s.igaafclears either the EFA os Ready, wbicfrcveris scL
I h output cbauoel on one cnmputcr cmmects to an input cfrmmelon the ulhcr COMPUUX, sod,
~Pomfimgly, CMoutput cbasmel of the second computer couneds to au iuput cframrelof the fisat
~MPutcr. E$I12h
cosuPuti bJOkSfike a periphemf devim to the other inpm.
30.6.1 Data arrdcontrol signafs. Tbe control sigoaf and lines gnvurdng IC communimtiun arc
Sfrowoin tigam @ which iurr.stratcathe interface benvecn cwocomputers. Computer A is ~mittiug to
manktutsr B. The selection of a given channel as an IC channel affects.onfy the logic ccawemmg the .wpm
aod EF buffem.. A channel scstefingdata or EF mmeagcs to a gwar psnpfremf equipment fsofdsthe.data in the
output regis- for a fixed miuii time period, after which any other output or EF request on any channel
can muse. the data to be cbaugcd. However, a chamrel sending dsta or EF messages to annther mmputer .sfraff
hold the iufnmration in the output registers uodf the receiving computer ackuowluigcs rezeipt of the data.
1’
This acknowledge signaf is received on what is fmow as tbe ODR line when nol io IC mode. This hue, irsthe
IC mode, is known ac the Resums Uue. The cootrol sigords in tic input cable em the same for IC
mmmunicadon as for commom‘cation with pcriphcmf cquipm=mt. In the output cable, Ready aad Rcarum
signafs are used to mntxol the [C oasrsfer of data
a
I 30.7 ExamPIes of Uo Ofresatious. The foffrnviogd~cussion udlima the NTDS papa capeunit as cm
-Ie to iUiitmtE Wicaf !& output aud iuput operations (see figure 61). Figure 62 ilfustmtes the bit
I posmnn mded EF cmrrmaudword. When a pardcufar mnde or fimction is to be selected, an EF mmmand
word with the appropriate blt or bits set is sun to LheuniL
30.7.1 EF codes. Tbc pesiphmrd is m.quimdto store the EF mde iu aa iotcroaf fuuction scgistrf. Refer
to figure 61 b~z of the puuched tape unit. The only exception to the EF mdc stomge seqrrimment
is that tbc master clear EF mdc bit is not stoscd. The reason for not storing tbe master cfmr bit is that the
clmriog of aff circoits within the pcriphmaf ie a one shot operation that is accompliskxf upon dctmdon of tbe
EFA sigrrafend the ma.wcrclear bit being io the biuary one state. The pcriphemf is designed so that the
master clmr bit can be set in conjunction (cmuainrd in the.szum EF carmrrmd word) with any other function
bit aad the maw= clearing of the periphrxal will take place fret, mrdOrcnthe selected fursctiontiff be
performed (for example, roaster clear and enable puacb). Sea?the follnwirrg example:
76 S43210
(308) wifl cause the onil to be fist mastm cknred and then
~ enable the punch (that is, stan prmcb rmtor aad set the ODR).
Certain combinations of bits set in tfrc EF cmmuand word are ilfegal, for example, both bits 4 aud 7 aet to
binary one issdicawstit the puuch should be botb enabled and disabled at the saroc dsm. If damage to
squipmcnt would resuft from illegal EF command bit mmbinations, tien the control logic sbafl be designed
to igttore or rtuffifythose illcgaf combinations. The particular bi~or biLsselected to perform a given fimction
●
56
o or aa of functions is dependent on tie eamre of the peripheral device end is a function of system design.
Thsre are no rmrictions frnm the mmputer staadpuim as (u the EF cmnmand word formst. other thrr
computer wurd length. However, it is q pmc~ to ~ the lower birs fret, and expand upward as
tISJXSSWY. fIIgeneral, a ldXtOriCOIaOafYSeSof vrtnorrsparpheml EF wmmaed werds reveals that mrmin major
functions such as master clear, ontput mode, aad rnpm mode secm to use rbs sraadaxdbk positions, regardless
of the nature nf tie peripheral (for example, master clear 23, output mode 24, arrdinput muds 25). ‘llte
actual EF command used (designed iete the hmdware) shall be appmpriats to the device rmd sftao be
foolpreof. Fenlprmf nrmns shot illegal mmbbmsions will be igoored by the frardwamor wifl not in any way
damage the quipmcm or cause onerpmted rmnha.
30.7.2 E tion. ‘f%isexample is iereeded to mom cfmrly iffnstmte the
1exist dmieg au output operation. The papa tape urdt is a
very srmple dewce. The only rmtput faactimr.that it mu psrfmm is prmdring papa raps. his asmrsrd that
the amble pmrch EF command has bem prevmnaly sent to ths paper mpe OUIL Ths frqm tape unit is
therefnre reedy fur OD (the ODR signal is set). Assuming that tfrs mmputa k an active output buSTmset
up for that channel, the mmpmer f/O sedan wilf same she ODR aad rmpnnd with OD word mrd an ODA
Tbs papa tape wio detect tbs ODA aezept SIEoutput wod stem the output word in the Prutd data re@sW
I and cfear the ODR signal. TEe data stercd ia rbs prmcb register will be punched as coatmflcd by timing of
the pmrcb mnuol Iogk. Wbm the punching is cmrrplets, Ure puacb meoul Iogic ti agaie set the ODR
signal indicating that the punch ia ready for mtotbsr werd from the mmputer. The abeve aqumce will
mndnus until the compmm ompnt buffer is cxlrausted, that is, the buffer taminmm. The ODR repetition rmc
is a fouction of tie spsrd nf the punch, bat is, the ODRS rate is dstererimd by how fast M prmcb w 0ss
the dam. The OD rate for any pesiphend is determined by the speed of UE output dsvics (m this cess, the
prmch) and the rmruumof other cemputcr I/O aclivity and ths priority of the paipberel, which is based on the
channel and fimction for all l/O.
30.7.3 Esample nf an input operatkm. Tbe NTDS paper taps unit is used to expfain the refationabip of
the mmputsr and Lhe WnPh@ U shelf emst during an ieprn transfer. It is assumed tbar prwrines m
activating the mmputer chuunel fur in ULan EF m-d (amble mada) was wxn to the papsr tape unit. II
&~~tittiepawrm~ ~~*bh~itimtiatti~ atinnm~itmM~d. ff
kWwmnditions tiveti=L&-tihved tkfmt6am, pfamdths datamrthedataliees
se the computer, aed act the IDR signal If the channel is active for iapn~ the mmputa will smss the tDR,
readtbe IDliues, aedrmpmrdwirhan IDA Wkrrthe papawqreuuitmeiveat beIDA.i twiUcleartheIDR
signal, clear the ID lima, mad the nsxt frarm, place & data on the data liars to ths computer, and set the IDR
signnl. The seqnsnce of the reqncstfacknowledgemntiuuea until tbs irrputbuffer is 611ed,at which dms the
~rrrputcr autnmadcally rcrmiuates the buffer. The fDR will still be SX?4 bm the computer input cbaneel is
rnactive thersfort, the IDR is not smaed by t& f/O smtion. Sinec.Oredata oansfa steps becauss of buffer
tmmination, the tape is stopped.
30.8 TymeK external termination. The extanaf boa temrinatmx so be used me pfaeed 00 betb da of
the Type K~us SyXtCUl be exter-eaf sarnhmdea method shall involve a madng munmtnr ping and sealed
backafrefftbal can be aaal on any Type K receptacle at each snd of the Typ K bus syxtmr. See fignm 63 for
a typimf implementation of tie Type K interface bus tcnrduatinn. The temriuater shall mate with dre
M28840 cebinet connector end shall met all electrical charactd$tics detailed in this somdard. The
rsrrrdnator mnmxtor shall adbsre to the pin assigammt as given iu tabIe Xl. Refermce part number
13219389-03. T’biS pm has been fmudumd in aCCOIXklIXXwith this standard.
30.9 Sumnrar information is rnmaferred to and from the mnrputa by means of the f/O section. The
intaaction O+U* and sofhvme-defmuf q!cratiorm catrsmaa orderly oauaferof data. l%nr dam
Ormsfem am pnssiblc EF, ompnt. H md iqrrrL 3estrectiona within a mm% ~ogmm cause buffers to bs
activated for a ~“cular ticrion. 71te. IfO section then govcres the exchange of data betwme compuux aed
periphemd,Uansfrxringdare when requwed and terminating the buffer when data transfer is mmplers.
e 57
I
1- –––__— ——— __ –_– ______
MIL~::&3gc~sH)
1 June 1995
Page intentionally left blank
s’
58
M&~-~;l~~C~SH)
1 June
●
1995
SPECfAL REQUIREMENTSFOR CP-642A/B AND CP-789 COMPUTERS

10. SCOPE
10.1 Sco e. This appendix provides information regarding tfre special requiremems applicable to
CP-642AiB*P-789 cumfruL?rsaudis a mandalmy ptiOflbi.S slaIIdard.
20. REFERENCED DOCIJMENTS
NoI applicable.
30. DEFfNfTfONS
Not applicable.
40. GENERAL REQWMMENTS
Not applicable.
50. DETAfLED REQWREMENTS
50.1 Functional reaimrnmts.
am. typs used by tbe cnmputer aod dated equipment is the Type A
~l*%:FW,~’ . . ~ti
S0.12 Channel mnfigura tion. Communication with tbc canputcr is mmiwl on in a parallel nmrfeof
u 10a 30-blt data ThCCOOIPUtiis pfOVidCdwiti 14 UO cbalrucfsconsisting of twO[C tick and
1!! cmnputcr+~w$ &annefs. The [C channels am assigned to UO chanwfs O and 1.
50,1.3 Cnntrol simafs.
S0.1.3.1 Ccmurutcr-periubcral cmnmurric.ations. The wnool ha used by the computer to
communicate wrtb tbc pcripheml quiplwnt am spedr ied in table XV, ~ acqmnce of events for dara
mausferappficablc 10all contsol lines spwitiui in table XV arc spwifii io 5.1.1 UIWugb5.1.1.4.
TABLE XV. Coumutcr-fmipherid wntrrd s&nrds.
I Function Cbnnnd Dil’wtion of ti.pd

fDR hrpnt peripheral cquipmwt to computer
IDA Input computer to paipbu’rd equipment
EIE Inpnt Computer to paipbaaf equipment
EIR Prxiphd equipment tn Wmputer
ODR &p;\t Peripberaf equipment to mmputer
Ootpul Rriphuaf rquipnm.nt tn computer
ODA output Computer to pcripbaaf equipment
EPA output CmuPuter to peripf=rd equipment
59
50.1.3.2 lC conmrenication. The contrel hues used by the computer tn counnunicae with another
computer are spectiled m table XVf. The wuencc of events for &u tmnsfer applicable m afl eenuol lines in
utble XVf are specified in 5.1.2, except for the input buffer active conoul line as specilkf bcrein.
TABLE XV1. IC conuel simmfs.
Function Direction of signaf

Rmdy (IDR) Transmitting cnmpntce te receiviag computes
Restum WA) F&eiving Cmlrputerto tmnsmitting cmuputer
Input buff- active 11 Receiving computer to uansmitting computer
y fnput buffer active line is s-etand cleared by tie computer rcmiviog fD and is det~ted by
the computer oausmitting OD.
50.2 Scaiaf reauiretmms for CP-642A
S0.2.1 CP-642AICP-642A IC communication. When cmmectcd as shown on tigme 64, hvo CP-642A
computers arc abfc to h-amsferdate es specifkd herein. The oaesmitdng computer holds the data on Ose
OD lines untif either
a- The receiving caquter sas the Resume hue, or
b. The tmosmittiag mrmfrum program intervenes to rexcdvethe n~fkamc condition.
50.2.1.1 In ut buffer. Tbe rnput buffer active fine is set by the smeiving computes whenever an input
bufferbas beenb W input tmffereedve line is dctcetcdby the O’ansmitdngcemputcrby the
executitm of a apmiaf msemctI‘on. Tlmefore, tbe use of the iaput buffer active fine enables the hansmirtiug
eompu~ to initiate the lC output bnfk onfy when nssural tbnt the receiving cmoputcs lC input bnffer has a
been nntisted. IC data Oansfesfrom the Umr.sndtdageauspu~ m the receiving sbaff be as foflows:
a. The rrxeiving computes ietkiaresan iuput buffer and sets the input bnffm active fiae.
b. llw tnmsodtdng computes, by executing a spccinf progmm instruetiou, detects the input
bnffer active fine.
c. The transmitting computer initiates an output buffer on the IC output c~el.
d. ‘fbe uansodtting cmnputa places a data word on its OD fines.
e. The esensmitdngcmnputes sets the Rmdy line to indicate that data is avaifable.
f. fn acomdancc with intcmaf priority, the receiviug murputer detmts the seiningof the Ready line of
the tmnsr.uittingcmnptsm (which is recognisal as the fDR).
The receiving emnpnta samples the fD fines.
E: Tbe receiving computes w tbe IDA line.
i. The rsansmisdng mmpmes detects the seuiog nf the fDA line of tie ~iving computer
(which it recognizes as tbe I&mm fioe).
j. Tle tsansmitdng mmpurex clears tbe Ready hue befose placing the next word of data on
the OD lines, and the receiving mmputer clears the IDA line befnre samp~mgthe next wurd on
the ID fines.
The computer shafl repeat steps “d” thrnugb “j” undf tbe bleck of words specified by the buffer mntrd word
is uamferred.
50.2.1.2 CP-d42Afnon-CP-642A IC cnmnmnicatiuns. The IC iurerface between a CP-642A computer
and a nonZP442A w~ ~ ntiousbip betwcm the control finss as sfmwn in figure 65.
Tbe mntrcd fines shommmu~~gure65 are defmsd in 5.1.2 and herein. Ikcautions shonfd be raken if t-be
mnrml fine mmbinations shown in figure 65 are used. These prngram Iimirstious are defined by tbe
activities utilizing rbis IC intesfnce end depend upon the system m.quiremcntsdefined for that application.
The functions to bc mnsideti ase as follows:
60
Mfl..-~3~C~SH)SH)
1 June 1995
a. EIR detected by tie CP-642A (EFA fmm tfre non-CP-642A) tipul shannel causes dre
CP-642A re interrupt dre CP-642A pmgrarn nnd execute the instruction placed at the
dmmut intsrrupt enoance address.
b. EFA sigmi having a fmits duration may nnt be set lung enough for the CP-642A tn detect
it as an EfR.
c. Intxx buffer active line rmd EIE fine am compufcr program controlled and afraUbe cleared and set
h each word transferred.
50.2.2 Data rrarrsferrare. Ttx. maximum data a-ansferrate for a singfe.compukz inpnl m output
danrrel is ar f0Unw5
Type A (SIOWinterface)
fnput drannel 25 kifoberlz (KHz)
output channel 3oKHs
50.3 Special rcquiremerstafor CP-642B.

50.3.1 Functional raw ircrmrrts
50.3.1.1 P-.. ~ interface w used by the comgutrs and tbe related qrripromt are Type
A and B rnrufams as spec ml m 5.2.1 and 522. The mrnputer I/ cbaunela are separated into fmrctimral
-S Of fou chmmek each. Ear%group of b four l/O eharmels may use eitfrer Type A
or Type B Lmsrfam.
50.3.1.2 CharmeI mnfimrm tien Cnmmmrimdon with she mrnfmres wiU be carried nn in a paraffel
modeofrrptna30-b” dam ~ nnrobcs of mrrrputsr f/O channels may quaf 4,8, 12, or 16. Each
gsmrpof four UO Aela kw~rubfed on a CF%42A clrasaii or a CP%42B ehaaais. Tire CW642A and CP-
642Bcfmaia rrsaybeirr@meotedtitie
ith=tiT~ A orB interf=wsPd5e
diuS0.3.l.l. Tire
CT-642A chassis may ordy iomface with pcripheraf eqtdprmnt. and CP-642B cbasais rosy interface with
paiphed eqaipm=t or othes mmpumra.
a Each group of foln Vo clrarmefsSfrauOpsnrls irrdepmdmtfy of tbs Otfra m duomsls.
b. Wboftie fom UO_krnm UO~up Mhvetimti-amw
fType A intuface us Typs B intaface).
50.3.2 Control signafs.
50.3.2.1 Computer-peripheral mrrrmanications. Tlrs mntrnl lines rraedby‘he cernputer to
Comrorrnicitewltfr tbe fm-rphend qnipmmt arc apmr%edin 5.1.12.
50.3.2.2 IC mrrurmnication. The.eontrrd Uses d by the mmputes to co “ w witfr another
Wwm am Speclfled in 5.1.3.
50.3.3 Data transfer rates. The maximum data tranaf= rate for a single cornptrtsr ioput or outfnrt
Cbarmelis as mows:
Type.A (slow interface) - ~ w
Type B (Fast interface) - 12S RHa
l%e data transfer ram for a siven system mn@rradnn is determined by additional factms such as corrrputu
rntcraal priOlitiC-S
and the response - Of the iSItemOnU.XMgeqrlip-L
50.4 Sprxiaf reqrrimmnta for CP-789.
50.4.1 Functional requirements.
50.4.1.1 Interfaw IWC. Tbc imcrfam typca used by the computer and related quiprmnt sbafi be Type
MfL~T-SNf:~C~S H)
1 June 1995
A and B inkrfaccs as spedkd in 5.2.1 and S.2.2, respectively.

50.4.1.2 Channel emrfixrrration. Communisation with tie mrnpu(cr is carried on in a pmallcl mnde of
up [o an 18- or 36-b It data word. The number of the UO channels used by lhe comprrru is foru or eigbL The
cnmputer has fotu modes of operation.
a. Single-cbmmei.
b. Dual-channel.
c. Intermrnputcr (tC).
d. Externally specifk?dbl&X ON).
‘flux modrs of operation me cnntrnffed by switches in rbc frnnt panel at the computer.
50.4.1.3 Single-cMumel rnude. fn tbe singbcfsmmel mnde, the rransfer of information to and from
the mrnprrter isT8 bm ptiel.
5c.4. 1.4 Dunl-cbarmel rrmde. fn the dud-channel mwJe. dre ~sfer Of ~fO~tion m ~d fim tie
computer is 36 bits pemllel Two mqumtiaf even and ndd numbered UO cbsrmels em cnmbii for dmd-
chmrnel op-sratinn. Dnm &msfcr is by 36 parallel fines comained isrone cable. The 36detn-bit input and
OrStpUL cables sbaff be mnrrmmd so Orendd cfrennelof the channel pair. Cnntml nn duef-cbarmel is
rrraimainedby tbe ndd cbarrrselcontrol lines. Nn externa.fUO cables can k mnnecred m tbe even cbarmel
wtille in the dual channel mnde.
50.4.1.5 IC nmdc. fn the IC mrie, the rmnsfexof infer-marimrbstwmn mmputcrs is 18 bhs (single-
chnnrrel)or it is-if UE cmnputcxis in tfrcduof-cfsmrnelnr ES tmrfe.
50.4.1.6 ESI mnde.. fa the ES mcde, the uansfa of information to and from tbe mmpmer is 36 bks
pemllel. Wben~-g iaformstion inro M computer, 18 bits em data and 18 biLSarc su address thst
indiredy spccitles where to sum. Umdata Wlrm Lmrrsfen’inginformsdm out of the computer. the mi~g
equipmmt muds an 18-bit address that idmctfy SPCCMCS fmm whe= so m~ve tie ~W md tie mmpu~ o
sends 18 bk of dnm. Seleuiog the ESI mode anmrnstidfy forces me mrnputer in rbe dmd-chsrmel nmde
for rim adjae.xntpeir of even-odd cbnnnefs.
50.4.2 Conmd sigruds.
S0.4.2.1 CompuLer-pcripbend commrmieatinn. The conuol lines used by tie mrnpumr tn
~=icate WI~ a Wnphd equiPMwt em specified in 5.1.1.2. Tbe cnmpuur dries not rrdfize tie ELE
fine during irrterrnpt m-icstion.
50.4.2.2 IC mmrmmication. Tire mntml fines used by dre mrnpurcr rn emrmrrnicam wilr another
mmpumr me spectimd ~ 5,Lz.
50.4.3 Data transfer rates. The rnasirmrm date transfer rate fnr a single cmnpnter input or outpm
channel is as foUOws
Single (18-bit mnde) Dusl (3&bit morfe~
Type A (Slow irrtcrface) 41.6 ~Z 35.7 Kf-Ez
Type B Fasl interface) 50 KHz 41,6 KHz
In tfreevent a high speed pcripbemf is used wirfrUSCmrnputa, mm shrdfhe cxrmised so dsre wiff not be IOSL
For example, if the transfer rare of the ~ripbemf were one dara wnrd every 48 W, and the mmpuur pmgmro
were to execute a multiply m divide instmrctinn,a word may be 10SIbecause a omftiply or divide insouction
can require up to 48 W. ‘fhe darn transfer rete for a given system cordlgumdon is dstmudned by addbiomd
fac~orssuch es computer imernrd priorities end the rmpmrse dme of rhe interconnecting equiprmnL
62
MfL~~.l;~C~S H)
1 June 1995
TYPE E ADDITIONALFEATURES
10. SCOPE
10.1 ~. This appmdix comeins operedonel cberecrmistics and design guidence for Type E
ieterfem, ayatenrintegrity fmrurrs (SIi%.)which diow C05PKICIsY5~~ ~ de=l - md f~~s, ~d
burst ~sfa ode wbicb is a mars of inemssing tbmugbptu on a Type E intdam. Additionally, this
4T=ZIdISmmaim fXIOfOtUISIICC te-stsfor Type E. This appendix forms a maedsrory pert Of his starrderd.
20. REFERENCED DowMENm
I Not applicable
30. DEFINITIONS
Not a~ticeble
40. OENEFUL REQufREMEms
40.1 Tbmn.elruut imorovernent. Irnpmvermet in Uuongbpnt me be achieved as specifiai in 40.1.1
Ibrougb 40.m Tbe thm Ireth tie SWT end beret Oarrsfesis shown on figere 66. This is the
lbearetiml maximum ti~ggt$~tombievnble, irrsfnding the cffeas of Irmh the sddition of a perky bit to *G IF
aed tbe delays causal by cable Img!bs.
40.1.1 Mieimom thmui?bput for SWT. For SWf, tbe pmtuml bes bme defieed by Type E rdnng with
a~-dmdi nobItapasecnnd (Mb/s). The fmt pmreml is fur tfraraiok that mqrrimstime to
I immalfy uaesfer tbe mzivuf N/ before accepring the next lW. This pmmeol is es foUOwS
o Seorm (s0s) —> Siok “Arc yuu ready fer dam or m?”
= ~ (s1s) Sirrk “Iemready fordata ercfworboeb.”
—> Sink ‘HcrEis the date.”
If this aequcece is foUnwedfor eaeb CfW m data wmd to be trsoafemed,Ibe dmmrghpntfor tie nnidimctinnef
channel, based on a 32-bit word (no parity), me be del%redas follows:
Swrrence Time (based cm 10 Mb/s)
sour-lx (s0s) --> Sink 0.4 pa
source mioimum deley 0.s ps
Solrme c– (MS) sink 0.4 p
source minimnm deley 05 pa
source (lF) —>sirrk 3.4 p
Sirdr ruieienrundelay 0.s ~
&mme <– (s1s) Sick 0.4 ~
Snrlrm miniium dehy ~
Total time . 6.6 p
63
L–-–-__–- –____ _____ —

MfL--~--:Nf:~C;SfO
●
1 June 1995
40.1.2 Additionrd factors affecdn tbroughrIuL The thmugbput for thk sequence would be 1000/6.6
Or 151.52 thousand WU1’dS LSIO normal protocol requires a ammo] word to be
transferred between date *W ~~ed for this mmrol frame tn propagate in the cable (66
percent of the sped of fight in a VacmmOcauses a delay bctwcm word tramfcm, thus longer cables result in
Iowa tbmugbput. The maximum cable Imgtb spwified for the Type E interfhce is 300 mum using TRF-.3
trhiaf cable. For one way tmmmiaainn on this cable, this woufd rcsrdt ie an additional delay of 1.507 w for
eacJISOS cnntml tit SfS eaeuol frrnm, or IF uensmissiun. Man addbionrd 3 W per sink or sornce
transmission is added fur the twu way able delay over a 3ft0-mcI.ercable, then tbmughput is reduced to about
79.3 Kwls. FUIapplications aurently rising pamffel iotm6ices wib thmugbput of 170 Kwls, this woufd not be
an atoactive implemmaticm. A better implemmmion woufd be m provide boffering within the sink so it
coufdbeirmm&td y ready to accept another F.
40.1.3 ODtimum tbmughtlul fur SWT. U the sink is able to accept anotba fW after receiviog an fW,
the protncol wwnldbe as follow.
.SOURX
(SOS) —>@ “Are ynor ready for data or CfW?”
Sounx<- (s1s) sink “1am ready fur duta or cm.”
solllW(W)-> sink” f’faeisthedata.”
Sorrree<— (S1S) airtk ‘I am ready for data or CfW.”
snnree(fF)-> Sick’flezci sthedsta.”
-- ‘me abnve Squenceis repeated until So
. . date m CfW have ken tram.ferrsd.
Srnlrce <— (s1s) aink”Iamrcady furdataurcfw.”
ff this sequurse is foIlowaL tk tbmugftput for the unidirectional channel, with sod without the
implenmrtalion of parity, can be dcfmuf as folfowx
Seuueuce Time (no Duri@ Time (om”w~
source (s0s) —> Siok 0.4 pa 0.4 ps
sink Minirmun dafay 0.5 p.s 0.5 ya
Sollrrx <- (Sfs) aid 0.4 )ss 0.4 ~
Sorm?. minii defay 0.5 ~ 0.5 !lr
Sowx (lF) —> Sink 3.4 pa 3.5 ~
Sink minimum &lay 0.5 M
Srmrce e- (S1S) aid fig 0.4 p.s
Source Loinimurodefay 0.5 y.s 0.5 p
source (IF) —> sink 3.4 pa 3.5 ~
. . Repcaed untif n words have been oaosferred.
sink ndnimnm delay 0.5 p ;: p
Sonmc <— (s1s) sink 0.4 us Us
Totef tkm . 0.4 + n(4.8) 0.4 + n(4.9)
Tbrougbput = Where n. the nurnbr of words uansferred.
&m
The throughput in Kw/s for varions nnmbers of winds transferred is
Tomf tirm ‘fhroughpnt Tntaf Time Throughput
~ @E3!llQ QQf?@Y) QZIQ!Yl Q2@!Yl
5 g:; 204.90 KW/S 24.9 w 200.80 KWtS
206.61 KW/S 49.4 pa 202.43 KWtS
x’ 207.64 Kw/s 122.9 w 203.42 KWIS
50 %:: E 207.99 KW/S 245.4 PS 203.75 Kwh
64
1 June 1995
40.1.4 Cable rkla . The thrnugbput shown fnr ths sequence abnve dam not tic into consideration Ure
edditicm. dem+titig fronrcabfedclay. Tlds delay is shown in the following
Se@ence(30fJ rnmz cableJ
Soarcc(s0s) —s sink 0.4 0.4
cable delay —> sink 1.507 & 1.s07 g
sink Udairmmdday 05 Jls 0.5 ps
Sours <- (MS)sink 0.4 0.4
Sner02 <- cabk dcfay 1s07 ; 1.507 &
source mhirnem dehy 0.5 ~ 0.5 ps
Soulu (IF)-> sink 3.4 3.5
~tik=-> sink 1.s07 & 1.507 F
0.3 p.s 0.5 ps
SnUra <— (sIsY& 0.4 0.4
Sorrm <- cable May 1.507 E 1.507 E
Snvrcz mirdomm tiy 05 p.r 05 pa
Snul’ccm-> sink 3.4 3s
Cable dcfay —> aiok 1.s07 & 1.507 $
. .
-. ~ ad n worda have (rem o-anafczred.
sink rmornt&
“-“ delay 0.3 ps 0.5
s- <— (s3s) fink 0.4 p 0.4 E
Snara <— Cabk 6afey 1.507 1.507
Toraf tirm . 1.907 + n(7.814) 1.507 + n(7.914)
‘a Tflrougbfmt (300 eMas) = 1

tntal trlrE (300 rlwtaal
yg thcnrlbJr of
The, tbrougbfmt in Kw/s for varine.snumks of WOl’&tran#ar’uf is

Toml tirm Thruaghput Tntal Tii Tbrougbput
V?QnlQ QxU@Yl @LU!!!@ QAYl@mYl
5 40.98 w 122.02 Kwls 41.48 pa 12054 Kw/s
80.05ya 122.93 Kwls 81.05 w 123.38 Kwls
E 126.74 Kwls 199.76f.ts 125.16 KW/S
so %2 E n7.35 KWIS 397.61 pa 125.75 Kwls
Thegrapfr, sbuwmnrrfigura66, rankacJ.ameclaia ertfaoftkirmximum tfUOU@pUt 03k3. ThiS graph
shows tfrs dcpmdcacy of masinmm cftsansf dautrgbput as a firauion of cable length. The fmab rnadta serve
asarcmiadczrbata maximum throughput is Spmficd for the Cbaaad and that acmaJ Cqrlipmcm
implermnmdona rosy be bdnw the aftccitluf vafoe. The numbsta shown above shnw that the thrnugbpru can
bs improved by incrtaaing tk nurrrberof wnrds mnmdttcd tbos redecktg tbe overhead for eecb
transmission. Tlrs optimum @rkrme@tinn. brrm Uaaafa. C@ rn~ b nmber of WO* ~sfit~ for
sach IF witiout violating the timiag reqairermrm nf tbe Type E interface.
40.1.3 Burst uaatsrrl~hroughput abewrrin & SWT &rdc nf traasmiasioa is dapeaden! apon the
Ovmla?.addcfay of SIS mspuaxa ftom sink for each IF and the cabfs delay. However, this is not
the msximum tbrerrgfrpnt rbat can Lx. ashievcd witk this clraamf. Ttrs updrrmrrr tbruugbput can be achieved
by uaasferriag enre wnrds without rqdriag mood &arms for baadsbakiag. Type E dnea nnt provide fnr
m upper limit nn lbe size nf tbs fF. A low= limb of six blu is provided m aflow the sink IOdetect whether the
incoming dnra is ckhsr m SOS amool frmm nr m fF. ff the soarcc bas the capability of nppsndmg mere
words wihin a single IF, then tire tbrnugbpnt on the cbaanel mold be incrsasul without changing the
protocul. Tbc.scfactors me Ombasis for tic followiag dcftition of burst traasfcr.
65
40.1,5.1 Burst transfer reu uisements. A new mode of operation for lmth somces and sinks using rhis
approach has km iorpIementcd. ‘Rus approarh is caflcd bum rmosfer,md provides for the !ransfer of up m
32 data words within one fF. A burst transfer of 32 data words within an fF was chnsen as the minimum
number of words that would provide efficiency of transmission. The foUowiogrquisements am used
for Lhisimplemenmtion:
a. only rmdriple data words shaff he affowcd within an LF.Multiple CfWs sJraffnot he permitted
because present equipment is set np top- one co-d at a time. The receipt of muftipIe
emmrraods witbirsone fF cannot be accommodated at this timz
b. Amirrimom ofonemarmuinmm of 32 data words abaffbe inclnded within an fF. Gaps between
data words within an fF abalf nnt be pmnilteef. ff the source is not able to append armther data
word m the IF, W snumc shafl consider she fF completed. Afier ~ipi of the next S1S control
fmme indicating Ml tbe sink is ready fur data, the source ahafftsaosmit a new fF stardng with
the next data wnrd. llse sink shalt detect the end of the IF by tfseeeasation of data bits being
received. The use of a fixed number of words to be hansfesmd wirldn one W woufd be
eoumerpmductite. en the intent of impmving thrnugbput. Whife the amormt of wmpnter
eimuitry woufd be swfueed for both tmnsmission arrd reeeption using a fixed mrmber of words
with amfF, this woufd mducc the improvement of throughput fnr applications with varying sizes
of data buffers to be tmtssmitud. This appmacb to data uaosmission requires the sti to be able
to accept the maximum number of dnta wrrrdsin the IF. The srrurcc woufd not be obfigated to
mmsmit the maximum number of data words within each fF. The source wrmfd begin the IF
witi the S blt fnffowedby the WI biL After these two bits, tbe tirst data woxdwould be
tmnsmitted. As addirionaf data words wrxe available to the source, they woufd he comxurmarcd
m the IF. If a data word was ❑ot avnifatde or the maximum number of data wnrds hsd been
inchrded within the IF, tfsesource.woufd conclude the nmrsmissimr. Tbe sink woufrfdetect tie
rad of the fF by tbe eeasatimr of bits being tmmsmitwdfmm tbe sow and respond with a S1S
control frmm as appmpsiate.
c. Any cfratmelcapable of burst transfer will atso be eapahle of singfe wad transmission. This wifl
aflow equipnrsit with MfIATD- 1397 Type E chamrefs(but without burst tmmfer capabiiiry) to
ewmmmieare With equipment having both.
40.1.5.2 Burst n-aosfer LM-otnccd. The prntncnl for this mode of rnmmrission wnufd be tbe sarm as that
used for my data word m CIW trsursrriksioo as shown below.
Source(s0s) —> sink “Are yoor ready for data?”

Soor.x<-- (s1s)sink “I am ready for data.”
Source (IF) —> sink “Here is the data.”
Soorce <— (s1s) sink “1am ready for data-”
Source (E) —> sink “Here is the dam.”
. .
-- The Sbnve saplense is Icpeatrsl Imdf afl data has been mmsferrcd.
Source <— (SISi sink
66
40.1.5.3 Burst transfer timing. The timing for data word transmission wiih parity not being
implemcnwd and wltb a panty bl[ w
Sewense Time [no mrity) The (parity)
Soeree {S0S) --> sink 0.4 p 0.4 ps
Sink smnimum delay 0..5ps 0.5 p
Sourec -=-- (s1s) sink 0.4 #s 0.4 p
~So ~im~~lay 0.s ps 0.5 p
102.6 IIS 105.8 ps
Sink ndnii delay 0.5p 0.5 ~
sourcec—(s1s)Siak 0.4 p 0.4 ~
SOureeelirimmss
delay 0.5 p 0.5 l.ls
sour= m —>sink 102.6w 105.8p
. . Repcmed uudl n words have been unnsfarred.
Sink minimum delay 0.5 ps :.; )M
Source <— (S1S) sink 0.4 lls w
Total dnx . 0.4 + n(104) 0.4 + n(107.2)
. the number of groups of
Throughput
d-tiiiz Whmn .
32 wnrds transferred.
The throughput in Kw/s for various numbers of words tmesfersed is:
TooII tires ‘fhronglspm Tomi The Throughput
Wosds (no periI~ QEU12!@ Q2!SQYl QEZL!.Q
32 306-50 Kwls 297.40 Kwls
64 i%:: E 307.10 Kwls M:: & 297.95 Kwls
96 312.4 P 307.30 Kw/s 322.0 ~ 298.14 f(wts
40.1.5.4 Cable delay. when the cable delay is taken into consideration, OIetiming is as fnllows:
Sequence (300 meter cable) T- (no pari~
Source (SOS) --> sink 0.4 0.4

Cable &kY —> Sick 1.507 $ 1.507 E
Sink minimum delay 0.5 ps 0.5 us
source <— (s1s) sink 0.4 0.4 L
Source c— cab!e delay 1.507 E 1.507 ps
Snuree minimum delay 0.5 ps 05 ~
Sourec (fF) --> sink 102.6 105.8
Cable delay —> sink 1.507 E 1.507 F
Siak minimum delay 0.5 0.5
source <— (S1S) Sink 0.4 K 0.4 E
Source <-- cable delay 1.507 l.ts 1.507 ~
Soar= aduiium delay 0.5 Jls 0.5 #s
source (F) --> sink 102.6 105.8
Cable delay --> siuk 1.507 E 1.507 F
.- Repented until n words have been transferred.
Siek mininsom delay 0.5 p.s 0.5
Souscc <-- (S1S) sink 0.4 ps 0.4 F
Source <-- cable delay 1.507 1.507
Toud tieE = 1.907 + n(I07.014) 1.907 + n(l 10.214)
Throughput (300 memm) = 1 were n = tie number of
10E.Itime (3W metersj words Uansfetmd.
!0
67
I
,-––– —-—. _–. –. —____ ___
MIL-&;:,-~C\S H)
1 June 1995
The throughput for various numbers of words tmnsferred ix

Total time Thmughpm Total T- Throughput
words(noWaityJ QE??zY) If2u!Yl Q?sLLEd
32 109.02 ps 293.52 KW}S 11221 p.s 285.18 KWh
64 216.14 w 2%.1 1 KWfS 222.34 w 287.60 KW/S
% 323.25 pa 2%,98 Kw’fS 332.2S w 288.94 KWIS
The crnwefor the Type E interface versus cable length is sborve on figme 66. Tbia curve shows that berst
transfer provides both tie higkest throughput for the interface and lmst dcpendeoce upnn cable Imgrh.
AU applications of the Type E interface may not reqeire the tioughpnt atible using frmMtmnafrx. but any
design drm woufd be concerned wirb tbreughprn abnuld include it as pan of the dcrign considemdon.
40.2 System integrity features. The Typ E interface is conmmed only with Oreelectrical or ptrysimf
chamcmistics of tbe urterface. T?Upmtned signal levels, timing, cables. md co~r me ~L~ wi~
thsse drrcumsmts. What has nnt bsee addressed is system considerations in the ama of error derecrion. 11has
been mmgeizd that the use.of triaskd rable fur pnint-tqreiet application of Ws interface would greetiy
reduce tire error probability dining &te rsrmsmisainn. However, the w of lids intrafea is no: fimited onfy m
point-m-point eonnmdons. Where equiprmm with a single pen is used. some form of digital switching may
be used with this interface to improve tie recontigumtion capbtity of the system. fn addition, if this
imerfacz is nsed es pan of a bus inwcennfxtion SYSUm.sYstem=mvW ~iqu~ ~Y r-e tie
knoyl+ge of the point of eirbcr tire eorsoption or loss. Such infomrethe mnnot bs reheved witfrom lbe
appllcauon of error detection tmbmques to the interface. Systems mrrentl y implemmted with pamflel
interfaces depend npon system software te detect loss of cmnmrruication. The Type E ‘ping-pnng” method
of communication effows hardware within tie intcrfaec.sso detect Inss nf cormmmieation, m perfernr system
notification, end m tildate orderly reconligmanon pmcedums.
40.2.1 Emnr derection. The types of euum lhnt need m be detected are Mae that woufd came system a
problems because of date mmnmination or would psewnt system cmmrnmiearionberwecaselernmts of the
system The-seerrors are omfined in 40.2.1.1 ebrorrgh40.2.1.4.
40.2.1.1 Date errors. The type of noise environment enemrnreredwith this interface is not completely
known at this time. Tbe usc of oiaxird ceble slmefd reduee the iocidemx of iaduced emm’s.,but since each
equipment may have a dfife.sempbysicrd implementation of the interface, errors caused by internal noise or
gromsdmg pmblerm may arise. If the time period of the ioterfermee is only seffieierrt to disropt a single bit
on !Jredala tmnsmission, Lhe nse of parity may be anffkienl for tis detection. If the @ peried of Ore noise
is seffieieat to disrupt more than one bit, thm the demction of other typs of degredadon of the aeried b]t
stream woufd he rrqukxf. llre use of Mnncbe.stermding for dma tmnsmission mqrsirm precise drmcsinn of
tie zem emssing points for date recovery. Melmnoise is of amftlcimt dmatinn or amplitude to generate
additional mm messing points or to mask out Ike eurrect zero crossing, tie sink woufd detect tee rmsnym not
eoough hits in the fF. Wirbmmthis abiIiry of detection, cmrupted data may enter the system
40.2.1.2 Commmrieation loss. FTe.sentequipment using puraflel interface pmtmrrls only biive the
capability of detecting loss of .xmrmnnicetion betwezn system srmefsnters.Loss of conurnmicittion between
other elements of tbe system shaff be handled by software. For equipment with huge nombess of ebarmels,
this software overbrad shall be accmnnmdated withiu the constminfs of system timing. With the defined
protecol of T~ E! tfds system overhead can be remnved from the software end Irausfer’redtn the logic
witiin tie T~e E interface. Three types of mmrrnmication lUSSmu be detected by Ore Type E inwrfece.
40.2.1.2.1 No S1S mnoul frame rcsrrense from sink. The fmt loss woofd be in ebemse whett a some
haseithera CfWOr ads ta word ready for mmsona.uon. Each rime the source has transmitted
a SOS mntml fmme on the chamsel, Lbem bas been no SfS mm-ml frame resfmnse fmm the sink. The
source bas repeated the SOS conmd fmme tmnsti)en on the channel and is continuing m receive notig
from the sink.
——
ML:;:N1;:C:S H)
1 June 1995
40.2.1.2.1.1 Soarce timeout period. T& value of tbc soarcc rirmout period sfrall be specifrcd by tile
irrdividaal application. II ISrmornrre.ndcd that rhe aoarce dmcr timeout perind be similar to that used for
imr.mompmcr timeouts as defied for parallel chaanck. Fc=d EF (CfW COmMMIdS MSY01 IUSYnot bC
tirmd by rbc summ tirmcmt rirmr (refer tn tbe irrdividael equipmcm spscifkation).
40.2.1.2.2 S1S smm’erlframe not readv rc-spume from sink. Tbc second loss would be in tfrecase
Wherethe smrrec rres data wnrd ready for transmission, bui tbe rrsfmrrdiogS1S cmrtml fmme
frvm tbe sink indka; CfWs. This type of faifure codd cccur
wbem tfre Type E imerfacz has been raechaaimd using logic witbia tbe imerfem tn ammo] the :ping-pong”
aeticm. TISOS,if the qoipmmt is nnt fnucdmdag or is StOPPCAtie TYPCE fi~rfwe would mnomre IUPM
consrol _ on tfre ebrmael.
40.2.1.2.3 No SOS cmntrcdtiarm or F fmm source. Tbe third loss wotdd be ia tbc case of sink beirrg
ready en receive..&fax CfW S control frame was received from the smrrcc. the sink
sbonld respond with a S1S W% .” How~v-. t=am Ofeiti w~p=I or mble faif~ ~Cs~ fMS
❑ot -ived an SOS eomml frame. lle implemmration chosen requires Urn{the sbk sbrdl receive an SOS
qrrql tlarrE within 1 MSafter tie +k bas trarrsrnittedirs S1S contro[ frame. This aflows emor dctecrinn
CUCrUUY tititistioJtiti typeoffaifnre.
40.2,1,2.3.1 Sink timmut timer. fmplementig rhe abifity tu matde mid disable sink drrrmut is
recommended for bodr USR end appfhtion flexibility.
40.2.1.3 Fafse sigmds karse of sable reflections. Present parallel data emnmrmicntionbctwem
dsrrkmtsi naaystcraa seuaminxdd rmnrramicanon. Signrds arc transmitrcd in one duection only on a
cable. ‘ftras %ndsbakiag- response sigaafs am required to be traasraitted by ebe rxeiviag device to Ihe
mrrdfngdeviee on a separate cable ia that dirccdoa. If eirber cable is opeorxlbemuse of either
resmn&arraion or bank damage! corrmmaimdon bes bsen cut. but ermrsemrssigaals cannot be prodnccd by
rhe uarrsmirrirrgor receiving devree. Using rhe prurocol defined in STANAG 4153, data mmrmmication is
rmiriirtztional on a cable, ,bashaodshakiag sigmls are traosmirtcd in bcdr directions on the single cable. If
the ecdrfeis pmpcriy tmmamed at bob ends, there is no problem of errcos caascd by reflected signals. But in
the me wbera tbe cable bas bem opeaed lhxouse of eitbrx system rearfigmation or battle damage, rfreSOS
IXJOOU1 fmrm trmtsmissioa by the smrree would be reflmrcd from sbe open cable. Since bmb dre SOS coarrnl
harm aod the S1S consrol frarsE am a four-bit eodc, an SOS mmrol fmrm sent with bits set for bntb CfW arrd
data words available wmrfdbe mffmted es an S1S mntml frarm wirlrbits signifying tfratthe sink is ready for
either CfW or data words. The snurm, baviag remivcd this fafse S1Smnool fmrrc, wordd tberr o-arrsmitan fF.
Oepcnding upnn she lmgtfr of she fF aad tbe Incarion of tbe dkmndauity. it wo~d bS possible fOr~ ~ m
be reflected by mtd rezximd by the some as en additionrd S1S cormol ihrue response fmm tbe sink. This
can be seen from the foUowingexample
‘he sorrrrx is eormccted tn a sink over a 300-rWer cable. A break io tfrecable necrrrsal tfre connection
sotbesiak. Tlresoorce tmasmits aaSOSmrrtml framc&wrrtbecable. Iftbc SOS
matrol frame traasmissiorr is at maximam amplirade aad ebecnble losses do not atsertaatethis
amplitude bslow the minirrrnmrqaired for detection, then the SOS mnrrol franx. would be reffeetcd
from tbe open end of the cable nod received by LIEsoome as en S1S mntrrrl frame at 3.01 PS after
transmission. The smure.edom not rmpond or aigmls U@ 500 ns after !mmaission. Since this false
S1S mnuol frarm wordd mmc after this time, the sonrce wordd recognize tbe S1S mnrrol from and
wordd rmprmd tn iL ff sbe fake S1S mntrol frame indkmed that rJresink was ready for dara, the some
would rraasrrriIan IF. This fF woufd also be reflecrcd from the open cable. Tbe drrrracteristics of this
reflected wavefomr wordd depmd upmr the size of tbe IF afong wirlrdistordons cased by irmxecdon
belwem the oaasmitkzf arrdrefleusd waveforms. After transmission of tbe SOS marred frame, the
smrrce wordd begin Ionkirrgfor au S1S mrruol frmm rmpnnsc. ff the bits rcffecud horn h IF muld
be remgnkmd by tie smrrm as an S1S corrrrnlframa rmpnnsc, it could assume rbat tfrefF has bcerr
received by tfre sink. Tfds wntid be an crroneurrsdata mmmanication. If rfrr.reflected bits arc distnrred
to the point wbcre tbe snurce mnrm determine tit it is an S1S mntrd fmrnc. it is important UaMdre
source rcmgaizc that there is a problem on tbe interface aad data co-ications are not proceeding
properly.
69
MU-~.-~Nl:#C#SH)
1 June 1995
40.2.1.4 Nemf cnndirions. Tbc abifity tn implement forced cmnmands requires that h sink be able
te determine that the received fF fa in acardancz with its defrred opemdng state. If the sink was rdfnwed to
accept forced CfWs witbin the fF, themrbe arsivaf of snch an fF wfrm dre last S1S conwl fmms seat from sbe
sink indicated Oratb sink was net searfyfor CfWs vreufd be @ttcd. Howevcz,if such an ewmt occumed
with the asriwd of a data wad within rbe IF, rids woufd be indication of a prnbkrn within tie cbaneel. A set
of emm pnsddlida cmrfd exist. ‘flE seam may have rnaffnmtioned, the snrmx may not have inteqrscted
tbe last rszeived SfS cfmtd fmsm cmrcctly, nr tbe sink may not have semgnimd rbe mrrcct Wf bitof the
seccivaf fF. Whateva the muse of h?. problem, there woufd be a chanrx for incorsea system epesation
unless the system detects and cmreus fes rfrisfaifnre mrrdkion.
50 Df?fAfLEfl @LfIREMENTS.
50.1 COnftmnasreeteats.
50.1.1 Retmm loss mnfesnrance test Conformance wirb rbc Type E imcsfam impcdrnrcereturn less
profife of figure ’34is dermrrmated by #o-g tie following tcsL The rest attalf be psrforrrrd en every
Type E intert%x serum and sink intufaec in the equipment under tSSL
a. Cnnnect a 50 obm signaf divider nehvodc (HP 35676A Reflec!iosKfsansmission’Test Kit er
eqnivrdrnt) or au S-Prmmwta Test Set (HP 35677A m afuivafm!) te tie orrtpu~ SefUWKZ.
rmd rnpm pwt.s of a network analyzer (IW 3577A/B or equivalent).
b. Caffgum tbe network mralyscr for a log frequency sweep fmm 1 MNz LOlfXl MHz, a SWLZP
dsne of 2 seconds, a bandwidrb of 1 KHz, and a signaf ampfimde nf * 200 mV opar-circuit or
*100mVr *(M ohms) at th output of tbe signaf dividef or S-PasameOXTest SeL
llre display sbnnfd be mnfigured for fin- magnitude at a scafe of 5 dB per vadeal divisien.
c. Connect a abort (sppmximately 5 feet or 1.5 smress) 50 obm enasiaf test cable to tbe 00SPUI
post of the s@raf divida netwerk or Pert 1 of the S-Pamnwes Test .% rising an N-wBNC
adapta mmuxtoI. Attach a BNC-to-triasial adaptm connector to tie frwend of rfreeabfe.
d. WItfrthe eoaxiaf test cabfe and sO adaptm mnnectom in pface, perform a nne-pmt raflecdnn
~oo in acmtdaece with tbe instmcdons pruvidcd with the apecifk netwerk analyzer e
bofng med. This wifl rypiealfy involve cdibmtion witfrthe test ealde open-circnired and then
terminated vviti a psecision 50 obm load.
e. Conooet rbe &s end of the teat cable to tbc interface comectnr of OreTyps E device rmdes sesL
Cfbsuve Ore semdting retmn loss prufiie dispfayed by the network anefyzer and mnrpme with
the aecepsable mmm loss pmffle of figure 34. Perform this step with tbe devim powa on and
off.
A fd &raminad on on she aceeptatdity of Type E interface equipment impedance sbafl be acbiev-edby
evaluating Osesetmn lnss rest resufts tegctlrer witlt thnsc obmined frem the seffection tc.st,refer m 50. I .2.
Coofmuunce with Oscreorm loss qxcification from 1 MHs to 60 MHz is mancbmssy. Rearm 10SSvrdnw in
LMSmnge that eseecd tfrnse spedied in figure 34 indicate pntmtial prublcma in rbe equipment design wlricb
ahafl be muected by Ureeqsripnrentvendor. Tbe reflection test in 5.4.S.2.5 ahafl be tbe finaf ~ of
acceptable performance.
50.1.2 Reflection conformanm rcsL W!tb tie tmnsmitter not tmnsmitdeg and with DC pewcs en or off,
a 4 bit irrpm Manchsatrx II wwkrrsn (conforming se a 1101 bit pancrn) at a cleck sate of 10 MHz and
repetition rare of 100 KHz, with a peak amplitude of 750 mV and risdfalf time of 6.5 te 7.0 ns (10 to 90%)
sbaff be applied to rhe interface cmmectnr tfrmugb a 36 meter lengtfr of MIL-C-17/135 (TFR-8) 50 obm
cable. lle anrpfiosdeof the seffected voltage, measured 200 ns after rbe fast vafid mansition of tfrelast biL
shafl not exceed * 250 mV. (W. frgnm 67)
70
MUfl;~-S~C$SH)
1 June 1995
50.1.3 Composite sysum channel noise te.w. Con fomsaace to the composite systcm channel noise
requirement k demonstmud by pesfomsing h e fouowing test
a. Connect tie source msd tie sink imerfaces tngesha (end-armmd) thmugb a 60 nschr Iengtb of
MfL-C-17/135 fTFR-8) 50 ohm cable.
b. Comml frams ~ kc excfsangedbcswcm the sowcc and OIesink.
c. The reffecttd voltage alsaflbe smasuruf as the ssaaamioissgmnnectnr iatesface.
d. The fouowing Oansmiued Control franm Sbau be testd
(1) Sourm cao’d fsmm of 1000 end 1010, end
(2) Sink COllOUl &amcs of 1011 and 1001.
The amplitude of the compasite noise, existing some then 400 ns aftcz sbe zero voltage cmssissg in tie
middle of tbe las bit. shall nnt exceed 200 mV peak-so-peak(see tigssm68). Tlds Et limit is iatmtionally SCI
below tie maximum possible composite noise.of 2.54 mV peak-to-peak fos a 60 meter cab[e to scscca out
quipmcsst which exhibits marginal performance with respect so umm tbassone efecukcalparameter.
72
MIL-;-3&7c$H)
1 June 1995
Type K COMMAND SET

10. SCOPE
10.1 SCO e. TbiS appCOdiX pmVi&S tic. Type K command W r!xItietrwNs. some Ofthe CUmrOarIdS
h“. been ad. l%= ndifimtit)m idti. cban@I~ a SCSI-II mmrnrondflDmIJptiIJlld 10
nrarrdatnry or, imposing remicrion(s) on particrdar cmnrnand(s). New cnrmnands for rroique security and
dam imegrity, wbicb am not found in UICSCSI-IL sbrdl be optional. This nppmdis fnrrm a mandatnry par-Iof
rfris standard.
Guidance for sekcdng optional cnmmonds is also given. Optionaf commands are grouped mm the foUowing
functional arms Data fntcffritfi Ba&oP and &’CkdVwkr’fO_=, .!ktrrit)7 and hdaintmimm. An
explanation of rhs individual functional arms is givm along wilfreach optinmd rnnnmnd within tbe
fmrctiomd area
20. REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

Not applicable.
30. DEFIJWHONS
30.1 Acronyms. Acronym used exclusively in dris appmdk are defied as fnllow~
Additinnaf Sense Cods
i$: ~r$rmtion Cnde
DFLT
DLIST Data defect List
DPM Data Protect Made
GLIST G~mS~ot List
HSEC
LUN Lonical Unit Number
RMB Removable ‘Mtinrn

SSEC Soft Sector
SURF surface
TD Table Data
TL Table Length
TOC TabIe of Cnntcnts
40. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
40.1 Type K command seL Ths foffowing sections idmt@ all mandatory cnrooumds for a Type K
device. Sornc mandatmy Type X cormtrands originate frnm optional mmrnands in SCSI-U. fhornands
spcciticd shalf adbem tn tbe restictinns identified herein. Urdms otfrmwiscspecified, items defined in SCSI-U
as being nptional shall reti optional. UnIcss otherwise spedkd, W msndatnry SCSI-U items slrafl remain
mandatory. All OptiOnaJcnmrnands within UMSCSI-U me included foflowing tbe mandatory mmrrrands.
40.1.1 Direct-access&vices. Conroxmds idmdticd io 40.1.1.1 shaff be irnplcurnted m defrrcd
Included in dre list am cbanges rn mmmaods wfricbaxe rnsndatnry in SCSI-U whiciI have additional
restrictions on tbe implcrnmtatinn of tbc mmrnand within this standard.
40.1.1.1 MartdatnrYcommands for direct-access devices.
40.1 .1.1.1 Format Unit (04hj. This command shall be mandatory, refer m 8.2.1 nf SCSI-IL
73
Mff.-~;;.-3&7c~sH)
I June 1995
40.1.1 .1.1.1 Command restrictions.Tbe foUowing Format Unit Defect Descriptor forma[ end
requiremen~ tile XVff ~ ~P~ ~b~ 112 in SCSI-U. Table XVfH replneee table 163 in SCSI-U
TABLE XVIf. Forrest Unit Defect DmriPIor formal and requirements.
Defect Cornnrsnd Type

I NNinal =g~
Conmhms I
o 0 000b WA Mandatory Tnrget-defmed use of defect some

BLOCK
lznn
. MAT.
“’u.- . .
I
1 0 OOOb Zero Msnrfatory 1/ 3/ ~1
1 1 000b Zero Man&tory if ii ~1
1 0 OOOb >0 Optionaf ‘2~31
1 1 000b * optimal 5;}
--
BYTES
FROM
INDEX
FORMAT
1 0 100b zero MsndarorY 1/ 3151
---
1 1 100b Z.crn Mandatory 1/ 4} ~1
1 0 100b >0 optional -Z-31
1 1 100b d Optional G
-- ;/
PHYSICAL
SECTOR
FOXMAT:
1 0 10lb zero Mnndatory 1/ 31
1 1 10lb Zero Mandatory ii iI
1 0 10lb M Optiontd ; it
1 1 10lb * optional 5
-- ;1
1 0 110b Vendor-
Specific
1 1 llOb Vendor-
sp+c’ific
J./ Nn Dfist is oansfemed to tbe iargrx during tie DATA OUT pbnse.
2/ A DUst is transferred SDtbe target during tbe DATA OUT phase. Add tie Dlist defects to tie new GIist
3/ Use tbe existing Glist as a defecr source. Add existing Glist defects to the new GtisL.
9 Discard tbe existing GfisL Do not add miming GlisI defects to tie new GlisL
~ Type K definirinns not defined as mandarnry in SCSI-IL
74
0’
Mff..y:s3:;c&sH)
1 June 1995
●
TABLE XVIU. Forrmll Device Pam
M DPM (Draa Protect Mode) Type K defbsirion noi defined in SCSI-II.

40.1.1.1.2 fnquiry (12b~. TMs command sbafl be srrandaIow,M= to 7.2.5 of SCSI-IL
40.1.1.1.3 Mnde Select(6) (15h), l%is co-d sbafl be msndatnsy, refez 107.2.8 of SCSI-IL
40.1 .1.1.3.1 Cosssmmd sestricdons. fmplesnemnrs of the data pmteuion schssm option, &fined in
40.4.1, shall provide a somvam.than gmbfe OJIIUOIbit (Byse 20, Bit O)in lbe FWmat Devkx PWCtitkd ‘D*
protect Mode (DPM)”. This bit, wbea enabled, shall be trsed to signal the devicz to brdld and msintnin a
s’ead.hwkleek tnblc to snppofi tic 40.1.1.2.25 Sei Locks aad 40.1.1.2.15 Read Lock Table memnands. This
bit requirm the device to reject normal readkite mnmsnds end onfy rdfow40.1.1.2.17 Read WMILocks and
40.1.1.2.33 Write WIOILinks commands to tmnsfer data tnhlom the media.
40.1.1.1.4 Mode Sense(6) (lAh). Ilk command sbsff be mandatory, refer to 7.2.10 of SCSI-II.
75
MfL$:lN~;7C~S H)
1 June 1995
40.1.1.1.4.1 Command remissions. Implementors of the Type K data prowction scherm option shafl
provide the eurrcut asaing of the “Data Pmtmt Mude (DPM)” cmtrol bit iu be Format Device Page.
40.1.1.1.5 Rr.ad(6) (08h~. This cmnmand shall be mandatury, refer to 8.2.5 of SCSI-U.
40.1.1.1.6 Read(IO) (28b}. This wnunaud sbafl be mandatory, refer tu 6.2.6 of SCS1-fl.
40,1.1.1.7 Rmd Cloracih’ (25h]. This command shelf bs mandatory, mfsr m 8.2.7 of SCSI-II,
40.1.1.1.8 Rweive Diem OStiCRcauf!a( lcb~. This smmmud &d] be msndakxy.
Refer tu 7.2.13 o~.
40.1.1.1.9 Release.(17b) . Tlds emmmaadshnff be maodatory, refsr m 8.2.11 of SCSI-H.
40,1.1.1.10 Request Sense (03h). This command shafl bs mamimmy, refer m 7.2.14 of SCSI-If.
40.1.1 .1.10.1 Cmmrnsnd rmoictfuns. Implementors of the data pmteztiun ssheme option, defined iu
40.4.1, shall provide amss data hsdimdng elmrs in this area as follows
a. Errms detected during the preasiag of tbc 40.1.1.2.17 Read With Imcks or 40.1.1.2.33 Write
With Lacks en-da because of violations of the dam protection scheme.shall:
(1) Cause a CHECK CONDfTfON status,
(2) Rem-a a scam key of 07h (DATA PROTECT) to be remmed h the REQUEST SENSE
(3) ~ti~~~tiousf sense mde (ASC) of BBh (PROTECTION V1OLATION).
b. ova~ping dsfiedtinns, detected during the pmsessing of the 40.1.1.2.25 Set f-ocka cummaud,
wicluu fock table pardduus end tie pardtions losk is cbauging from a valid non-mu Iusk cude
tomaushall
● ✌
(1) Cause a CHECK CONDffTON status,
(2) RC&~:ISS key of 07b (DATA PROTECT) to be retumaf ia ~ REQ~’f SENSE
(3) Retrtm au additimwdsmsc mtfe (ASC) of BCfr (LOCK TABLE REDEHNED).
40.1.1.1.11 Itcserve (16h~. This wmmaud sbaff be maudatmy, refer to 8.2.12 of SCSI-fI.
40.1.1.1.12 Rczem Unit (Olh}. This mmmand shafl be mandatmy, refer to 8.2.13 of SCSI-IL
40.1.1.1.13 Ssud Diagnostic (lDh~. This cm-d duff be mandmmy, rsfcr m 7.2.15 of SCSI-II.
40.1 .!. 1.13.1 Commaud restrictions. Diagnostic pagea and page structures staff be device specific.
En& dctice subjec~ ta diegoostica Sbaff‘kuplemr.uta page detiniug the tests ta bs run aud a page format
delineadug huw the test rcsufta wiff be displayed.
The SEND DfAGNOSfTC cmmnaad with a page fmmat (PF) bit of one instructs the target m execute mu or
mm’ed~usdc pages end that the data returned abaff use the d~ostic page format dcsaibed by SCS1-fl
fur the applicable device. Each diagnostic page sbaO defiae a fuaction or opsraaun that the target psrforrns
dariag tbs teat exccutiun. A PP hit of zem shall iudicate tbm ths SEND DfAGNOSTfC pammetas are as
speeitlcd in the SCSI-I stamfard.
40.1.1.1.14 Test Unit WV (OOh~.This mmmand shall & man&tory, refer tn 7.2.16 of SCSI-D.
40.1.1.1.15 Write(6) (OAfQ. Thii cmumsud shafl be maudato~, refer m 8.2.20 of SCSI-II,
I
●’
76
Mffyl&&3gcgH)
1 June 1995
40.1.1.1.16 Wriw(lO) (2Ah~. Thk cemmand Uraff be =wsY, r~~ W 8.2.21 OfSCS1-ll,
40.1.1.2 grtional Commands for Dimct-Acmss Ik’ices.
40.1.12.1 Cbantze Definition (40h). This command sbsO be optinoal, refer tn 7.2.1 of SCSI-U.
40.1.1.2.2 Cor141ase(391Q. This command sb.Wbe oPtiwaf. rck W 7.2.2 OfSaJ-ff.
40.1.1.22.1 Cmnroand smoictions. The Pammemr Ust Lcrsgdsof this mmrnmd sbafl be 14h. Tire
~Y&~aiW b supposmd for ~ command ahaff be code 02h (Block Devkx to Block Device). ‘fix.re
mmiromo of one Segormt Dmcriptos.
40.1.123 @Y (18h~. llds co~d M ~ oPtio@ mf~ ~ 7.2.3 of S~I-n.
40.1.1.2.3.1 Cmmmnd 5WUiti0nS. The Par’mm& List Laq3tfrof this carrrnmd shall be 14k W%’
aed’Link’ bitsshaLf%csoppmW The my &tiers ~ SWfrOSUdfor this wrnossnd W be cock.
02b (Block Device to Block Devi~) ~ha~ of one Segrmnt Descriptor.
40.1.1.2.4 CQPY astd Verify (3Ab). ~ cO~d w b OPtiOmf,

mf= m 7.2.4 Of s~l-ff.
40.1.1.2.4.1 Corsrsnandrwsricticms. The Parameter LisI Length of this mrrmrmd sh-sllbe 14h. ‘fhe
copy Pmrctino Cnde Suppmred for Ibl.scommand shalf be cwfe 021rf.Bled Device m Blnck Devica). Tbcre
sbaffbearnmimum of one Segrrrnt Dmcr-ipmr.
TABLE X2X- Data Destmct wmrmnd
BIT
BYTZ 7 I 6I 5 I 4 I 3 I 2 I 1 I o
0 Operadon Code Fos Data DcsOuctCQSmWOd(fXM
1 lagimf Unit Nmn I DFLT I ffwaved
2 (MSB) I PararWta List Lcogtb
3 Pal-rumta List Length I (LSB)
4 Appfiadde LUN
5
●
The Dan Dmouct wrrrmand pcsfossm data erasure en the ordirrm. ff this mmo.amd msnplems sucwssfufly
(no check condition), tk disk mbsystem wifl have pfnrnd tbe momraod witfsoutemor. ff ao error
rendition is demct.ed*e titig m the ~- ~ G* ~~~ sw w reff~ @ a “M~tiPle
Medium End has bcw demcaedand the Request Scese amrrosnd shalf pr’evidespecitlc asor information.
Tk Data Dmtruct Command sfralfovcsride aoy resavadons camentfyestablisbwl by the didr subsystem for
the noit(s) spedicd (this wmrmrtd x ~ sdease). Many of &s LUNS me resesved by anotbcr hnst
adapms, tbeamsmarsdshafl
beabormdtitba—~ “nnConffict marrrs. fn this mm, the ‘RmrxwXion
Gmt7ict” atatos fmpfira “Check Condition”. Befose tfw disk snbsymeminitiatm the ‘Data Dmtmct” no the
LUN~, the LUNSare rmavuf m the irddamr. Upon them ledon of b‘~ Desomct”~ ~ons tit
wercmeffect prior mIhe’DamfkWuct” aieeffeu kl’GSUy LfJNstit_~fi5d by rlre
“DarnDearmctgthat were not previously reserved shalf be resewed m the iobiatm ismirsg the “Data Dmmct”.
The “Data Dwtmet” mmmand causes dre selecrcd LUNS m tmnsitinn with “Unit Attention” sums.
77
MLL-;;:&3;7c~sH)
●
1 June 1995
Tbe number of available L(JNs is cnnfigumtion specific. The LUN field is nrdy applicable tn commands that
do not have default bit (DFLT) am in tbc command. If the defauh bit (D~T) is at%tie LUN field is isnO~d
end all LUNS selected by a one in the bIt signbicam Applicnble LUN field shall be targeted for the Data
DeatmcL Atr Applicable LUN byte of 55h shall select onits O,2,4, and 6 for the Data fkstrucL
If the psmrmter Liit fxogtfr is zero, the default data patt.mm m. Ooooh. ~. md 414lb ~e ~~ w
every date block on the sefccud LUNSdrrriug successive pass=. If the fieId is nnn-mm. it ~ ~ m e~n
value and sbafl - the mrrnberof bytca in the data patteros brchrdedin the Data Prdt.emparmmter (see
table D-2). l%r example, the dcfrndt patterns cnuld also be spccifkd by setting the ~ LiSt Lurgth to 8
eud specifying tbCdWtpSttCrUSof - 0000h, -, end 4141h in W. pammXer. The 16 bitdrrta
pattern shrdl be replicated throughout the data bldra vmtten to the unit. The maximum pammeter list length
shaff be 2S6 (128 prrttems).
TABLE XX. Data Destruct Patterns.
BfT
BYTE 7 I 6 I 5 I 4 I 3 I 2 i 1, i o
0 (MSB) Data pattern
1 Data Pattern I (LSB)
n-2 I (MSB) I Data Pattern

n-1 Data pattern I (LSB)
40.1.1.2.6 Lock-UnInck Cache (36bj. Tlris command shafl be optional, refer to 8.2.2 of SCS1-fL a
40.1.1.2.7 Log Select (4Cb~. This ccoumandsbafl be optionrd, refw to 7.2.6 of SCSI-fl.
40.1.12.8 Log Sense (4Db). This command sbrdl be optionaf, refer to 7.2.7 of SCSI-fL
40.1.1-’2.9 Mnde Select(lO) (55b). Tlds mmrnaod shalf be optiord ref= tn 7.2.9 of SCSI-IL
40.1.1.2.9.1 Cnmrnand restr’hions. ff implemcnwd this co-d shall have the same resrnctions as
Mode Select (15b) es
~.L3.
40.1.1.2.10 Mode Sense(IO) (5Ah). This m-d sfraflbe optional, refer tn 7.2.11 of SCSI-fL
40.1 .1.2.10.1 Co-d resuic~:l .$. irrrplernentcdthis m-d shall have the same restrictions as
Mode Srmse (lAh) as called out In ulf-
40.1.1.2.1 I Pre-f%tch (34b~. This command shrdf be optional, refer to 8.2.3 of SCSI-U.
40.1.1.2.12 Pmvent-AOowMedhrm Remnval ( lEh~. This mrnmand skrrdlbe optional.
Refer to 8.2.4 of S~I-If.
40.1.1.2.13 Rmd Buffer (3Ch). This command shrdl bc optional, refer m 7.2.12 of SCSI-fL
40.1.1.2.13.1 Cmnrrrand reehictions. Tire Read Bnffer Modes ‘DATA’(OIOb)and ‘DESCIUITDR
(01 lb) sfrnflbe supported m full.
78
Mff.,-,-g-3;7c~sH)
1 June
●
1995
40.1.1.2.14 Read Defect Data (37h]. This cnunnand shall be optional, refer m 8.2.8 of SCSI-fI.
40.1.1.2.14.1 Command rmsi T’~T~ct LisI Fnrnmt tleld.shall be defined as indic.wedby
table XVII aa found under k PO
40.1.1.2.15 Read tik Table .~~ cnmmand shall be optional. Tbi.v commmd which k not
found in SC.SI-fl &all be dchncd WIT
TABLE XXI. Rmd Lock Table command.
BfT
,
BY175 7 I 6 I 5 I 4 I 3 I 2 1 1 I o
0 -On Code (06h)
1 Logical Unit Num I 1-
2 17mmved
3 Remm’ed
4 Reserved
5 CcmwolField
Tbe Rmd Lod Table cnmmand(mbfe~ahaU reqnmttbetarget tnrmumtbe Rmd Lock Table
information idmdfiuf by tbc ~ mntml bit as aped%d in mble XXfI.
● TABLE XXIf. Read Lock Table ‘lVfTt conmnl bit dcfmition.
m DEFMT30N
o ~ewgti-~mo b~of~titkti =titikb~m)of~mtiti
in the Read/Write Lock Table. ‘k VWIue tetnmed ahaffeqoaf one what (he reqomt for table Iemgtb
is issued after fornmtting, with the “Data PmawstMnde (DPw blt set in tie Mode Sefcct%rmat
Device Page, aod 00 Set Lmckscnmmaeda have bme nxeived by the targeL ‘k%e format of the
data reeumed during ebe quest for lock mble Iengb (TL) shall be defined in table ~.
1 Theeargetahall mmremobytm oftabfedata~) fmeverymblefmmmmtidi-rnme
reqoeat-for table length mspenm dam. This impfics that tk mcgetaixd.1remro eighty bytes of table
II dam when eke tafde Im.gb menmed qoaks eigbL Tbe format of tfm dam mmmed dwing the
xf~l~~~~~)-~~fiti~ mb~~. I
TABLE XXffL Read Lock Table Lenmb fOmEtL

f
t BIT
r BYTE 7 1 6 1 5 I 4 I 3 I 2 I 1 I o
I o
1
[
I
(hfSB) I Talde L-m@
Table Lcngtb I (LSB)
79
MIL-;:&3&7c~sH)
1 June 1995
TABLE XXIV. Read Lo& Table dara format.
1 BYTE I 7
.. .. . . I 6 I 5 I 4 I -. 3 I
Arr.w
—.. -
2 I 1 1 0
I
Iress
Iress
lock Addsess I fJ-SB)
!bc.kAddress
KaJ mock A6dKss
6 Endiog LOgiCSlBlock AddlWX
7 Ending Logical Block Ad&eSS I (LSB)
8 Read Lock
9 write IXlck
.. . . . --- ---- -.
(MSI$) SIarling Logicaf Block Adddress
.-. ,.. .”7. S6rting Logical Blink Addbll$s
rL-l)xlo+2 Mert@ Logicef Block Addlmss
. .-
-, Starting Logical B1Iod Address 1 (LSB)
I
(MB)
●
.— —,... 1 Ending Logical Block ALIdress
ILl)xlo+s Ending Logical Block IkfdiWS
W1)X1O+6 &iding Logical Block AddrCSS
–>1)X1O+7 Eoding Logi..l nl~~ .A~J+-cc
..— -.— — -. I \-w”)
/l .sn\
. ----- #
Read Lack
I
WriseLack
1
40.1.1.2.16 ~. This canrnand shalf be optional, refer to 8.2.9 of SCiSI-11.
. .
40.1.1 .2..16.1 0- The host shall be cnpahle of suppressing ECC co~”on by
setdng ‘CORRECT hit to urn.
01
80
ML~&D&3&7c~sH)
1 June 1995
40.1.1.2.17 ~ This wmrnond sbafl & optional. This command which is not
found in SCSI-fl shall be defined in rabIe ~V.
TABLE XXV. ~
i ram
-.. 1
J
? 2 1 o
BYTE 7 I 6 I s I 4 I 3 I I I
0 C)peradnnCode (BBh)
1 hgicaf Unit Nom 1
2 (MSB) I Logical Bled Address
3 Logiad Blo& Address
4 Lo@a.1 Blnck Addt_SSS
5 L.@caf Block M&es I (LSB)
6
7 (MSB) I Transfa Lcmgtb
8 Transfer L.engtb I (L-SB)
9 Rrad Kcy
10
11 Control Field
k
TIE Read With Lacks cmrmrrnd (rablc XXV)
madkeymstcbes breadlncfc, witbintbe &::EYE3.Y;.%:E%:z?:;: “
@MX:fmtid# kGYand d lock tbc nmst recent data valoe when m &s addmsul logical blnck(s)
Tbc Iogicaf lock address fieId spedies the Ingical blnrk at which * read opnadon sbafl begin.
Tbe oansfer length field shall specify tie noorber of cunrigoons logical blccks of dsta to be oansferred. A
OanSferIengtftof zero indicotes that 65536 10@d blocks shall bs transferred. Ally Otk VtdUe Sbilfl indicate
tbe number of Ingical blndc.vrn be mmsferrrd.
‘Exread key fiddshaffspedfytbekeycde to bcappkdtorbsco

contained iotbe Rind/Writs LorJt Table. Wbmtbcmadlcckisrmu w~”’’’md,~
orafflogical blocks inrbemngeof
IogicaJ blorks mqoested, no mmpam sbaff lx reqdrcd snd tM value of Ods fiefd sbalf not & interpreted.
CMmmme,thsm.sd key field vsfucsbo.ll cquafther’ead ldfmti-mti~mvdmdtier~esti
data transferred to the inidatnr.
40.1.1.2.18 Reassign Blncks (&’b]. This command shall be optinmd, refer to 8.2.10 of SCS1-ff.
40.1.1.2.19 search
Data
EuuSf
(31b\. This coaonsnd sbslf be O@ODd refer to 8.2.14.1 of SCSI-II.
40.1.1.220 Seam.b Dsts High f30h). This command sfmlfbe OPtinnal,refer to 8.2.14.2 of SCSI-fI.
40.1.1.2.21 Scsreb flus EQunf(321Q. This command shaff tc O@td, refer 108.2.14.3 of S~I-11.
40.1.1.2.22 Seek(6) (OBb). This cnounsnd sbafl be nptional, refa to 8.2.15 of SCSI-U.
40,1.1.2.23 Seek(IO) (2Bh~. ‘flds co-d shall be optionaf, refer to 8.2.1S of SCSI-II.
40.1.1.2.24 Se-tLtits (33h). This mmrnand stmfl be optional, refer to 8.2.16 of SCSI-IL
,.
81
o
40.1.1.2.25 Set Lncka BDh . This co-d shall be optional. 71siscommand which is nm found in
scsI-fIabau bede~.
TABLE XXVI. Set Locks command.
BYTE 7 I 6 I 5 I 4 I 3 I 2 1 1 I o
0 Opsrmion Cnde (BDh)
1 bgicd Unit Nmn I
2 (MSB) I Logical Block Address
3 Logical Block Address
4 Lagicai Block Address
5 Logical Blnck Address I (f-SE)
6 Rmerved
7 (MSB) I Number nf Blnclcs
8 Nnmbcr of Blocks I (LSB)
9 Read bck
10 write Luck
11 Conhcd Field
Tbe Set frocks cnmmaod (tabIe XXVI) ahaOprovide the hsformatinn tn bnild the device s’mtiwrite leek table
nsed to peuvida data prmcce.innof the device dia.
implcemnt tbe &ad With W
Targets implementing the Set Locks mmmand abalf afso
mmmand, Write With Leek.senmmand, Rmd Lock Table mmmand. and ti
●
‘mm ~tSU MW (Dp~ tdt option within the Mnde Select-F-t Device Page.
At tbc mmpletion of drive formatting, with he “Data Protect Mnde mPIvf)” bit set in the Fmnal Deviec Page,
a lock table establishing all deviec logical bloeka as being not pmrmtcd (all mad and write Iwks are set tn
-)MkwL ffIhc R@ Leek Table m~dis aenttoa mrgetat ttdsdmc, tbetarge!abalf rctnmwm
(10) bylcs of data as defined u tbe Read Lnck Table command description.
For each Set lacks mmmand received tbe twget shall efcats a lock table partition of tm (10) byws reflecting
Orepammelm within the cnmmsad. Upnn receipt of be Set Lacks czamnand, the uwgetshall intemngate alf
previona lock table pareitinns fnr ovdepping definitions and return a Target Check mnditinn with miens
“Lock Table Rcds6ned” indicating an when detected. Changing the leek of a pardtions fmm mm tn a valid
non-scro lock code shall not eaose a “Lock Table Xedefmed” titExIupL However, changing tbe lock of a
panition fmm a previously detkmd non-mm value tn scro ahalf cause tie Lack Table Redefined bIt5TUPL
A device aball be capable of suppnrdng a lnck table with a minimnm nf 1024 partitions.
The logical block address field sbao contain the starting logical block of he lock table partition.
The nnmber of blncka field abalJ mnrain the range of Ingimk blncks, beginning fmm the starting logical
blnck that the read and write Inck codes applies. A numbsr of bhek.v value of zem sbalI indicate a range.of
65536 logical blncka.
The read leek field aball contain tie read lock for the pardrinn of Iogied blocks &fmcd within she command.
The read Ioek abafl be defied in table XXVfI.
Tbe write lock field sbzdlcnmain the wriw In& for tie partition of logicaJ Incks defined wirbin the command.
Tbe write lock sbafl bc defined in table XXVII.
82
r——–-..–-–.
I Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com on 2009-07-25T15:19:13.
ML;::sT3&7c;sH)
1 June 1995
Tbe Set larks mrnrrrand fer a band of protscted logical blocks shall be rejmtr.d when any c.xisdeg tile led
within the band ia set m 255. fn this cese the device shalf m mmeeicars a ‘check Condition” sfiuus and sense
data imfiadng a “Protection Violation” uror.
A write leek of 255 sbalf mdy be rr.snevedby execudeg the Format corrrroaedwith the “Date Pretect Mede
(DPM)” bit set in tbc Mode Select-Format Device Pnge, or, by e.xrxxrdngthe.Dato Dssouct consreand.
TABLE XXVn. tidfwriu Lock d tiUdtiOnS.
Read or Write Lock Read With Lacks command Rcceiwd Write Wirb _ Caromed Received
Zero No bxlt/kcy compare performed. No locklkey cenrpare performed.
Reading purrrittcd. Wridog pundtred.
001-234 LockAey compare rqsired before fAckntey compare rcqnired before
rcadiog permitted. VAisiogpmrlittcd.
255 =mcalli required befere write corrmxmdsejctrsd.
40.1.1.2.26 Srert SteDUnit (lBh). This cnmmatrd sbafl be optional, refer te 8.2.17 of SCSI-U.
40.1.1.2.27 Snxhronizc cads (3SI$ his cmmnand shall be optiooal, refer te 8.2.18 of SCSI-IL
40.1.1.2.28 Vu’@ (2FtQ. This mmmraed shall be optienaf, ref~ to 8.2.19 of SCSI-II.
40.1.1.2.28.1 C.nmrrsaodrestrictions. The ‘Byi2hlc’bk shall be aupperred in tiff for betb the values of
rzreeed enc. lh7&UUlr’Ld tshalf ht. SUPpORUfin fd for both the valoes of rem and one. ‘FL@aed Kmlf
Sbsdfbe arrpporrrdirsfrdl.
40.1.1.2.29 Write end V- @h). This cmmnartd sbalf be optional, rtfer to 82.22 of SCSI-IL
40.1.1.2.29.1 Coorrrraodrestrictions. The ~yKh!d bit abalf he soppertcd in fell for both the values of
r.cmandeoe. Tk_bs “tahau ksuppotimtiforktbtiti- of~aedone. ‘Flag’and’Link’
shall bs supported in fun.
40.1.1.2.30 Write Buffer (3Bh~. This urrnmaed shall be optional, refer to 7.2.17 of SCSI-II.
40.1.1.2.30.1 Cmrmrand restrictions. Write beffer mode ‘WRITEDATA’(OIOb)shall be supported as
spcciticd in SCSI-IL ~ r.lrallbe optional no a per epplicadon basia. The downlead tie
sbalf efso suppxl a dewefoad end save option which nray after dcvia mdia or other rronveladle mcrmry.
40.1.1.2.31 Write Lorw (3FQ. This command shall be OjXiOOd,refer to 8.2.23 of SCSI-IL
40.1.1.2.32 Write.Sam (3Sh]. llds mrmrsand shall be eptionrd, refsr m 8.2.24 of SCSI-IL
‘o
83
MU.A3TD-1397C(SH)
APPENDIX D
1 June 1995
40.1.1.2.33 Wr’ie With Locks (I3C cmnmarrd sfraflbe optionaf. This cmnmand which is not
found in SCSI-U Stil be defrmd us table
TABLE KKWII. Write with Lacks enmesand.
Bff
BiTE 7 I 6 1 5 I 4 I 3 I 2 I 1 I o
0 f3pemtion Code (BCh)
1 Logical Unit Nnm I Reserved
2 (MSB) I L.ogicafBluck Address
3 Lngicaf Bled Address
4 Logicaf Block Address
5 Logicaf Bleck Address I (LSB)
6 Ressrved
7 (MSB) I Tmnsfer La@
8 Transfer Length fLSB)
9 fkse$’vuf
10 write Kcy
11 Cnntrcd Fiefd
Tbe Write With Laks cmmnand (table KXVffI) shelf request thsr the target tits the data tmesfesrcd by the
irsidritnrto the medium previrfed tbc tits key matrhes the write lock, within tbc ReadlWrite Lock Table, for
all Iogimf blocks requested.
The ksgical block addreas field &ad] specify tbe logical bbcfr tu wbicb the wsite opemtion begios.
The transfer length field sbsdf specify ths nwobcx of continuous kogicafblocks of dam beiog oensferrcd.
A transfer Iengrb of zero sfrao indicate that 65536 Iogicef blncks re be tmrssfemed. Any other vafue shafl
indicate tbe number nf logical blneks to be Oansferruf.
The write key field shafl specify the key code.to be applied m tbe cnropare process wi~ the write lock
contained in the Red/Write Lock Table. when tbs write luck is scso for tbe range of logical blncks requested.
no mmpare shaff k. required rmd the fiefd vefrreahrdl not be inwspmtcd Otherwise, the tits key field value
shaff eqord tbc write luck for tbe wits tn be apprnved and tk tsrmafexredrfeorto be written.
40.1.2 Seqnendal-accsss deviczs. Cmmnaeds identified in 40.1.2.1 sbrdf be inqdementd as defined.
Included in the folfowing list are mandatory SCSI-ff commands which Typs K requires additimmtly
implementation reshictions.
40.1.2.1 Mandatory cmnmands for sequendal-access devices.
40.1.2.1.1 Erase (19h). This m-d afrrdlbe mandatorY,refer tn 9.2.1 of SCS1-ff.
40.1.2.1.2 Inquiry (12h~. lilh command sbafl be mandatory, rek to 7.2.5 of SCSI-fl.
40.1.2.1..3 Mode Select(6) (15b\. Tfsis emmnassdsfsaffbe.rnsndatory, refer tn 7.2.8 of SCSI-fL
40.1.2.1..4 Mode Sense(6) (lAh). This cmnmarsdshnfl be meedatnry, refer m 7.2.10 of SCSI-II.
84
MfL4STEB&3&7cjsH)
1 June 1995
40.1.2.1..5 Read(6) (08h). This commend shell be msndetmy. ~fcr m 9.2.4 Of SCSI-II.
40.1.2.1.6 Read Block Limits (05h). T7riscmmnend sbrdl be maedetnry, refexto 9.25 of SCSI-II.
40,1.2.1.7 Remive Dimnosric Remlu (lCh~. Tbii corrursaedshell he rmndetnxy.
Refer to 7.2.130-1.
40.12.1.8 Relmse Units (1~~. ‘lMs cmnmsnd sbalf be mandetmy, scfa to 92.9 of SCSI-II.
40.1.2.1.9 Reqosst Smse (03h~. This enrmmnd shrill be smndetosy, refer to 72.14 of SCSI-U.
40.1.2.1.10 Rcseme Unit (Mb). This cmrnmnd shall be marsdetory,refer to 9.2.10 of SCSI-II.
40.1.2.1.11 Rewind (Olh). TfdSC4JMISrSnd
sheU b mdetov. mfCItO9.2.11 OfS~I-ff.
40.12.1.12 Send Diamostic (lDh). This curmmed shafl be msndetory, refer to 7.2.15 of SCSI-U.
40.12.1.~1 Cnrnmmd rcstrictiuns. The.Self-test feature slsalf be tb 00fy mso&tory inrplemmtatien
Oftfdsmnnmn . tim~tixef_~bu@mMti-mdme. Wbm PFis
equel tn one tbe diagno~ca~e format (see table 77 in SCSI-If) SheIlbe mpportd
40.12.1.13 Some (llh~. This command shell be mnedatery, refer tn 92.12 of SCSI-U.
40.12.1.14 Te$t Unit RmdY(oOh). This wnunend shell be msndemry, refer to 72.16 of SCSI-II.
40.12.1.15 Write (OAh}. This wrmnsed sheII be mmdnrery>mfa w 92.14 OfSaI-n.
40.12.1.16 Write Fiiemmks (lOh~. This cmmmendsbefl be meodstery, refer to 92.15 of SCSI-II.
40.12.2 Ootionel Commsnds for slxlmndel-Amfss Deticm.
44).1.2.2.1 Chaoize Definition (40h\. This canmsnd shall be optinnol m.fertn 72.1 of SCSI-fI.
40.1.22.2 Conspsrc (39h). This mrnmsnd shell be optiotssl, refer to 722 of SCSI-II.
40.1.2.2.3 CQDY
(18tQ. = cOmlmlzld- he OptiO1.ld,
r’ek tO723 of SCSI-U.
40.1.22.4 cOPy end Verify (3Ah~. This mmmeed shtdf be option.d, refer to 7.2.4 of SCSI-ff.
40.1.22.5 Load Unkind (lBh~. This command shsff & optinnaf, rcfa to 92.2 of SCSI-IL
40.122.6 Locate (2Bh~. This mnmmnd shell be optionel, refer to 92.3 of SCSI-II.
40,1.22.7 b? Select (4CIQ. This cmomaod shsll be optionel, refa to 7.2.6 of SCSI-IL
40.122.8 Lztq Sense (4Dh). This cemrnaed shall be.optionel, refa tn 72,7 of SCSI-II.
40.122.9 Mnde Select(IO) (551Q llds ccmrmendshell be optinnol, refer to 7.2.9 of SCSI-II.
40.1.2.2.9.1 Command resticdrrns. ~M3mplemntedthis maersaed .sheflhsve the _ =OiCdOUS
u
Mode Scfect (15h) es
~. .
40.1.2.2.10 Mode Sense(IO) (5.4Q. ‘flds mmmaed shell he nptieoel, refer to 7.2.11 of SCS1-fl.
40.1.2.2.10.1 Cnmmsnd rmtrictifl:l.~ implemented (his mmmaed sbdl hsve the sane smuictions es
Mnde Sense (lAh) es mlfed out In
85
Mn---g&3&7c~sH)
1 June 1995
40.1.2.2.11 Prevent-Allow Medium Rerenvel (lEh~. This co-d shrdf be optional.

Refer to 8.2.4 of Sm.
40.1.2.2.12 Rmd Buffer (3Ch~. This co-d shall be OptiOUSf,
refer to 7.2.12 of SCSI-II.
40.1.2.2.12.1 Command restrictions. The Rmd Baffu Medes ‘DATA’(OIOb)and ‘DESCRIPTOR
(Ollb) shafl be SIIPpOtiin fnfl.
40.1.2.2.13 Rmd Position (34h~. Tbia mmmand shall be optinaal, refer tn 9.2.6 of SCSI-II.
40.1.2.2.14 Rmd Reverse (OFIQ. ~S command shall be ef)tional, refa en 9.2.7 of SCSI-II.
40.1.2.2.15 Rczover Buffered Deta (14h~. This mmmand ahaffbe optinnaf, refer m 9.2.8 of SCSI-ff.
40.1.2.2.16 verify (13b). This co-d shall be optional, refer tn 9.2.13 of SCSI-II.
40.1.2.2.17 Write Buffer (3Bb\. This co-d ahaffbe optioaal, refer rn 7.2.17 of SCSI-II.
40.1.3 prima devise-s. Tbe m-ds required for prima devices ahzdlbe Uw-as tbnss specilled
es maadetnry -fnrb tb printer devices end tdf device types ia KS-IL Ne fnmherrearnsrions ahafl he imposed.
40.1.4 Pmccsam devims. l%e emnreands seqnired for pmeesser devices ahafl be tie sams as those es
Sfh%itledes mandatory for botfI PULT.5SOI
detims end sO device ~ in SCSI-fL No tier restrictioIM
shellbe inq)osed.
40.1.5 Writraace devices. Cemmaods idmtitled in 40.1.5.1 sbafl be implemented as defmd
fasluded in the following list are maadstery SCSI-11mmmaadr whish Type K reqnires additionally
implemmtation resuietioas.
40.13.1 Maadstorv mmmaeda for wire-mm &vicm.
40.1.5.1.1 Iosluiry (12b). ThiS commmd shall be mandssosy, refer en7.2.5 of SCS1-fl.
40.1.5.1.2 Meefc Sefmt(6) (15h). This cormmad shalf be mandatory, referto 7.2.8 of SCSI-D.
40.1.5.1.3 Mede Sease(6) UAh~. This m-d ahsff be mnadasmy, refer m 7.2.10 of SCSI-IL
40.1.5.1.4 Read(lO) (28b~. This command shaU be mandatory, refer se 8.2.6 nf SCSI-If.
40.1.s.15 Rmd Cmaciw( ‘Mb). This muenmd shall be rmadatmy, refer tn 8.2.7 nf SCSI-II.
40.1.5.1.6 Receive Diem OadC
Rmnfs$
(lCbI. This cmuntand Shf]be USSUdatmy.
Refer tn 7.2.13 o~-lL
40.1.5.1.7 Release (17b) . This crmumed shelf be mandatory, refcz to 8.2.11 of SCSI-IL
40.1.5.1.8 ReunesI Sense (03b). This command ahafl bs rrxmdasnry,refer to 7.2.14 of SCSI-ff.
40.1.5.1.9 Reserve (ldb). This command abaff be maadmxy, refer m 82.12 of SCSI-II.
40.1.5.1.10 Rezesu Unit (Olb). This cmnmaud shall be maadatmy, m.fertn 8.2.13 of SCSI-II.
40.1.5.1.11 Send Diagnostic (lDh). This mremand shall be msadetmy, refer rn 7.2.15 of SCSI-H.
40.1 .5.1.11.1 Cmmmnd resuictinns. Diaganstic pages end page strncrnre.saball be device specific.
Each device reqnirieg diagnostics shall beve a page defiiing tie teats to be ran and a page format delineating
how tie bestresnfts wilf bs dkplayed.
●
86
ML-STD-1397C(SH)
APPENDIX D
I June 1995
The SEND DfAGNOSTfC cxmrmsndwith a page forma (PF) bit of one insmcu & target to execute zcm or
mom diagnostic pages and that the data semmcd slmklusc the dwostic page formal dmaibcd by SCSI-II
for the applicable device. Each -ossic page alrafldefmc a frmcsionm opemtion thaI the target performs
during tbe test execution. A PF bit of sem abslf indicacctbs~the SEND Diagnostic pmmmtaa are as
SPCCitlcdio the SCSI-I S@&Vd.
40.1.5.1.12 Test Unit RmdY (oOh). This command sbafl bs mandamry, refer to 7.2.16 of SCSI-IL
40.1.5.1.13 Writc(lo) (2AIQ. lhia svrmmod sbaU be mdstory, mfcr to 8.221 of SCSI-IL
40.15.2 Optinnrd Cnmmsnds for Wriu-orlce Dcviccs.
40.15.2.1 Change Defmidon (40b]. This —d shafl bs OptiO@ ?c.fssto 7.2.1 of SCSI-IL
40.152.2 CmnPam (39h~. This co-d shall be OptiOOd,rsfcx to 722 of SCSI-U.
I 40.1.5.22.1 Commaod rmuicdnns. Ths Paruwfcr fist Lmgtb nf this msmmod shall be 14h. The
copy Flrnctioo Code SoPponcd fnr Uns mmmand shaO be code 02b (Block Device so Block Dcvim). There
shallbcamaximmn of me SegnraIt Dmcs@or.
I 40.1.S.2.3 CoPv (18b~. ‘klis cmmnaod shaft bc optinnaf, refer to 72.3 of SCSI-U.
40.1.S.2.3.1 Cmmnrord rmtricsions. TkssParaaEtsr List Lmgsh of this eoorrmnd sballbe14b. ‘FfaE’
aod Link? bits sball%c mppmtcd Tbc Copy Functinn Cods mpporud for this cammaodshrdlbccodc
02b (BIod Device to Bled Dcvi~) maximum of noe Segrmnt Des&pox
40.1.5.2.4 thPY cnd V* (3AIQ Tlds exmmraodshalt be opdonrd, rcf~ to 7.2.4 of SCSI-II.
0 40.13 .2.4.1 Commaod reauictions., lle PamnEter List fasth nf this cnmmsod shsfl be 14h.
The copy Fuocdon code suppons!d for command shall bs code 02h (Bfcd Dcvim to Bled Device).
Tbercsball bcamaximum nf one Segmmt Dcsaiptnr.
40.15.2.5 Lock-Unlock cache (36b). This cmnmand shall bs optional, sefcz to 8-2.2 of SCSI-H.
40.1.5.2.6 Log Selccf (4CfQ. This commond shall be optimal, refer to 7.2.6 of SCSI-II.
40.1.5.2.7 Log Sense (4Dh~. This command sbaU be optional, rsfa to 7.2.7 of SCSI-U.
40.13.2.8 Medium Smo (38h). This cmomsnd sbslf be OptiOOd,
refce10152.3of SCSI-U.
40.1.5.2.9 Mode SeIcct(lO) (531Q. Tbia comomnd shall be nptionsf, refer to 72.9 nf SCSI-fI.
I
40.1.5.2.9.1 Cnmmsnd resoiainos. .1~3implemcntedtis m-d sbaff bsve the same resricdnns as
Mode Select (15h) o.?
~.
I
4O.1.5.2.1O Mndc SCOSC(10)(5Ab). Tlris command shall benptional,~festo7.2.11 of SCS1-U.
40.13.2.10.1 Cnmmaod rcstricdons:l $ implerosrxcd this command aball bsve the serm restrictions as
Mode Sense (Mb) as callsd nut io 40.1. r . .
40.15.2.11 Pre-Fctcb (34h). This command shalt be optimal, refer to 82.3 of SCS1-fl.
I 40.1.5.2.12 Prevent-Affow Medium Rcmnval (lEh). This m-d sbaU bs optional, refer
to 8.2.4 nf SCSI-~.
I 40.1.5.2.13 Rind(6) (08h). This mrmnand sbaklbe nptional, refer to 8.23 nf SCSI-fI.
,0
87
I
1 June 1995
40.1.5.2.14 Read( 12) (A8h]. This mmersmd sbnfl be optionrd, refer to 15.2.4 of SCSI-II.
40.1.5.2.15 Rmd Btif- (3cb). w mrnmmd *be optionrd. refer to 7.2.12 Of SCS1-~.
40.1.5.2.15.1 Conrmrtnd rrsnictiorrs. The Read BuffexModes ‘DATA’(OIOb)and ‘DESCRIPTOR
(01 lb) slrall be supported in fnfl.
40.1.5.2.16 Read Long (3Eb). Tfds mmrnaud shall be rrpsionaf,refex tn 8.2.9 of SCSI-If.
40.1.5.2.16.1 Comrrrsnd restrictions. The host shell be mpabfe of mppmsiug ECC mrreaion by
setting ‘CORRECT bit to zero.
40.1.5.2.17 Read With Lo&s (BBh). Tbk cmrrmaud sbaff be optioud refm to 40.1.1.2.16.
40.1.5.2.18 Reassim Blnsks (07h\. This enmmnrrdslrall be optionsl, refer to 8.2.10 of SCSI-IL
40.1.5.2.19 Read Lad Tsble (O&r}. This mrrnnsnd sbaff be optimrrd, refa tn 40.1.1.2.18.
40.15.2.20 Search DasaEqrraf(10)(31h).M mmrrumd sbdf k OPtiOMLmf= tO 8.2.14.1 Of S~I-11.
40.1.5.2.21 Search DimsEqurd(12) fBlb). This m-d sbnff be uptinurd, refer to 15.2.8 of SCSI-II.
40.1-5.2.22 Search Data HidK10)(30hl. This mrrmrsnd ti be OPti. mf~ m 8.2.14.2 of SCSI-11.
40. I.5.2.23 s- DSMHi,gh(12)fBOh).This commmd sfsd be ofrdnmL refer en 15.2.8 Of SCSI-U.
40.1.5.2.24 Smreh Dat&rtuaf( 10)(32h~.This m-d shall be opdnnaf, refer to 8.2.14.3 of SCSI-If.
40.1.5.2.25 Search Dsta Euusl( 12)fB2h). his mrmmrtd slrafl & optional, refer to 15.2.8 OfSCSI-II.
40.1.5.2.26 Seek(d) (OBh~. This m-d sbalf be nptiousl, refa to 8.2.15 of SCSI-II.
40.1.5.2.27 Seek(lO) (2Bh~. This mmmsnd sbafl be.optiunrd, refer tu 8.2.15 of SCSI-U.
40.1.5.2.28 Se[ Liruits(lO) (33h\. This mrnmaud M be OPUOIUL
mfm 108~.16 Of SCSI-U.
40.1.5.2.29 Set Ltits( 12) (B3h~. Tlris mrrrmsnd shall be optinuaf, refer KS15.2.9 of SCSI-II.
40.15.2.30 Set hxks (BDh). This mnrtusnd sbsll be optiorrd ~f= m 40.1.1-2.25.
40.1.5.2.31 Start SoJrJUnit (lBh~. This mrurrmnd shrdf be optional, refer to 8.2.17 of SCSI-IL
40.1.5.2.32 .%mcbmnizeCache (35fr). l%is mmnrand shrdl be optinrd. mf~ tU 8.2.18 Of SCS1-U.
40.)5.2.33 VerifV(lO) (21%). l%ii mmmarrd shsll be optinual, refer 1015.2.11 OfSCSI-U.
40.1.5.2.33.1 Cormusnd restrictions. The ~yICbk’ bit shall be suppurud in foil for burh the value-sof
scm srrd one. The ‘ReMrWbu shall be SupPO* 01 fuff for both the wdms nf seru and one. ‘Hag’aud ‘Lid/
Sbdlbe supported in fidf.
40.1.5.2.34 VerifV(12) (M%). This cornmmd sbafl b OPtiOML
mfm m 15.2.12 OfSCSI-U
40.1 .5.2.34.1 Curmrrsnd restrictions. The ‘BytCbk’bit shafl be supported iu fofl for hub the vslues of
zero aud one. The RelAdf blt shsll be supported in full for bntb the vshres of mm rmd one. T@’ and ‘LiIIk’
shall be supponed in full
88
Mu-..-sg&3&7c;sH)
1 June 1995
40.1.5.2.35 Write(6) (OAh). This mmmsnd drafl be oprionsf, refer to 8.2.20 of SCSI-II.
40.1.5.2.36 Write(12) (AAb). This mmmrmd shall be optioosl, ref~ m 15.2.14 of SCSI-U.
40.15.2.37 Wrim end Vaifv (10) C2Eh~.This mrnmand shrdfbe optional, refer m 15.2.15 of SCSI-II.
40.1.5.2.37.1 Command resoictions. The ~ytchk’ bit shell be supponed in full for bob the vrdue-sof
zernandnm. The-hi tsbaff bemPxmfdfmb*tidH ofzcrosnd one. ‘Flag’and Unk’
shall be rmppotledin fuo.
40.1.5.2.38 Wrk snd Vraifv(12) (AEIQ This commsnd sbsll be npdonsl, reftx w 15.2.16 of SCSI-IL
40.1.5.2.38.1 Commend =UitXkOIS. The ~yKIW bit shalf be sum in full fur both the tines of
zero and one. T& ’ItefMfbr ‘t shzdl bcmpfKnted mfrdffmbo~&@W ofmrormdooe. ‘Flag’and’Link’
sludl be supported in frdf.
40.1.5.2.39 Write Buffer (3Bhl. This command shsll be wti fi~ m 7.2.17 OfS~l-~.
40.13 .2.39.1 Cmmnand resoictinm. Write bnffa rmde ‘WRITS DATA’(OIOb)~ be mppmted as
q)ecified in SCSI-U ~ sbrdl be OptiOIUd
on a ~ af@imliOn basis. - download d
sbidf also suppmt a dowtdosd and save option width msy tdtu device rmdia or other nonvoladle mermry.
40.15.2.40 Wrire ImnR (3FQ. This mrnrmmd shall be opdonrd, refa to 8.2.23 of SCSI-II.
40.15.2.41 Write With Lab (BCb). This mmmsnd shall be optimal. rek to 40.1.12.33.
40.1.6 CBROM devices. ~ mrommds reqdmd for ~ROM devices me those as speciKed as
rmndatmy fm%otb w~ and afl &vim types m SCSI-33sbmg with the optional mrnmands
which foffow. Incfuded in the following list me msndatory SCSI-ff mmmsnds which Type K requirm
atiltionany imfdemntadmr mso-icdons.
40.1.6.1 Mendatcrm’commsnds for CD-ROM devicts.
40.1.6.1.1 Inarrirv ( 12h). his m-d@ be mandatory, refer to 72.5 of SCSI-II.
40.1.6.1.2 Mode Selmt(6) (15h). his mmmand shall be msndstnry, refer to 7.2.8 of SCS1-D.
40.1.6.1.3 Mode Smse( 6) (lAh). Tlds mnrnmnd sbaff be rmmdstory, refer m 72.1O of SCSI-H.
40.1.6.1.4 Rmd(lO) (28h}. This mmrmmd shall be msndamry, refer to 8.2.6 of SCSI-IL
40.1.6.1.5 Rmd CDROM CamciW (2S!!. This mmmmd shall be =~v.
Refer to 13.2.8 of~I-fL
40.1.6.1.6 RcAve Dismmtic Resuks (lch}. Tids mmmsnd shall be mmdamry.
Refer to 7.2.13 of3CSI-fL
40.1.6.1.6.1 Comrnsnd resaicdons. All Isrgets shslf suppm the psgc format (PF) bit d
tn bnor zao snd me. bit is equsl m am, the disgnosdc page formei (iable 747 in SCSI-U)
Shso be supported.
40.1 .6.1.7 Release (17h) Ilds mmmsnd shslf be rnsndstory, ref= to 8.2.11 of SCSI-II.
40.1.6.1.8 Ream SI Sense (03h). This mnrmmd shsll be mmdiuory, refer w 7.2.14 of SCSI-II.
40.1.6.1.9 Reserve (ldh). TEis cornmsnd rdudlbe msndatory, refer m 8.2.12 of SCSI-IL
89
MfL-~~D~3&7C~SH)
1 June 1995
40.1.6.1.10 I&zero Unit (Olb~. This command strslf be mandatory, refr.r to 8.2.13 of SCSI-II.
40.1.6.1.11 Send Diagnostic (lDQ. This mnrmsnd ahrdfbe mandarory, refer to 7.2.15 of SCSI-11.
40.1 .6.1.11,1 Cmnmmrd resaicrions. Diagnostic psges snd psge structures shslf k device specific.
Esch device requking diagnOsttcsshall have a psge defudng the teats to be run end a page format delineating
how the test rmufts wiff be displeycd.
The SEND DfAGNOSITC m-d with a pnge format (PF) bit of one insomcts tbe tsrgct to exeane zern nr
nmrc diagnostic peges and thst the dsta reomrcd sbaff use the diagrrnsticpage formx dmcribcd by SCS1-ff
for the applicable device. Emb diegnmdc page shelf define a function or operation that the tsrge.rperforms
during tfx test execution. A PF bit of mm shalf indicate that b SEND DfAGNOS71C pamuwtms me as
spmitkd in the SCSI-I s4amfard.
40.1.6.1. Test Unit RmdY(OOb). This mmmsnd shelf bc mandatmy, refer tn 7.2.16 of SCSI-II.
40.1.6.2 Ootionaf m-ds fnr CD-ROM devices.
40.1.6.2.1 ChsrMe Definition (40h\. This cmmnamdshim M optioJIaL
tiCI to7.2.i nf SCSI-H.
40.1 .6.2.2 Comosrc (39h\. 11’dsmnmran d shall be OptiOll&refer to 7.2.2 of SCSI-ff.
40.1.6.2.2.1 Cmmnand rmoicdnns. The Parsm.M List Length of this co-d shaff be 14b. The
Copy Function Code mpported for this m-d shaff be mde 02b (BInck Detim to Block Device). Thcre
shafl be a maximum of one Segmeet Descriptor.
40.1.62.3 COPY (18h). This co-d shsff be O@Jlld, refer to 7.2.3 of SCSI-U.
40.1.6.2.3.1 Command rssoicdnns. ~ Peratmta List Lcagth of Udsm-d shafl k 14h. ‘Hag’
endl.ink’b itsabaffbemppmted The Copy Function Code mpportd for this mrnmmd sbzdfbe code
02h (BInck Device to Blnck k’i~) er-eshalf beamuirmun of one Segmnt Dcmriptnr.
40.1.62.4 COPY snd Verify (3Ah). This cvrmrrsndshao be optional, refer to 7.2.4 of SCSI-U.
40.1.6.2.4.1 Cn-d restrictions. The Perarmtcr List Length of this mmmaud sbaff be 14h. Tbe
Cnpy Funcdnn Code supported fm”this m-d E&Wbe wde 02h (Bln& Dcvicc to Block Dmice). There
shsll be a msximum of one Segment Descriptor.
40.1.6.2.5 Lock-Urdnck Csche (36h~. This command shall be optinnaf, refer to 8.2.2 of SCSI-fI,
40.1.6.2.6 LOE Select (4CQ Ilk cmnmsnd shslf be O@ODd, refer to 7.2.6 of SCSI-U.
40.1.6.2.7 Log Sense (4Dh]. This mmmand sbaff bc optinnsf, refer to 7.2.7 of SCSI-ff
40.1.6.2.8 Mnde SeIect(lO) (55h~. This mmmand shalf bc nptinnsf, refer to 7.2.9 of SCSI-ff.
40.1 .6.2.8.1 Command restrictions. If irnplemmted IMsmnrmand sha.ffhave tie suns rcsoictions as
Mode Select (15h) ss
~ .1.3.
40.1.6.2.9 Mode Smse(lO) (5Ah). This mmrnsnd shall be optional, rcfu to 7.2.11 of SCS1-ff.
40.1 .6.2.9.1 Command restrictions. Mimplcmmtml this mmmand sbalf have the same restrictions as
Mode Sense (lAh) as mflcd nrrt m 40.1.1.1.4.
40.1.6.2.10 PsuswResume (4Bb). his command sfrtdlbe nptionsf, refer to 13.2.1 of SCSI-IL
40.1.6.2.11 Play Audio(10) (45h), This cconmaodshall be op!innal, refer to 13.2.2 of SCSI-LL
●
90
●
1 June 1995
40.1.6.2.12 Play Audio(12) (A5h). TbiS cmnnrsnd SW be OptiOWd, rsfer to 13.2.3 of SCSI-U.
40.1.6.2.13 Play Audio MSF (47h~. This command shafl bs optioeaf, refer en 13.2.4 of SCSI-U.
40.1.6.2.14 Play Audio Track/lndex(48h). This command shall be optional, m,fer cn 13.25 of SCSMf.
40.1.6.2.15 Pfay Track Refative(10)(49h]. This commsnd shalf be nptiooal, rsfez to 13.2.6 of SCSI-IL
40.1.62.16 Plav Track Reladvd12)(A9h~. This en-d shaff be optional. refer m 13.2.7 of SCSI-IL
40.1.6.2.17 Pm-l%xcb (34h~. This cnmmaed shall bc OptiOOd, refer rn 8.2.3 of SCSI-U.
40.1.6.2.18 PrevcaI-AUowMedium Rmrnval (lElr). This co-d sbaff be optional.

Refer to 82.4 of S~-11.
40.1.6.2.19 Read(6) (08h). This mnrrmnd shall be optional, rcfrz to 8.2.5 of SCSI-U.
40.1.6.2.20 Rmd(12) (A8b}. ‘flds co-d ahafl be OptiOd. refer tn 15.2.4 of StiI-11.
40.1.6.221 Read Buffer (3Cb}. This mnrmmd shall hs optionsf, rcfsr to 72.12 of SCSI-IL
40.1.6.2.21.1 Cnmrrrend restrictions. The Rmd Buffer Modes ‘DATA’(OIOb)end ‘DESCRWNXC
(Ollb) sbefl be sufrpnrted in frdl.
40.1.6.222 Rmd Header (44h}. This commend shall be O@Od, refez m 13.2.9 of SCSI-II.
40.1.6.223 Read I.mg (3EIQ. Tlris command droll bc O@Od. ref= to 8.2.9 of SCS1-fI.
0 40.1.6.2.23.1 Command rrstictions. The best sbsfl bc capable of suppressing ECC mrre.ction by
setdng k20RRfYX bit to mm.
40.1.6.2.24 Reed Sub-channel (42h). This mmmartd sbafl be optional, refer m 13.2.10 of SCSI-fL
40.1.6.2.’25 Read TOC (43bl. This cormnaed shall bc optioncl, eeftz to 13.2.11 of SCSI-II.
40.1.6.2.26 Smrch Data Ea&f (10)(31h). Tlris command shall be optional, refer to 8.2. 14.lof SCSI-H.
40.1.6.2.27 Smrcb Date Equal( 12)(Blb). This mennrmd sbsff be nptional, refer to 15.2.8 of SCSI-U.
40.1.6.2.28 Smrch Date Higlr(10)(30h). This mrmnmd sbefl bc optinnel, refer to 8.2.14.2 of SCSI-II.
40.1.6.2.29 Search Data HiEb(12)(BOh).This command shaIf be optional, refer en 15.2.8 of SCSI-IL
40.1.6.2.30 Search Dam J%uaf(10)(32h). ‘fhis cmnnrand shall be optional, refer m 8.2.14.3 of SCSI-II.
40.1.6.2.31 Sink(6) (OBh). This co-d shall be optional, refer en 8.2.15 of SCSI-fI.
40.1.6.2.32 Sccfr(lO) (2Bh\. llris cnrrunsed shall te optimal, refer to 8.2.15 of SCSI-IL
40.1.6.2.33 Set Ltits(lO) (33h). ltria cmmmnd shafl be OptiOeSf, mfcr m 8.2.16 of SC.Sl-fl.
40.1.6.2.34 Set Linrits(12) (B3h~. lhis mnrmnnd shell bc optimal, refer tn 152.9 of SCS1-fL
40.1.6.2.35 Stan Stnrr Unit (lBh]. This command shaff bs optional, refer to 8.2.17 of SCSHf.
40.1.6.2.36 SYecbronim Cache (35h). This mnunmd shall be optionef, refer m 8.2.18 of SCSI-II.
91
40.1.6.2.37 VaifY(lO) (2Fh). This cmmrrand shall be optionsf, refer to 15.2.11 of SCSI-fL
40.1.6.2.37.1 Cmrrrnmd restrictions. The ‘SytChk’bit sbsll be suppnrted in fulf for both the values of
zem and one. Tlrc ‘%IAW b11shall bs suppnrtcd in full for tmtb Orewdms of scro snd one. ‘Hag’ ruralZii
shall bc suppnro!d in furl.
40.1.6.2.38 Verify(12) (AI%). This cnrmnmd shall bc OptiOlld,refer to 15.2.12 of SCSI-fl.
40.1.6.2.38.1 Cnmmend resuictions. The ‘BytChk’bit shafl bc supported in frdl for bntb the vrdues of
sxmendcme. Tbs TiclAdFb lL Sbdf k SUpfrmted
in frdffor both the vslues of mm and one. ‘Rag’ and ‘L,ii
Sbsfl be Suppnrted in fuu.
40.1.6.2.39 Write Brrfk (3Bh~. This cormnsnd sbsff be optionsf, refer en 7.2.17 of SCSI-II.
40.1.6.2.39.1 Co—d restrictions. Write buffer mnde WRITE DATA’ (OIOb)shall be supported es
specified in SCSI-IL dovmload mndes shslf bs optional on a pm application basis. The download mnde
sbsll rdso support a download snd save option which may after &vice mdia or otiex nonvolatile mcrnnry.
40.1.7 Smnner devicm. lle cnrmnends requird fnr scanner devices m-ethose m spmifkd as
rnrmdstnry for bnth scanner devicesrind rdl devim ~ in SCSI-II. No further restrictions shall be imposed.
40.1.8 00 timf lmmlnry devices. The mrrunerrds required for optimf rnermry devices sre those ss
spmitled ss rrsmdstnry for botb optical rmmory devices snd eff device types in SCSI-ff along with the
optionsl cumrnsnds which follnw. fncluded in the fnllowing list are msndstnry SCSI-If mrnmsnds which
Typs K reqdres additinnslly implmrmrtadnrr restrictions.
40.1.8.1 hfaudstnry commands for omical rmmory devices.
40.1.8.1.1 fnqrriry (121Q. This command shall be mandatory, refer to 7.2.5 of SCSI-II.
40.1.8.1.2 Mnde Sclmt(6) (15b~. This mnmrand shall be mandatory, refer to 7.2.8 of SCSI-II.
m
40.1.8.1.3 Mnde Smse(6) (lAh). This cornncmd shell be rnandmmy, refer to 7.2.10 of SCSI-fL
40.1.8 .1.4 Ftmd(lO) (28h~. Tlds co-d shall be mmrfatnry, ref= to 8.2.6 of SCSI-II.
40.1.8.1.5 I&ad CD-ROM CaoscieM25b). This mrrunmd sbsll be rnendstory, refer m 13.2.8of SCSI-IL
40.1.8.1.6 -Ive D~grmsric Results (lCJI~. This mnrmand sbalf be mandamry,
refer to 7.2.13 of~.
40.1.8.1.7 Release (17fr). This command shafl be mmdatory, refer to 8.2.11 of SCSI-IL
40.1.8.1.8 Ikxtmst Sense (03h). This m-d shall be msrrdetnry,refer to 7.2.14 of SCSI-IL
40.1.8.1.9 Reserve (ldh~. ThiS co-d shsll be msndatmy, refer m 8.2.12 of SCSI-U.
40.1.8.1.10 I&mm Unit (Olh~. This mnmrmd shall be mandntnry, rsf.a en 8.2.13 of SCSI-11.
40.1.8.1.11 Send Dmgonstic (lDh). This m-d shall be msndatnry,refer to 7.2.15 of SCSI-II.
40.1 .8.1.11.1 Co-d rc.wictinns. Disgnosuc page.sand page srmcmres shall be device specifrc.
Each device requiring dmgnosti~ shrill have a page dcfming the tests to be ,grnand a page formal delineating
hnw the test reeuks will bs displayed.
The SEND Diagnostic cmnrrrmd with a page format (W) bit of nne instructs ths target to execute z.em or
come diagnostic pages and tit the data returned sbafl rrse tie diagnostic page fnrrnat described by SCSI-II
for the applicable device. Escb diagnostic psge sbslf defioe a function or opsratinn that the terget perfnrms
during the test execution. A PF bit of zem shall indicate rht the SEND DIAGNOSTIC parameters we ns
spccifmd in the SCSI-I stendard.
92
MlL$;:N~3&7C~SH)
1 June 1995
● 40.1.8.1.12 Test Unit Ready (OOh).‘fhk command shafl he nrandawY, refer m 7.2.16 of SCSI-U.
40.1.8.1.13 Wri@O) (2Ah). Thk co-d shafl bs mandatory, refer to 8.2.21 of SCSI-II.
40.1.8.2 (%uonal commands for oDtical rmrnnry devices.
40.1.S.2.1 Change Definition (40h~. Thk command shaObe.optionaf, refer to 7.2.1 of SCSI-11.
40.1.8.2.2 Compare (39h). This mmmand ahafl be optiooaf, refcx to 7.2.2 of SCSI-11.
40.1.8.2.2.1 Command restrictions. The Parametsr List Length of this mmnsand ahafl be 14h. The
Copy Function Code mppnrted f this cnmmand shall be mde 02b (BIti Device to Block Dsvice). There
ahafl be a maximum of one Segr%t Dc.seriptnr.
40.1.8.2.3 CODY (18b]. This mmnrand rhaff be oprimaf, refer to 7.2.3 of SCSI-11.
40.1.8.2.3.1 Cmmrand re.soicrions. Tbe Pammrmx LKI Lengrlrof llds ctmunand shafl k 14h.
‘Ffag’and ‘Lii hits sbafl bs rted in fufl. The Copy Function Code suppmted for MS mnrmand shall
be code 02h (BInck Device tnmB!%KDevice). ‘flme sfrafibe a maximum of one Segrmm Dcscriptcw.
40.1.8.2.4 Cnrw and Verify (3Afr~. This mmnxmd sbrdl he npdnnaf, refer rn 7.2.4 of SCSI-U.
40.1.8.2.4.1 Cnunnand reatricdnm. The Paraemox Lwt Length of this mmnrand shall he. 14h.
The Copy Fnnction ~ mpmti fOr mmmnd sbafl he mde 02b (Mock Device to Block Device).
There shall be a masimum of one Segment Descriptor.
40.1.8.2.5 Darn Destruct Co-d (OCh\. This mnnnartd shaff be optional, refer rn 40.1.1.2.5.
I 40.1.8.2.6 Eraae(lO) (2Ch). Tlria mmnrrnd sfrrdlbe ma@atnrY,tiee tn 152.1 of SCS1-11.
40.1.8.2.7 Erase(12) (2Cb/. This mmnraad shafl be mandatory, refer to 15.2.2 of SCSI-If.
● 40.1.82.8 FcmsratUnit (04b~. This cnmmnd abaffbe mandatory, refer en 8.2.1 of SCSI-U.
40.1.8.2.9 Leek-Unlock Cache (36b). Tbii command sbaff be optional, refer to 8.2.2 of SCSI-fL
40.1.8.2.10 Log Select (4C2Q. his mmmand sbaff be nptionaf, refer m 7.2.6 of SCSI-H.
40.1.8.2.11 Log Smae (4Dh/. This mmnand ahnfl be optionaf, refer tn 7.2.7 of SCSI-II.
40.1.8.2.12 Medinnr Scan (38fr). This mmnaod sbafl be optional, rtfm tn 15.2.3 of SCSI-U.
40.1.8.2.13 Mnde Selrzt(lO) (55h~. This mrnmand sbafl bs optional, refer tn 7.2.9 nf SCSI-U.
40.1.8.2.13.1 Command resoicdons. U implcrmnud &is mnrrrssndsbafl have the same rcatrictions aa
I Mode Select (1.%) as calfed Outrrl 40.1.1.1.3.
40.1.8.2.14 Mode Sensc(lO) (SW}. llds mmmmd sbafl be nptiomf, refer to 72.11 of SCS1-ff.
40.1.8.2.14.1 Cmrrmsnd mmrictions. ff imphmrmted this mmrusnd sbnfl have the sam resoictinns os
Mode Sense (lAh) as mffed at ~ 40. I.r.l.4.
40.1.8.2.15 ~Fetcb (34h~. This mmmand afsaUbe optimal, refer tn 8.2.3 of SCSI-II.
40.1.8.2.16 Prevent-Affnw Medium Rmmval (lEQ Tlds m-d absll be.optimal,
refer to 8.2.4 of SCS’IZI.
40.1.8.2.17 Rend(6) (08h). his m-d ahrdfbe optionaf, X6X to 8.2.5 of SCS1-fL
40.1.8.2.18 Rmd(12) (A8b). This mmnsand shall k. optionaf, rsfer ro 15.2.4 nf SCSI-U.
40.1.8.2.19 Read BufTer(3Ch\. This mrnmand shall be optional, refer to 7.2.12 of SCSI-II.
93
MlL~:N;&7C;S H)
1 June 1995
40.1.8.2.19.1 Command restrictions. The Read Buffer Modes ‘DATA’(OIOb)and ‘DESCRIPTOR

●
(O11b) shall be supported in full.
40.1.8.2.20 Read Defect DaM(lO) (37h), ThiS command shskl bs O@ODd, ref(x tn 8-2.8 of SCSI-U.
40.1.8.2.21 Read Defect Datrd12) (B7b). Tfis cmnmnnd shall be optionsl, refer tn 15.2.5 of SCSI-11,
40.1.8.2.21.1 Co-d resuictions. The Defax L~t Fnrmst field sbsklbe defuwd by table XVII
found under the Format Unit command.
40.1.8.2.22 Read Gmerntion (29h). Tlds mmnmd shafl lx optionnl, refix to 15.2.6 of SCSI-U.
40.1.8.2.23 Read hog (3EQ. This co-d sM1 & optinnsk, refer 108.2.9 of SCSI-U.
40.1.8.2.23.1 Co—d rc.striations. The hnst sbafkbe capable of suppressing ECC mmxtion by
setting ‘CORRECT’blt tn mm.
40.1.8.2.24 Read Updated Block (2Dh). This connnsnd shslf be optimal, refcx In 15.2.7 of SCSI-U.
40.1.8.2.25 Rsad With Locks (BBh). This m-d sbskkbe optiomf, rcfex to 40.1.1.2.16.
40.1.8.2.26 Reassign Blocks (07h~. This command shaff be optinnsk, refer tO 8.2.10 OfSCSI-ff.
40.1.8.2.27 Read Lock Table (06h). This command shrdf be OptiOd, refrx tn 40.1.1.2.18.
40.1.8.2.28 Search Dats Equal(10)(31h). This command sbafl bs optional, refer in 8.2.14.1 of SCSI-II.
40.1.8.2.29 Search Data I%usf(12)(B1h~. This m-d sbsfl be nptinnal, refa tn 15.2.8 of SCSI-U.
40.1.8.2.30 Smrcb Data High(10)(30h). This cmmnsnd shrdfbs optiomf, refer to 8.2.14.2 of SCSI-ff.
40.1.8.2.31 Search Data Higlr(12)(BOh~.This commnd sbsklbe optionsf, refer tn 15.2.8 of SCSI-IL
40.1.8.2.32 Smrcb Data Equak(10)(32h).This mumrand sbnll bs nptionrd, refer tn 8.2.14.3 of SCSI-fL ●
40.1.8.2.33 Search Datn f%unl(12)(B2h). This mnmrsnd shall be nptinnsf, refer tn 15.2.8 of SCSI-U.
40.1.8.2.34 Seek(6) (OBh). Tlris command shall be optimal, refm to 8.2.15 of SCSI-II.
40.1.8.2.35 Seek(IO) (2Bb). llris m-d sbaff lx optimal, refer tn 8.2.15 of SCSI-II.
40.1.8.2.36 Set Limits(IO) (33h). This mmmsnd shall be nptional, refer to 8.2.16 of SCSI-IL
40.1.8.2.37 Set Limits(12) (B3h~. This mmrnnnd sbrdf bc optinnaf, refer tn 15.2.9 of SCSI-If.
40.1.8.2.38 Set Locks (BDh~. This mnrmand shalf bc optionnl, refer tn 40.1.1.2.25.
40.1.8.2.39 Sow Stop Unit (lBh). This mmmsnd sbsff be nptionsk,rsfcx to 8.2.17 of SCSI-U.
40.1.8.2.40 Smchronize Cache (35h). This mmxnand shslk be optionaf, mf~ m 8.2.18 of SCSI-IL
40.1.8.2.41 uPdatc Block (3Dh]. TbiS command Sbd be OptiOMf, refer tn 15.2.10 of SCSI-ff.
40,1.8.2.42 Verify(lO) (2Fh). Thii cnmmand shafl be optional, rsfer tn 15.2.11 of SCSI-II.
40.1.8.2.42.1 Command rc.striations. The ‘BytCbk’bit sfraklbe suppnrted in tldf for bntb the vslucs of
zero snd one. The ‘f&Mdr’blt Std be supported in fufl for bdlr tie vafuss of mm and one. ‘Fla8’and lii
shall be suppnrted in fnkf.
40.1.8.2.43 Vetify( 12) (AI%). This co—d Sbdk bc OptiOMk, refcz tn 15.2.12 of SCSI-fL
40.1.8.2.43.1 Command restrictions. Tbc ‘BytChk’bit shafl bc suppnncd in 6_dffor bntb the values of
zero and one. The ‘RelAdf bII shafl bc supported in full for both the vefues of zcrn snd one. ‘Ffag’snd ‘Link’
shall he supported in full.
94
●
1 June 1995
40.1.8.2.44 WriLe(6)(OAh~. ThiS emmnrnrd SW be OfXiO@ refer tn 8.220 of SCSI-11.

40.1.8.2.45 Wrire(12) (AAtQ. This ammrand Sheffbe OptiOeFd,refer to 15.2.14 of SCSI-II.
I 40.1.8.2.4d Write and VmifY(lO)C2Efr}.Tlris emrursmd sfreObe eptionaf, refer to 15.2.15 of SCSI-IL
40.1.8.2.46.1 Gmrrosnd rc$uicdens. The ‘BytChk’bit shall be supported in s%fffer both the vslues of
mm end one. TfE %lAcff br“tabelfbe srrppnruxlin full for borb the vafum of zere nnd one. ‘F@’ end ‘Lii
Shefl be supported in frdL
40.1:8.2.47 Write end VaifY(12)(AEh~. This mernrnnd shsll be eptiorrsf, refer m 152.16 of SCSI-IL
40.1.8.2.47.1 Ccmumod restrictions. The ?ytChk’ bit shall be supported in fnff for bntb the wsfueaof
mm end em. 3%s ~~ 11 mPP*~~fmbtiti~w ofrere end one. Ffeg’nrrd’Link’
shell be Suppnrmdin M.
40.1.8.2.48 Write BuffcJ (3Bh). This mmrnsnd shtdf be optionaf, refer w 7.2.17 of SCSI-U.
40.1.8.2.48.1 Cmmnsnd remictions. Write buffer rmde ‘WRITEDATA’(OIOb)sfreflbe suppertrd es
Spccifii in scsl-fl.~ Sbeffbc eptinneferr afraapfdicddnnb asis. ‘flrednwnfoadumde
shell afsa support a download and seve option which rnsy efta device rrdie os oskr nondatile rrmmry.
40.1.8.2.49 Write Lone (3Fb). 7%ism-d shall be eptiunal, refer se 8.223 of SCSI-ff.
I 40.1.8.250 Wrim WItb Locks @Ch~. This mmmarrd .sfrellbe optinrutf,refer to 40.1.1.2.33.
40.1.9 Mc&undanI?er devices. Tire mrnmandr required for mdhrm4mger devic?s afraflbe those
spaifud es rtsmdatory f roedum-changer devices and afl device typm in SCSI-fL No fortk
I
msoictions Sbaffbe impcad.
40.1.10 CQrmrrrnd
dons devims. l?re cmrsmands mquimd fct mmnmnicatinns dsvims ere shese ns
,0 ~=~f
I-e5aicliens Sbaff be impf&d
tb arrrrenmimdons dcvicm snd W deviee ~ in SCSI-fL NO frmber
40.2 SCSI-U fYlW12 byte m-d options. The mrmnarrd set of SCSI-U pareits several eptioes in
stsodad mnrmaod Sr2cs,foruanrpleurem mrnrmod M various device types is available in
&byte, I&byte, & 2-byte ccunrmnds. Wbm
&byte mmmands .K@yqom hm%*?.?Ed:k”s=2 Fz&ti:% $2
existing mrfier S(%31-1device.driver routines The lo-byte mrnrmnds shell be mnndatory. When
imtkmented, the l>b~ mrnmsnds shafl be errrirnrsf. The 12-bne mrnnrseds shnuld be imtdermnted to
ptivided SUppOl’t for fliture SUfVSIIWSin device &l@tir!s.
K nptionaf mrnrnsnd sekainn mu“denm.. Tfreunique Type K and eptioeal St2.SI-ff
inlo the fuocthnal anms of Data Integrity
Enhancing Cmnmands, ds, PerforrrameeEohancbrg Gmrnrnods,
security Eehaecing Cnnrrmnds end Maintenance Enhancing C@rmsrrda. This grouping of eanrnands
~oufd provide a sfcdge checklist tn trafamc design mnsidersdoes during systmr requirerrmts idmtitkadon.
I
10
95
MlfS:~3;7C~5 H)
1 June 1995
40.3.1 Co-d selection midamx for direct access devices. Table XXIX provides selection
guidmce fol Tw-K d uect access opuonal cmmnands. The commands are functionally grouped,
TABLE XXIX. 0ptione3 command w idamx for duect access devicxs.
Daln BadcuP TypeK SCSI-H

Command Integrity d Rrf— Sean’ity Mtitmance Goss cross
Amhive R.$=eme Ref.emux
. 40.1.1.2.1 7.2.1
Chmsc Definition
. 40.1.1 .2.2 7.2,2
~mw
. 40.1 .1.2.3 7.2.3
COPY
copy & verify . 40.1.1.2.4 7.2.4
. 40.1 .1.2.5 TyF. K U@iquc
Dam lkuua
. 40.1 .1.2.6 S.2.2
I_Qd Urlkk C&she
. 40.1.1.2.7 7.2.6
f-q Sek4
. 40.1 .1.2.8 7.2.7
LOSSense
. 40.1,1.2.11 S.2.3
Pm-Fetch
. 40.1.1.2.12 8,2,4
Prev.Ilt-Au@m
Medium Removal
t?... mm . 40.1.1.2.13 7.2.12 I
. 40.1.1.2.14 f
cad Skfccl Dam
● 40.1.1.2.15 f
●
. 40.1.1.2.16 T~
1 K Urdqm
cad with Lack I
. 40.1.1.2.17 18.2.10 I
F
Reassign Bloda
n.,.,,.., . AO.1.1.2.18 ‘kc K Uniwe
. ..—l,,ck T.hl.
.— n , I
scdrch DamupJal I I . I 40.1.1.2.19 8.2.14.1
.--—. .“aIa . .. m..
SCul.,, r++
I ● I ISO.l
. . .1.2.30
. . ___ h.2.14.2
. . . .
.Sard DamLoW . 40.1,1.2.21 S.2.14.3 I

. . 40.1.1.2.22 8.2.15
seek
. 40.1.1.2.24 8.2.16
Su Limi!s
● 40.1.1,2.25 Ty~ K Unique
Sd Lmckn
Slm stop unit . . 40.1.1.2.26 8.2.17
Synchmk Gchc . 40.1.1.2.27 8.2.18
Vedfy . 40.1.1.2.28 8.2.19
WriLead Verify . 40,1.1.2.29 S.2.22
Wri[e Buffer . 40.1.1.2.30 7.2.17
Wrik Irons . 40.1.1.2.31 S.2.23
writ. same . . 40.1.1.2.32 S.2,24
W1-k W.olLoch . 40.1.1.2.33 TYPCK Unique
96
MfL_$.-3~7C~S H)
1 June 1995
40.3.2 Command selection m idance for XXIumtial access devices. Table XXX provides selectinn
guidance for TWX-K sequential access opuonaf cmnmands. TIICmmnands arc functionally groupd.
TABLE XXX. OPtional mmmaad mu“dancefor sequential amcss device.%
Data Backup Typs K SCSI-11

Command Integrity and Performance Smluity Maimcnamc C$nsa Gnss
Archive Reference Reference
Change Definition ●
40.1 .2.2.1 7.2.1
Compam. ● 40.1 .2.2.2 7.2.2
copy ●
40.1 .2.2.3 7.2.3
Cepy & verify ●
40.1 .2.2.4 7.2.4
Load Uefnad ●
40.1 .2.2.5 9.2.2
Locam ●
40.1 .2,2.6 9.2.3
fag select ●
40.1 .2.2.7 7.2.6
Log Scmc ●
40.1 .2.2.8 7.2.7
Rwat-Allow ●
40.1.2.2.11 8.2.4
Medium Remnval
Read Baffcr ● 40.1.2.2.12 7.2.12
Rmd Position m ,
● 40.1.2.2.13 9.2.6
Read Rlwuss. I I I ● I I 1.M)1991.I 10’)7
I I I I I I T“. ..&-----
1 ..-. .
%edl*
Recover Bufl-.. 140.1.2.2.15 19.2.8
Dam
verify ● 40.1.2.2.16 9.2.13
Wrifc Buffer ●
40.1.2.2.17 7.2.17
●
97
Mn-..-.-g&3&7c~sH)
1 June 1995
40.3.3 Co-d .d%tiOn w “dance for write-mm devices. Table XXXl provides selection guidance
for TyQe-K write-once optionsl mmmmds. The commsnds sre ctionally grouped.
TABLE XXM. OJItiom.1mmmsnd mu“damx fnr write-mm dwias.
Data Bac#P T~=K SCSI-U

Command fmegrity Pc.1’formsnceSCcm-ityM.4i17tmsnce Crnss
Archive Reference Reference
Change Definition
● 40.1.5.2.1 7.2.1
COmpsre ● 40.1.5.2.2 7.2.2
copy ● 40.1.5 .2.3 7.2.3
copy & verify ● 40.1.5.2.4 7.2.4
Lock Unlock Cxbe ● 40.1.5 .2.5 8.2.2
Log Select
●
40.1.5 .2.6 7.2.6
Log Sense
● 40.1 .5.2.7 7.2.7
Mdlmn Scan ● 40.1.5.2.8 15.2.3
Pre-Felcb * 40.1.5.2.11 8.2.3
Prevenl-AffOw
● 40.1.5.2.12 8.2.4
Medium Renmwaf
Read Buffer ● 40.1.5.2.15 7.2.12
Read Long
●
40.1.5.2.16 8.2.9
Read witi Lacks ● 40.1.5.2.17 Tw K Unique
I&assign Blocks
● 40.1.5.2.18 8.2.10
Request Lock Table ● 40.1.5.2.19 Type K Unique
Smrcb flats Equaf ● 40.1.5.2.20 8.2.14.1
Scsrcb Dim H@ ● 40.1.5.2.22 8.2.14.2
Search Data LOW ● 40.1.5.2.24 8.2.14.3
Seek ● ●
40.1.5.2.26 8.2.15
Set LimiIs * 40.1.5.2.28 8.2.16
Set Lacks ● 40.1.5.2.30 Type K Unique
Stan Strip Unit ● ●
40.1.5.2.31 8.2.17
c.m.hron~
.,. -. ~~e ● 40.1 .5.2.1 8.2.1X
.. ----
Verify ● .. .----- ---~
Anls7~ 15.2.11
Write and Verify * 40,1.5.2.37 8.2.22
Write Buffer ● 40.1.5.2.39 7.2.17
Write Long ● . 40,1.5.2.40 8.2.23
Write witi Locks ● 40.1.5.2.41 Type K Unique
I
●
98
MIL..-:3;7C;SH)SH)
1 June 1995
● 40.3.4 Commsnd selection guidance for CD-ROM devices. Table XXXll provides selection guidance
for Type-K ~Fun opuon c Cnnunands are ctionzdlygrnuped,
TAf3LEXXMl. Optional conumnd guidance for CO-ROM devices.
Dim Backup S::411

Command Integrity and Performance Security Maintenance ‘E:
Archive Rcfmence Reference
●
40.1 .6.2.1 7.2.1
●
40.1 .6.2.2 7.2.2
●
40.1.6.2.3 7.2.3
●
40.1 .6.2.4 7.2.4
●
40.1 .6.2.5 8.2.2 f
●
40.1 .6.2.6 I 7.2.6
●
40.1 .6.2.7 7.2.7
I%A=eech ●
40.1.6.2.17 8.2.3
Rcvent-AUnw * 40.1.6.2.18 8.2.4
ediuxn Removal
Buffer ●
40.1.6.2.21 7.2.12
Rr.adl’bxidm ●
40.1.6.2.22 13.2.9
Read Long ●
40.1.6.2.23 8.2.9
Read sub—Cf@od ●
40.1.6.2.24 13.2.10
Read TllC ●
40.1.6.2.25 13.2.11
Se40-chData Eqotd ●
40.1.6.2.26 8.2.14.1
●
40.1.6.2.28 8.2.14.2
●
40.1.6.2.30 8.2.14.3
● ●
40.1.6.2.31 8.2.15
●
40.1.6.2.33 8.2.16
● ●
40.1.6.2.35 8,2.17
●
40.1.6.2.36 8.2.18
verify ●
40.1.6.2.37 15.2.11
WrieeBuffs ●
40.1.6.2.39 7.2.17
99
MU----~D3!#C;S H)
1 June 1995
40.3.5 Command selection guidance foropticai memory devices. Table XXXfll provides selection
e
guidance for T~e-K OPtical Memcny opuonal c=mmands. The commands are grouped functionally.
TABLE KXXfll. OPtional cmmnsnd mu“dance for optical mcumry devices.
ventv I l-l I I 1 4U.1.5.’?.4 1

. . . ..saucl ●
40.1.8.2.5 “1
%ase * 40.1.8.2.6
d Utdd Cache ●
40.1.8.2.9
og Select * 40.1.8.2.10
.“ sen~ ●
40.1.8.2.11
;>,* s~ ●
40.1.8.2.12
mh ● I 40.1 .f.2.l
.—. - 1 , ,
— --- J ●
40.1.8.2.19 7.2.12 I
LeadDcfea Dam * 40.1.8.2.20 8.2.8
4
W Gmeration ● 40.1.8.2.22 15.2.6
/swi Tnng ● 40.1.8.2.23 8.2.9
wed Block ●
40.1 .8.2.2& 15.2.7
.– A ● 25 yps K Unique
40.1.8 .2.2-,.
n Bhxks $ 40.1.8.2.261 8.2.10
t Lock Table ●
40.1 .8.2.27~
-* rm.~ ● 40.1.8 .2.?QI
1 ●
40.1.8 ~ ‘
.-u “a. w. ● S&El , o.-.. +.=
40.1 .b.~.>~
a
seek ● ●
40.1.8.2.341 8.2.15
Set IAnits * 40.1.8.2.36 , I r191fi
v.’..
.“
I
set Locks ●
40.1.8.2.38 1 ypc K Unique
Start Stop Unit ● ●
40.1.8.2.39,) 8.2.17
SynchrOniu Cache ●
40.1.8.2.40 ] 8.2.18
UPdate Block ● 40.1.8.2.41 [ 15.2.10
verify ● 40.1.8.2.421 15.2.11
Write and Verify ● 40.1.8.2.46 5 -_._..
15.2.15 -
Write Buffer ● 40.1.8.2.48 7.2.17
Write Long * 40.1.8.2.49 8.2.23
Write with Locks * 40.1.8.2.50 Typ K Uniqne
100
MlL$;;&3&7c~sH)
1 June 1995
40.4 Data Protection.

Dafa Pmteuion for dirmt-access devices. Current Navy standard disks (i.e. AN/UYH-2, AN/fJVH-3,
AN/B~-16 md ~ EMS) provide a data protecdoa @mas pscddbidngmdfvmile. accesses
tn the media nssb+amstain renditions are met. This capability ia a requsmment for Navy disks being used on
system tfsaI tbe data on the media hc safeguarded. m menrmada. PIOOXCLmd ~w~e de~=
pmtectinn of TS SI-13were evaluated nnd fnued inadequate tn aupfmrtthe level of date pmtecrion required by
mast Navy appficadnns. % this rmann, additionzdoptimal SCSI-If commands, auxiliary defmitinns 10
cxissiog commands, and a -WaSC dc~= pm~m wcsc dc_ md dcfi~ to f~ ~ vOid. me lcvC1
of protection defined by this standard applisa m systems tbet have a hmt mseprrtes cxxnmuuicadngexternally
to a disk ova tbe TyTx.K bus. It does not apply se sya@ssssthat inmrpomtc SCSI iatcmrdly but communicate
uteraally oycr asrotha NTDS iatesfam type Those systems have theis owmprotection selrerm.buill into tie
ccmmaaicatms pmtnml. The Type K bus data protection scheme was deaigeed tn lx similes te other Navy
aser data protection achenxs.
40.4.1.1 Date Psorection commands for dirsct-acceaa deviem. Easlies in tbia section it was mentioned
that SCSI-II ea some pmwsmas for data protmlion (~ RELEASE, end S~ LIMfTS
comrstaada,at.) bot Osesedo not met Navy data aecuity ~CS. Af~@ *Y C= pm~~
maditinna whereby dw.data is protected (i.e., unit cmextmt msavatr“errswithin ebeRESERVE aad RELEASE
commands), the pmtdon mnditinn is LCUIPOW. S~l-~ dOCSmt PKXWIdata .OY@ b~ fim Bm.R=et.
bard ma+ or a PowexcYcIe. AaYOneOftiCSCr=u (cI=) b pm~m ~uOn l~~g qe ~~
uapmtectrd undf aa initiator re-establishes ebe pmrection rmnditinaa. ‘f%eType K data pmtedon eossanmds
aboufd awe a pemssmemlCVS1(mnditiom) Ofpm~On which ia ~ ~ fi~ (tit n~ =tabtig
by an initiator) after a power cycle or reset. The Type K data proteetien abefl be aatislied before acox of be
data on the smdia is allowed. Table KKXIV lists all cnurnraads auppmdag data protection.
TABLE XXKIV. Data protection mmmanda for d--amcsa devices.
Cornmaad (Code) (New w Meditled) (Maadatosy m Optional) Pamgraph
Mode Sefect(ci)(Mb) Modified Mandatory 40.1.1 .1.3.1
Mcde Scfmt(lO) (55fs) Modfied optional 40.1.1 .2.9.1
Mnde Seese(6) (lAIs) Modified Meedatnsy 40.1.1 .1.4.1
Mode .%.w(10) (5Afs) Modified optional 40.1.1 .2.10.1
Rqrrest Smae (03h) Mndified Mendatnry 40.1.1 .1.10.1
I/@ With Lo&s (BBh) New Optional 40.1.1.2.16
Rmd Leek Table (06fr) New Optional 40.1.1.2.18
Set Locks (BDb) New Optional 40.1.1.2.25
Wsir,swltJl LOeka(In) NCW optional 40.1.1.2.33
To ievoke data protection tbe uaa sbafl fmt smd tie Mnde Select/l%rmat Device Page mrmrsand, with the
“Data Pmbxt Mode” bit set in UreFnrmat flevim Page parnmxcrs, followed by tbe FcansatUnit command.
Upon receipt of the format command the deviec cmtrnlk.r aball, ahmg with its ❑esmal opsration of
ret-omsatdng the smdia, build and maintain a non-volatile read/write lock table stsmd in the device.. After
aucmssfef msnpletinn of 0ss format command tbe targei device abalf be in protect mode assdshall have a
rind/writs lock table built and roaintainable fnr each LUN formatted. Itie LUN rmdfwrite lock table is uaually
located on ebecmmspeadiag LUN’Smxlia in a reserved area not directfy uaezaccessible. For bstter
fserfomsarlex a copy of Uselock table abmdd be kept in tbe iatemal mmxxy of tbe target an that a read of tie
table off tbe sauiie wordd not have tn always be dons for each rcarflweitsoperation. lf isaplemmted, changes
en the table abnafd be maietaimd in bnth Incadons.
40.4.1.2 Data Protection hardware for dire.ct-acmss devices To arrppnrlumd functionality of the T~e
K data protection scheme a bardWaICswncb aba!i be for each dirsct acccas device (target) in the
hardware cnclnaum. Far syxerns where a target bas %mtiwsaableIngical units (LUNs) tbsn, to segment the
functionality, each LUN shelf be rquired to have its owe switch, otherwii, opemtion of all LUNSshall bc
101
M~~;-S~3~7C~S H)
1 June 1995
based on fire target’s hardware switch. The target processor sbaff be capable of reading tbe position of the
hard ware protection switch for each device il has tbe resfmnsibility for doing the software protection
checking. This docmnmt defu the switch to be two-position switch wirlrtbc positions dcfmcd as ON aad
OFF. Table XXXV dcfrrm the actions of the targes pruwsso r based m the software accesses made arsdthe
position of tbe switeb.
TABLE XXXV. Cmrmraad rcmcorse ta Data Protection.

COMMAND Defa PfOfecdaaswitch - OFF ~ Data Protection Switch - ON J
ModeSc10a(6) (Mb) fJKancammmd... rNAeLEPROIBCfCf S&@ ca~. IU16 ti C4XiditiOII statlu and
Mode Sclect(tO) (5Sb) MODf? hit in F&mm fkti Page CMSS
dmaof TltOIECIION VIOIAllOW
t%nmatUnit (04h) PmcusoxmmnML huOdt.ack Tddcon&vicec.ml Rcjm CaOmsml,k=nd* LxmaffdonIranu and
@mat RAM, dtOW - tO atf hbt bl~ rumch of TitfJlE2f10N WOLATTOfW
Data Demucs (fKb) PKICUIcemnmnd= rpxii%d heti Rcjca command, send check conditionzrz.tussnd
!ca!sedutacd TTtOSECllON VIOfATtOW
.%1LackI @b) ?mccsscamnumd ifpmscr.rdenabkd, Rejrn command, sendckck condition smrusand
RendLack Tabte f06h) ~ MCCSa wv~ mhihmw w .Ma of U4ClfECt10N VIOLAllOfW
Compam (39h) Pmcclacammand fffnvtm m0deca8btcdd ftejeu commmd, #endcbxk condition trAOUawl
Change De6nition (40h) I’cadkiml.%h uplafze maordrlogkafbtakl w dataoflIF.0’llP370N vIOfAnOW
Copy (Itlh) K&lend
copy and verify f3Ab)
%Fctcb f34h)
Read(6) (OSh)
Read(IO) (2Sb)
M Lang (3@b)
.% L.imiu (33b)
Scnxh DaIaEquat(31b)
Search Data Hi@ f30h)
Scamh SSafabW f3Zh)
WriIr,f6)
(OAIO
Wlile(lo)@h)
Wrilcd vcz@@?Jl)
Wlirrbn~ fwh)
WriteSame(4lb)
ReadWhb LnckJ (BBh) Prucu8mnunslafifpm
lecrmrldemsbtcd, ~ commsudif rdlwdre tup ofmuurw.ad
wri!=Wi&~ @m) uhunise ~jm * VNVALSO
rXIMhWNW equalrbcmdlwriwlocksintbctabtefor
aflIoufcalblocksv$fumcut
fW@ (1W Atwayltcgal AtwayrIegz.f
Wad@aciry @h)
Receive Diagmadc
Resutl#(la)
RELzase(In)
RqucsI ~ (03h)
fhcrve (16h)
I&mm UtdI (Olh)
Smd DimgnoadcJ(lDh)
Starr SIOP Unit (lBh)
Test Unit Ready @Oh)
verify (m)
M ~,, dmma, rfCCSOc.tI-C@C thr eachswitch dc6md in fbcsystemthatirnplemmfs‘TYFK. fobCa key AM tilb
h’sownuniquekeyade, fbasthe key LX captivdaorxaptiw irreither @tioa, ox Orsfit even nAs to ha a key switch
at all. Maybs a simple toggle switsb rbst is protecfed wifl sat@ the rcquireraents ia this area It oaly states that
k= wc iqmrtaat 0fMi0u6 fbaf sbafl be emkrafcd doriq ftredca~ of thetar@ sy%tam
102
MIHTDN3;7C;SH)
[0 1 June 1995
TYPE K (SCSI-H) DESIGN GUfDANCE

10. SCOPE
10.1 Sco e. This appmdu Prevides additional background and information fer the ixnplemmtndon of
Type K inrc* aces apecficd in IMs standard. This appendu form an optional pan of this standard.
m ~cE DOC~
Not applicabfc.
30 DEFfNITIONS
Not applicable.
40 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
oomnmdd bun mam@rd,SCSI-II. Tlw
.&m.b”J””- isdexiv..m.
cad fos um in Navy Miiion critical Compnta RMODICC (M-) SYS@IW.
SCSI-II imiedm ItlUly o@@ wilb l’cs@.$ to WSSY=F@.I Of* bus iWfUdiDgtk PhY6id =diWD,
pbyxical moncUosa, cnmmand sets. and ths nrssage system l%c pnqmsc of this staadasd is OJdefiie
I SfXCifiC~ts h b _ and idwdfY Wflkb Optim$ wilbh the SCSI-I! = UEI@UOIY rc@E~Ls
for Navy Systsms. his atmdard is not aff incfnsi= SCN-ff abafl aao
srandard fortbc Type Kinmf.ace. lhe Type Kdcsigaar drrdlfoffnw S&!RyfPm-7g%!J+:%2&%’#’e
isam.tddressd bythi~ Optmns idatilcd in SCS1-11bat not addmsed
remain Optionaf.
Adbmmcz to T~Kaboefd mmdiin Ihapmdumioaofdetims wbicbem 100%

somf#%:’ -s)’ made Commumlffy avaifalde WTsmndrd opti~cd SCSI-U dmia. Adherence
terldsatendatd
. . . . .sbaUnotjco@ize
. . . . .. systam
. leve.lpcxformma witbmmnmaal devices and may evee provide
Ulrcnace Snnancelmn[ Unou Culaul CuamLwm(xe.
SCSI-n defines cstcnsions to tbc ANSI X3.131-1986 (SCSI-f). One of he key objectives of SCSI-R is to
provide cnmpddfity with tfmre SCSI-I devices wbicb sappnfi lrm parity. Tbcreforc tlscfc is no nod to
spccificalfy ssfamce matctial m SCSI-I urdcaait is not captod m SCWI.
50 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS
50.1 Pbyaiad chamcteriStiCS.
50.1.1-.
50.1.1.1 cable mmirenrata. The A and B sable r C@WI=NS iIIscsl-~ fi not OPPIY10TYPC~
50.1.1.2 Total svstem cable leneth m Typs K imafam is a parellel signal bur deaignsd for sxtmnal
&rice C9muuivlty. dcmdpsn oftierntal busandisconoccted tothematoftbe bus
rxmfigumtinn via two smn.xtera. Intemaffy, them connecmrs am intsmonnectad with cabling faabioned in a
leeptbrnugb manner. Extunsfly, tbe devices am mnnemcd te mclr otbcr via mrdti-mnducter cabling. fn
Typs K this bus cabling is coespnaad of the CQsnpfctesunrrmd length of intend wiring bamcsm.r (of t=cb Of
tbe Type K dcvicca on tbe bus) iatcrcamsctcd with MIL-C-24d43 fS2U-45 external cabling. The LS2U4S
mifia+rycabfeia a4S-twiatsd- “, lane fay cabfs, with so epdmir-ed(b@ noias immunity) bmiduf abield
and lowsnmkemtc.rjarkst. ~apti~aiguafcnmmueicasc sviatwo wirm,cacb sigaaf isas.sigd tonne
twisted pair in tbe LS2U45 cabfing. ‘k itwaaaf -g bamcscs mnaiat of ffexibfccsfding (tich is
usually flat or ribben type) and tbc pairing of si@s internrdfyis left te tbe equiprrmt designer (i.e. within
certain slschical pamrmtsrs to rnaietain bus iategrity wbicb wiff bs dsauibcd Iater in umrc detail). SCSI-If
and Type K bnti require rbe tefef bes Iengtb m be Iimiwd rn 2S mems or appmximmely 82 fez Lenger
Iengtb imcrfaccs may be pmsible on a cam to sass basis if clearical and timing parameters me.IML
103
MIL-g-3&7cJsH)
1 June 1995
50.1.1.3 Total internal cable length. h ia reammended that the maximum delay due to internal cable
Icngtb for each electrimf cab”met not cxcted 27 IISwith a rnasinmm skew of 1 ns between lines.
50.1.1.4 Cag: aPac~& TO m sure impedance cbarastaistics and sigeaf quafity, spacing bstwmm
Type K ietcmaf ca cs an eqtupnrmt ground pkansaor other cables witldo tbe equipmmt shall bc a
minimum of 0.6 centimeters.
50.1.2 TWX K elccuiud drsximion. Type K elwtricaf signafa are implemented on a multiple u.xr bus
architecture retaining most of rfle features derailed in SCSI-fL Tbs mufti-uaa bus protecol is mainmiucd even
for a two device Ptrint-opnint implcummti~ Since c=tain bus ti@ MSL+diKxtioIuIL tie cl=~~
daQG%’@CS Oftifmt and OUQIUIM’S ietMwuu% aod intaacliw. Howcvcx,in Type K, tbe dfierentiai
compesits sigoafs fmva baa demiled fer rnput pammctm and siogle-mded values have been auppfied for
ourput parammm. The input and nuqmt pmameum fmw LreuIsegregated in this apccfilcariOn to convey
mmrc stringent electzial guidafincs. This will snaurc p- signal integrity in a noisy elecrotmgnetic
abipbeard rwimnnrm.
Sin~&NM signal drivaa skdf not be paudtt.cd ie rfds standard. Singl&Endcd pammetms are
included bscause tbay apply to the diffe.rdiaf oprinn wbm no specifw pamtmmm are givqn.
50.1.2.1 Average mmaurcd cmnrtnaite DC vxNmgefl~). SCSI-U definsatm I& EfA RS485
apecWIcatiuefor signal drivers and receivers. RS4S5 is a me diffacndaf specitlcatien and dees not preclude
ccmunen mmdr.voltoge drivaa. Srncc Typa K diHumdaf aignaf lines contain OC voltages and cumm?a
(sufqdisd by tbs raminarion -ra en each MCIof tbe bus), using mmmm mode drivmdctimri ~~i Tw~
K difTauIria! nxxdvaa and mminammwiU dispLay&iva DC Offsetvalues wbmmeasm
OC offset vafurs arc depmdcnt upou ccommn mode voftage-sof the &ivas on UICbus aud the distance from
the maameonm[ pni.ottn rhedrivmtmd thamminatnfs mthebus.
To make conrkrcet ~ts Ofnpasting cimiui at any pointen theTYP K bus.aU avm&~fo~&~~
mf--=taia- Tfdst=bdwqtitiga50% KvoiWx~
SIGNAL(+) and S1 NALG) @s and avsraging the two tngstfmr. Tfds avmage measured cmnposits DC o
voloige (v~iatlrmn scdtocafadatc themaxiomm andmfnimum pammXca’sfor amplimde, rise and faff
rimes.,and skew. Since ths Type K receiver is trufy diffamtial, the avcmgiag meaaursmmt Wbnique ensures
a minim differendaf aigttd swing bstwece the SIGNAL(+) aed SIGNAfA-)lines and predudcs large
amplitude siogle-ended drivers with a aingfe OC offset.
50.1.2.2 WmORed Simals~ SCSI-U does net spcciticilly provide.for tbe open mlfector driver sigmda
RST, BSY aud = ercndal circuits. .%ngfecnded SCSI-If speciflea open collectnr drivers for
Of?ed sigeafs R.ST,B%’?~dmSEL. Because of the termimter volrage diviaim in differential SCSI-fL it ia not
IMdde to obmie a SIGNAL(+) #eater @an 2.7 Vdc and a SIGNAf.4-)less than 1.7 Vdc simnftanenualy with
purely epui colfactnr drivcm Type K implcmentatinn of di&excmiafORed drivers fnr RST, BSY and SEL
signals sfmffbs activefy divan mm (Mate 1) and tri-statad (Saite 3) cma falsz cenditinn.
Oi
104
MIL-Ms;~3;7;(sH)
1 June
‘o
1995
50.1.2.3 Output Chamctcristics of Signs1Lines. Easb conuol and dam bil driver output aball obey the
following mllpm charmtsrisucs
I
a. Easb PM sbafl be capable of driving intn 100 feet of rarmim@ LS2U45 ~ cabling, with rbe
minimum output chamctaistics sbmvn in f~e 44. llds will eamre that the devices will bs able
rn drive 7 dsviscs @ 25 pF/srub +82 feet of systsm bos cabliug in a maximum lmgtb
mntigumtinn. The 100 feet of tmminated LS2U45 type cable represents a msinurm
mnfigm-ation.
c. E8cbptw iIfhaveasignaft usignalstate rmnsition skswtime lcsstbauorcqualto 12nswbea
nxa.mrd a; tbs VAM wits smssing pnint be!ween anYmatched SIGNAL(+) and SIGNAIA-)
wltages. ~ wiffensure the devices ~ ❑ ut liugcr at the sw change region and WI kit the
d. ~?~?~~+;~?~N%;Z~@?%=;ti drrusbsWem5andd onswhen
masured betweeu VAM+5 aod V~-5 Voks. ‘k fowa limit msums that Signafsd not
mspnnd to impsdanm inccmsis~@cs between tbe extaoal cabling, wiring bsrnesscs, and stubs
due m mffecrions. The uppsr hum ensmes waveform topnlo&Ythat is mmmmmmte wfrb she
I pofse widths of nnmimd Typ K aignefs, this dsawwcs pmsiile additional &ew tinm l-rmvecn
bos si~ due to bigtdy div~t dri~.
I
50.1.2.4 TERMINATORPGWER(TERMWR) TERMPWR wltage, each Type.K dsvice
Shaffsupply pull-up power to the.tsrminatnr networks ia”im~bb Sigmds. mZRMPWRsbaff bediude
I mupfed to the bus with vcdmgcrange of 4.4 tu 5.25 volts (msammd m die bus). SCSI-fl is mnsidaed mu
fimtimts with tk voltage M% of this power, and wiUarrow s@ficam wlme mfacna.s
~~~#~.~d@e~mm@etid_d~ a--of tibwmati_t
value m tbe receiver by ths difference of this DC wrfuc. Since tbs voltage waveformsam ~ with
I e~~lc~~.a w~t-~ti~~m mtoftim-ge. Tomsrm. rhm
vohagcs txansrrutmdas mm snd of tba bus am nut sigrdlicautiy DC shifted, ths voltage mnge of this DC signal
shall bs tigbomcd sod ti device ahaffdiode coupfs heir supply fmm tbs bos. TERMPwR mppfics for
T~K~babla toau@ywt021Mnfxrm OfmllWL
s
50.1.2.5 Bnndim aod Gmumiin . Ed Typs K dsvice wiff extend tbc system cabinet ground tn &s
MILS-ID2$S40 conmxtor to ass as a Fl17t&lysfdeld fcn T~ K signals m cxtamd LS2U-45 cables. Tbe
T~ K device wifl tiow Chss B hoods to the cabinets extaior in ammdmcc with MILSTD-131OD.
I
It should be noted that the diffsmutial option of SCSI-U is not a true ‘diffamdd’ IZMS@Va d@n (m tbe
purest smse of UISdefinition) sin= tbe signals am not oufy high impedanse decoupled or ‘flossed’fmm
ground and pnwer aoomes. 12tcbsignaf voltage is pdal up/down via voltage division of rhc.terminator
m%voti to ths powa aod gmtmds of tbe individuef dsviccs. This is accomplished wfxmall tbivas am ui-
Sottsd via the tsmdnao“onresistor tmwmksonth e.mdsoftfrs bus. I%is’psendd diffacntbd mods
I (complemcnttoy voltage xmdt) res@rcs that apcdfic voltage values define cacb higMow sigmd of the
pseudodiffsrendaf pair, not just thck diffefeuce. If the bus baa the capabiity to oprmte with mmxmn mnde
induced whages, then the.fdgb end low state mhms of the drivers abalf be m.samwd with respect to tie
mmrmn mode voltage that is iuducd, not extanaf grnoud. fo ths diffasntiaf ootion of SCSI-IL the grnuud
wires aud taminatnr-pwcr wires arc ah on tbs bus~thercfnre, they abalf afso co&aiu tbe aam? value o~
mmmon nmde indrrmd vnlrams as the simak rhenswlves. fn Ibis fitit it is diffimft rn duermmc tbe exact
nature of the umumo mods @adooaf %d prutectinn capabiides ~ far RS-4S5 signafs with mspcr tn
the diffemmisf option of SCSI-ff operation and the effects of differing mnmctim achcmm between b mnb,
chassii, end sigoal gmmI&. See figure 45 for au sxample of a point-tqx.in: sirrgfesigpaf mmceivc.r
imamrmcuion in a Type K bus or mrdti-pnim implememarinn. Figure 45 afsn shows relarimrsldps betwmn
dsvicc gr’minds,tcrminarnr pnwer, and mminarm elecoiml cmmccdtity.
105
M1f--~:;--3~7C~S H)
1 June 1995
50.2 Logical characteristics.

50.2.1 Message sYsrmL The message system permits mmmurication between an inbiator and a target
for the pm-pe of interface MSDagWDmL SCSI-ff aflows many optional implermmtadons of the message
system The masage system provides a level of matml brmveen individual phase aanaactiona and tie
cmmnand level opemtions of the bus. GmemUy, messages accomplish the fnUowing
a. Esabfish Imdes of operation for phase h—ammo “ens (i.e. wide tmaafm, aynchmnous tmmfer),
b. Liak and queue eorrmrands.tn e5~fisb order of execution ~oe.pq~)ag meamgsa),
c. Abmt or re.smtarget opr.raunaa (i.e. abnrt, r-emr,tmmimte
d. Report or recover fxom errors that omrr during transactions (Le. bus parity errors),
e. MaiDtaindata pninurs dtig data mmsfem (ii. save OrI_@XX@ PoiD@).
A message going either dtion shall tc me. two, IJImuftiple byus in @@. me Or MD= ==g= maY
be sent during a single MESSAGE phase, but a !mssage abaUnot be split lmwem muftiple MESSAGE phasea.
The initiator ahafl ad the MESSAGE OUT phase by negating ATN wbm it sends certain messages.
by the initiator after the SELECTfON @ate abaUbe eirlm fDENTIJW, ABORT, or
The iirst rmssage aart
BUS DEVICE RE.S)3 masage. ff a targri mceiws anYother tr=$sagei tin it W gOKOBUS -E p~e.
50.2.1.1 Message system imDlemm~m. s~== system implementation eauaes the mnst
attachment diffiml tieabetweza Type Kde “ minimum wodriag set of messages is detimd, the
numbs of pnsaible variations is eaormam. lle ayxtems irxegmtnr ahaU be responsible for insuring prnper
systems compad%ffity betweca different devices on b T K bus. The systems integmtm ahaUidentify
which messages are supported aad implcrmmed (ace 50 ?r .1.2 for a minimum nm.ssagesystem
implementation). A pmccss for emor handling shaU rdso be idmdfkd aad specified.
50.2.1.2 Minimum msaaage aystc.m Rnvided in this aeainn is an example of how the message system
impl-tation ?nr a Type K device ahnti be.dnmrrrn red. Included are the fOUnwing the message system
.suPpmt fable. message system phase implemaa.tion table end message aysrem errm Hvery procedures.
50.2.1.2.1 MessM ~m sup cart. lle message system support table (table XXXVI) ahaUbe used m
identify the uu!ssagea au~rted by indivi&ral equipmerrL lhis table mntaim a fiat of aU mrssages idmdtied
in SCSf-ff aad indicates whether initiator mdor targti rrrodeaam aappnrted. This table is based upon the
implementation of the AN/UYH-16(V) Mass Meum-y Stmage Device (a militarized disk system auppnrdng
target nmde onfy).
The ‘Suppnrt” column ia table XKXVI ahmdd be expanded by the aystrms integmror to include a column fnr
each possible device on the Type K bus. Any mnflicts (srrppmted vs. not auppaed) should be clmdy
deflmd and dommmted to address possible inmmptibtitiea impacting system operation.
I
● “
106
—— ——
MIL/&D&3&7c;sH)
I
1 June 1995
TABLE XXXVI. Message svstem supmft.

Negate ATN,.. 1
1 I sLwcm’i I I -. .... ..
utreomm
L_’... ,--- .
, ve,vru ,UM ACK
code Mir40r
‘“ Tmoel Meeaege Name 1
I I out I Yes
LMh M M ABoRT A. ..t “..
“u , e.
Om - - ABCX3TTAG ~ I
out Yes
Och M M we owx E RESH
out Yes
OEh - - -El/
a.EAsiauEus
-W1.J3E In da
00h M M ~m
In da
04h - M mscotuEcT
out I Yee
04h - - up WGT
h rda
W+l-FFh M M IDEN7FY
M IOENTFY out
aLWFFh M ---- WE (IWO ;a
-- Was) In
‘2sh~iYYDE REstu
1
I da
INM4TE RECOVERY I h
F oFhl-l- out Yee
@
DERROR out Yes
XMPLEIE In da
) mfm.m (WTtH
FLAG] In rlia
‘ERROR out Yes
T In out Yea
In da
ruAIsruiMER
m out Yea
pm bytes)
LTAG out r’b
‘-TAG out M
.- In out m
out Y9S
In de
TEEF In da
is
In out Yes
[*a MM I alwm— UA~A~=’ER =0’JE=
1
out Yes
lh - - I TERMINATE~ MOCESS
In out Yes
tow M M I WOE DATA~ REQUE=
r-lr% I(R eeervadl 1
- -
!=rr - - (lWenmd for fwe.byl e Meesams)
I
S#-7Fh - - I(R eeerved)
Key M= Mandatory auPP~
_. NOfIr@ama@ed
In = Targst to Meter
out - Irdtietorto targal
Yes = lnlUetordull negate ATN before last ACK of message.
ND. Initibx m or rrmv not negate ATN before last ACKof message. SW 6.21 of SCSI-II.
11 The ASOIW TAG andCLEARQUEUE messegasare requird II ta!xIedqwrine k In@emarsted.

a WUmund INMATE RECOVERY meseagasam onfyVW dwlng theSSymhmnarsavetdnotifketbn pmtOd.
3 Extendedmessage,raferto latie 11 smdtable 12 of SCSI-II.
107
I
MIL#TIg&7;(sH)
1 June 1995
I
50.2.1.2.2 Message system phaaekuo Iemmtation. The minimum message system pfmse
implementation Ialdc Sbafl identify wheu rmsaagas are suppurted iu rhe process of implemendng a SCSI-11
cmmnaud. Table XXXVIf givm an example. Eech ruw of tbe table reprmems a message suppumd by one
I or mum daviccs on the Typs K bus. Tbe maponse of each device rmder each of the bus Phaaes shall be shown
ie tie mw. Table XXXVII should be used tu identify incompatibfitica batvmeu deticcs on the bus. Each
iucompatibifity shaff be documented by rhe system imcgmtur idenrifyiug impacts on UICsyscm
Table XXXVfl. Miiimum messme imelemcmation.
Devlca
I
Crnd Stafus F&4 In
PREVIOUSPHASES
MSQOul Qetafn Date Ckl set I RsI
1
Code Massage Name
06 Aborl I s s s s s s WA
T A A A A A A CE
DC BUS Deviaa Reset I s s s s s s s
T A A A A A A A
Do Command Ccm@afe I A A A A A A A
T WA s s s fVA NIA NIA
I 04 Diiwnneat I A A A A A A A
I T s s s s s s WA
80-FF M3ntify (Initiator) I NIA WA WA WA WA WA s
T MR MR MR MR MR MR A
80-FF Identify (larget) I A A A A A A A
05 Initiator Delecfad
T
I
WA
s
WA
s
fVA
s
NIA
s
NIA
s
WA
s
s
s ●
En’or T CE A A A A A CE
I 09 Massage Parity I NIA WA s NIA NfA NfA NfA

Error T MR MR A MR MR MR CE
07 Maaaaga Rajecf 1. A A A A A A A
T NfA WA NIA s WA WA NIA
I 08 No Operation I s s s s s s NIA
T A A A A A A CE
~t~ Synchronous Date I s NIA s s N/A NIA WA
Transfer Rawest T A MR A A MR MR CE
no,~ Wide Date I s NIA s s NIA WA NfA
Transfer Requesf T A MR A A MR MR CE
KEY A= Accepted
s. Sent
MR = Meeeege Rejected
CE = Cetawephlc Error (SUS Reteased)
NIA = Not AOPIiceble
~1 &fended maeaage, refer 10fable 11 and tabla 12 of SCSI-IL
108
50.2.1.23 Message sysremerrormcuverv Prwxxtures. llresys~e mimplementnr shall define how

messages are uaed__r_rfhs error recovery procedures. S’CSTZlallows tbe ma.sage sysrem 10remver from
certain trrmsf= umra at the device imerfam level. Au example ruigbl be vrben a parity error ia dermred on
she bus during a data tmesfer. SonE devices may OYrn rscuva by rearming dare puintms rn rbs last saved
due aed resardng the Oanaferal tbw poinL If this type of appPJaCbia not suppnrred by bolb devices,
problem$ ucmr. The evahratiuo of error bmrdlers ia not atndgbt fnrward. Irr general, each mm handler
appma~h.needs to be dafmcd for meh b~ phase for eaeb device and enmpared with other devims for
m~~btity. The large m@w# of Pnsslble esmr handler combiions pmsludes a table type of
CnmPmWn approach but reqmres a desaded analysis. WhaI is auggrsted s to uot handle errors at the device
iatafam level but iustcad prform a’rnr mpurdog as de$xxitrafin 502.1.2.3.1.
502.1 .2.3.1 frddarrrrcrmr bandlin~ (ANAJYH-16(W examrrIe). Tire error remv-sry

appmacb preamted dues ❑ nt pmvidc fnr device Isvel remvay, but provides a muaiarrm UPpmacb
from device tn davice.
“Measrrge Pm@ Ermf
1% all p+ operating in tbe rarge[ rrrude sbaU rmpnnd tu a “Message Parity Error”
~C =Wd fmm the ioitiator by catering he Statoa Pbaae arrd responding with a
“Cbcck Ckrnditinn”stems. The aensc data shall bs ast tn “CnrmrumicatinnError”.
“Initiator Ekbxtsd Error”
Fur all phaar+ npemdngin the uugst mnde sbd mapnud tu a %driarnr Der@ed Error”
ir=age texerved &om the iaitiater by eotaing iuto Ssatus Phase and responding widr a
“Check Condition” statua. lb sense data aball bs set m “Cnmmrmicatimr Err&.
“Detmed Error”
The deviec shaU rrspmae tn errors dskck.d durirrgbus oansfaa by eetr.ring into Status
Pbaae and rwporrding with a Tlredc Coodition” sortos. TIE amae data abafl be set to
Tmmrmuimtion EmurX
“Umeponable Errnra’
Fur smy other etmr mnditinns not dcacribed above, ths deviee shall rcspend rraioga
‘Casaauopbic Error” (unexfrscted diaeormect).
50.2.1.3 De.sim recmmoendatinns. Ultimately, the systems integmror ia mapnnsible fnr insuring device
mmpatibilry. %%eoeverpuaaible; Ihe tables aad descriptions idsntifkd in 50.2.1.2 abntdd be completed and
agreed UPUUat the begiunieg nf device devekrprmrm.
‘o
109
MIL#;:N&&7c$H)
1 June 1995
110
MIL-STD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
● COmpuler Peripheral Equipment

I I I
External Furdon Raquee4(EFR) Line 1/

<
Exlemal Funotian Aoknmvledge (EFA) Une

*
Outpti channel Inpui Channel

outptd Data Request (ODR) l-ha
I <
Dutpul Data Acknowledge (ODA) Une

>
Ou@ul Data (OD) Una

*
(arrowheads shmv d~ection of signal WV)

1 I/ Not EJIperipheral equipmerrlehave an EFR line, aea lndMdual equipment apacificetion.
FIGURE 1. Oumut cmnmmicadon interface.

I
COmpuier Peripheral Equipmen
I I
External Interrupt Enable (EIE) Une ti
Exlernd Inlenup t Requeel (EIR) Une

<
Inpti Channel Outpul Channel

Input Data Requeal (IDR) line
<
Inprn Data Acknowledge (IDA) Une
Input Data (ID) Una

<
(amnvkada show directiin of signal flow)

I
I/ Not ‘xMW~ have an EIE line, see individualaquipment specification.
FIGURE 2. bout communication interface.
o
111
MIL-STD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
COMPUTER 1 ONE CABLE COMPUTER 2

.A. h
Exiernsl Furction Exlernal Interrupt
Flequeat Line M i Enable Line 1
f I
INTERCOMPUTER NORMAL
OUTPUT
E61m’nalFurrctlon
Acknowledge Line
i External Interrupt
Request Line
1 INPUT
CHANNEL
C“NE
L =
OutPul Data Unes
Eslarnal Interrupt
Enable l-he l/
I
i
I
I
I
Input Data Unca
External Function
Requesl Line I/
I
I
I
NORMAL ExWnal Intemwt I Estemal Funstion - INTERCOMPUTEF

Request Line Acknowledge Line
INPUT < OUTPUT
Innut
r-. Data
——. I
CHANNEL Requ&st Llrra I Ready Une (ODA) CHANNEL
<
I
Inpul Dsta
Acknowledge Une i Resume Une (ODR)
(arrowheads show direcfiin of signal flow)
Y Not all equipments have an EIE or EFR line, see individual equipment apachicatiin.
FIGURE 3. Intercornputer intmface..
112
MTL-sIO-1397C@H)
1 June 1995
+
l---—-
oDR
from pefipheml -
equipmenl
-— -- -
0
0.0 w minimum Peripheral equipmd

-+ sampling time
4 >
16.7 PS mlnlmum
00 eii >
frommmputer
--- —--—
0
4.2 w
minimum
4.3 ps minimum
71 7 ‘
FIGURE4. Type A OUtllUt dam tib~.
113
MIL-STD- 1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
~ *0.o@minimum
l_____
EFR 1121
from peripheral
equipmenf
——— --
0
0.0 ps minimum
4 r-
1
16.7$ minimum
OD Bit *
from comptier
-+ + 4.3 pa minimum
1———-———. --
~————’
EFA
from computer >
——— —
0
lr EFRnotua$d for forced EF.

2/ wenihe EFRisnd protidadby theperipheral, thenlomd EF6kll@UWd.
FIGURES. Me A external function timing.
114
MUXI-D-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
0.0 w
unirnu
4
l-l
0.0 p
0.0 #s
dn urn
w
mhirnum
9
I____ —-.
9m— -
IDR
from peripheral
equipment
o lo%- — -
w
---t 0.0 Us
mini+u
1 -—- —-- —--

WY’
.—— —— L }
IDA
from canpuier , minimum ~ ~ minim.m +/
/
lo%- -—- ——- —— —-
o
FIGURE6. ‘lvpc A illPUt &h IiMine.
115
MJLSTD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
0.0 &s
minimum
1
90%
ID Bii
from peripheral
equipment
e
0.0 @
0.0 @
minimum
minimum
I_____—, -.
90% - —
EIR
from peripheral
equipment
miniium
I_ ——— —__— - —
—-—— —
90% - “
IDA 8.0 p.s
from eemputer minimum
<
—————
0
I.op
meximum
:&%3in.ol.
11 EIESignal notprovided bys0mec0mpuler5
FIGURE7. Type A exfereal interrupl dmieg.
116
MIL-STD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
4-
* 0.0 * minimum
l____—
-0.S Vdc s ——— .——
ODR
from peripheral
equipment
/
1
0.0 w minimum ~
-0.5 Vdc 4P —
r- —
,
.--—
Perfpheml equipment
6ampling time
--
3S! ps minimum
4
Ocl M >
from computer )(I+
o ““+-k ---- --
● -1
*0.5 Wrninimum
l————-——-
——
+
FIGURE 8. Twc B output data ‘m@
117
MIL-STD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
4 ~0.Opsminim.m
1 —-—— —
.-— —
-0.5 Vd;
EFFf ~~
from per!$herel
equipment
/
1-
0.0 w minimum + Peripheral equipment
I
~
1
---- _—
.0.5 Vdc — -
3.2 @ minimum
OD Bti >
trom computer
-3 Vdc _ _ .—— ___
o
z 0.4 Be
minimum
b -7 k- 0.5 pe minimum
~ EFR not wed for forced EF.

~ When the EFR b not prwlded by the peripheral, then forced EF shell be used
FIGURE 9. ~ B external function dmiig.
118
MIL-S’I-D-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
0.0 ps
I_______
T
0.0 ps
mlnimu
0.0 #r
ninknum
swMling level — —
lDFl (we 5.22.21)
from peripheral
equipment ~
. ———
1 -—- ——— ——
7
0.0 p
mlnkn
-0.5 Vdc
IDA
from compuler .1
{ 1 ‘==i\*/
-3v&— —— ____ ———
0
FIGURE1O. Type.B illpllt&la liming.
119
MIL-STD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
0.0 @
minimum
ID Bit
Irom peripheral
equipment
e
0.0 w
0.0 *
minimum
l—-_——- --
——-
Switchinglevel
(sea 5.222.1)
EIR
from periiherel
equipment
o
0.0 p
minimum
1—————-——— - —
_—— ——
-0.5Vdc - “
IDA
from computer
———
0
0.4 p
maximum
EIE must
be reset by
pregram mntrol.
;EzcziSM’
~ EIEsignalnet previdedby some COrnpUleffi.
FIGURE 11. Type B external intermPt dmiig.
120
fvfJL-sTD-1397c(sm
1 June 1995
ODR
from peripheral
equipment
I__——_-—- —- —— --—-—
Peripheral equrpmenl
0.0 ps minimum
o
-.
OD Bii
from computer
0.5 y.s
minimum
o
OC)A
from computer
1 —-—- —---
FIGURE 12. TWXC output Ma !iming.
121
MIL-STD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
EFR llti
from peripheral
equipment
1 ——- -—
0.0 w minimum
o
+2.7 Vdc
00 Bii
from computer
1
0.4 ps
hminimum
+
0.5 rl.s
+0.45 Vdc - ‘
1 ---— ———— -
~ EFR not used for forced EF.

2/ When the EFR is not provided by the peripheral then forced EF shall Ee used.
FIGURE 13. Type C external functiontimiiI.
122
MR-STD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
imimu
4
:!!! r
——
0.0 @ 0.0 *
(i” urn
minimum
7 4
iil
k
from peripheral
equipment Swikhing IW81
(see 52321)
1——— - .—— -
1-
0.0 *
minimum
o 1
+2.7 Vdc-
IDA
from computer
\
+0.45 Vdc _
I____-_-—- -
FIGURE 14. Tmc c inrrut&m dmio~.
123
I
MIL-STD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
0.0 #s
minimu
t+
0.0 )S 0.0 @
minimum minimum
7
1-
o
0.0 p
I
+2.7 Vdc-
IDA
from compuler
+0.45 Vdc
I ____’____
0.4 *
maximum
Y EIE signal nrrfprovided by come computers,
FIGUru3 15. m C exfemal interrupt liming.
124
MIL-STD- 1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
0 ——— ——
ODR
trom parlpheral
equipment
——— -— ——— ——
I____—,
o
——— —.
1.5 ps minimum
OD Bii >
from computer
—————
1
0.4 ps
b
minimum
+L
0.6w
minimum
o
——. — — ——— —.
ODA 0.4 w minimum

from comptier
‘ /H\
———————— ———
1 ——. ——— ——.
FIGURE 16. Tme H outPut data timing.
10
IX
MIL-sTD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
EFR ~21
fromperipheral
equipment
1 ——— ——
Peripheral equipment
minimum 0.0 w
o
——— ——— —
OD Bii
from compuier
1
0.4 pe
minimum
+ +
o.6p5
minimum
o
——— — —— ——— .
EFA 0.4 ye minimum

from compuler
________ ‘ /H\ _——
1 —-—— ——-— .
1) EFRnOtused for fo%ecfEF.

2/ wentie EFRisnd protidedby the~@heral then fOmed EFShallk~ed
FIGURE 17. TYPc H extsrnef functiontiming
126
MIL-STD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
0.0 ps
minimum
. ——
0.0 ps
0.0Jls
minimum
7 h
minknum
1--—- ——- Ik
1-
0.0 p
minimur
o
+2.7 vdc-
IDA
from computer
+o.45vdc —
1—----—-—— -
PIGURE 18. Tme H iIIPllldata timing.

‘e
127
ML-STD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
0.0 us
0.0 ps
0.0 pa ninimum
minimum
7 4
equipment Sww’ling Iwal

(see 5.23.21)
1 —-.—— ——— k
1-
0.0 pa
minimum
o
+2.7 Vdc-
IDA
from compuier
\
+0.45 Vdq . .
I__ —------ —
o__ —— ---
_—— +2.7 Vdc
=Ar’
t- EIE shsll be raaet
0.4 ps
by prngrem control
minimum
_— - ——- #3.45 Vdc

,5 \
~ EIEsignal notprovided bysomecomput6rs
Type H external inturept timing.
122
MIL-STD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
~
Output Request Control Frame (ORCF) (to Transmitter)
Output Enable Control Frame (OECF) (from ‘hmtiur)

FSGI.JRE21.TYPED control frameson an output channel.
129
MfLSTD-1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
I
Nth
Sit X-1
Information bils Word Identifier

., bii
(X is rwrmallytha lengthofthecornpute rwmd)
L=4
!U!mmm
!+vdc-imm-
w Y TIE.ab9ahdevaUm0t-wa
m
!.wet+skallbewUhln
to pmati olti other.
“d””””’
FIGURE 23. Type D output wavefom enwiope.
130
MIL-STD- 1397C (SW

1 June 1995
O.OIIIF *1O%
Tranemiiter
~
Cebinet
signal
ground
ground
Reeeiver
FJGURE 24. TYPS D interface terrnimtion.

,,... . :?*?;**i:::!: 1
.W,”;:*
I “<’”””
““”””””
““””=’’”’%
b---- ~“ “’“’”’’’T;’”””
‘““’7”’
“’””’’”””’”””””
::i::~
1111111111111
Internal
Cleek
Binary
Information
1 1 1 0 0 01 0 1 0 00 Tmnemkted
II (1 timeframe
I per bit)
PulsePhase
Modukd
Signelon
SerialChannel
The pulse phase moduleted eignal h the axclusMe NOR combination of the dsta signal and the cleck signet.
FIGURE 25. TWX D pulse phaseuMdUkUf 5i@.
131
MIL-STD- 1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
SignalCaduster
Y*
[
E
Transmitter Transmitter
SOURCE
Transceiver
~
Inner
Shield) \/f
(return) =
Cwler
Shiam
=
\ln.er
Shield
(return)
SINK
Transceiver
Er-
C&net Ckiinet
gmmf ground
Resaimr Romfvar
SOS control and Information Frames
S1S Cenfrol Fremes

4
v
Signsl sind
Ground Ground
FIGIJIQ6. Tme E seurcc to sink interconnectiondia,emm.
INTERFACE A INTERFACE B
SOURCE &y+ + s~-( SINK
———— ————
SERIAL SERIAL
CHANNEL CHANNEL
———— ————
SINK 4-y-( SOURCE
FIGURE 27. ~ E interface signal flow diegram.
132
MIL-STD- 1397C(W)
1June 1995
—
, St b~ 2nd bit ~rd Mti ~th M,. SOURCE OUTPUT BUFFER STATUS
(sync) (Data) (C/f) (s0s 10)
1 0 0 0 Source has no InformationWord(s) to send.
1 1 0 0 Source has Data Word(s) (bui no Commandllnterrupt

Word ) to send.
1 0 1 0 Source has a GammsndllnterruptWord (but no Dats
Word(a)) to send.
1 1 1 0 Source has both Dats Word(a) and a CommsndOnterrupt
Word to asnd.
“ Earfier rav~tons of this standard dafined this bfi es bahg “Rasemed:
FfGURE 28. TVPCE SOS control frame wmtem.s.
:0 p-.
+,,..,
,,.,
,.. . . ..,,.=,.
“
— ~——.. . .— m-.=
1
,Stbn Snd bit 3rd bit ~th Mt . SINK INPUT BUFFER STATUS
(Sym) (Data) (CA) (S1S ID)
1 0 0 1 Sink Is not ready to acaepl any Infonndon Word(a).
1 1 0 1 Sink la onfy raady to asaepl Data Word(a).
1 0 1 1 Sink Is only raady to accspt Cmnmncfllnferrupt Word.
1 1 1 1 Sink is ready to accept either Data Word(s) or a
Command Interrupt Word.
“ Earfier ravi?Jomof this stsndard defined this bt as being “Resewed.”
FIGURJ329. TYW E S1Sconuol fmme contents.
133
MIL-STD- 1397C(Ski)
1 June 1995
INPUT TO PARITY GENERATION
“., “.”... ”””.4 ..”. -”-.. .. .. .. .. . . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. - - - - - = - .
11[11
Sync Word Bii
Bii ID o
.“, “,”.,.-., ‘~
,“.”,”.”,,,!,,,,,,,,,”.,,,”-—. - . - s - - . slmT
-
First bit ~ Data BidFIOW ~ Last bt
sent sent
SINGLE WORD TRANSFER
INPUT TO pARITY GENERATION INPUT TO PARITY GENERATION

WORD 1 WORD 2,3,4,.. .32
~~
Firstbit ~ Data Bii Flow ~ Last bti

sent sent
BURST TRANSFER
FIGURE 31. TYPeE parily blt generation.
134
MIL-sTD-1397C (SH)
1 June 1995
I FIGURE 32. Tw E Ou~ut waveformenmlom.
135
MIL-STD- 1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
FIGURE33. Tyue E input wavefmm envelope
●
13b
MIL-STD-1397c (S~
1June 1995
,0
-5
-10
-15
ig
- on
-G”
-25
-30
-35
-40
45
I -50
FREQUENCY(MHZ)
m lndi~t.saw.pbble r.t.rn b..
FIGURX34. Tw!e E sink rem 10ss refile
‘o
137
I
MIL-STD-1397C (SH)
1 June 1995
Channel
Startup
E
u B
2
T u
N Y
Clw
ready
?
N
N Y
N Data
N ready
?
,
ClearSit set sit
in SOS h SDS
start Saurm
N
N
clear sit Ser m

in S(X3 h SOS
I
k
8-?’ +3
Transmit 1=
Sos
start
2U0w
Tmer
N cd
N
sat Saxco
linwxl
Indicator
SIs
Y
Received
7
D
FIGURE 35. tl of a.
138
IVIIL-STD-1397C(SW
1 June 1995
Y
A
I Y
GenetaW N
Parily Bit
ham
s
M
N
I
?
Y
PUtIW intoIF
PutCIWrntolF
3-1
TransmitIF
6- ew-sl
Trnnder
Enawd
-7
Y
N
Nw
?
Y
a
Get Next datafor
Transmission
d
‘f
Lastlw
Tmmmittd
7 F
N
FIGURE 35. ~
139
MIL-STD-1397C (WI)
I June 1995
(E.M AL
&
N
Y
inkTtmec.ut
Implemented
?
N
Y
9
A
Reset
1.5 rm Tuner
A% &
N Ready ‘f ‘i
Y
for CW .5 ms Xmer
? Started
clear sit Set Sit ?
in Sls in S1S N
I I start
1
1.5 mf+limer
4% N R=dy y
3
for da N
? 1.5 msTrmr
a= sit set sit Exceeded
in S1S in S1S ?
Y
N
sil.5ms
Tmer Indicator
N Trm from n@ement
IasfSOS/IF N ?
-all
Y
Y7 Y Sat Sinkt.5 ms
Tmer limeoti
Indicator
N l-meflwn
fasfsos / IF
- lW
~ 7
FfGURE 36. Sink flow di aemm (S beet 10 f 2}.
140
MIL-STD-1397C (SH)
1June 1995
9
D
62 &al
N “Ilknmaoul 7
lmplanlf3nlad N
7
Raady y
Y W Crw
Raady N
Rasot forda 7N
l.Sms Tmar 7
Y
I %mad EF y
Snra 32 Sit Enabled
datawed 7
Y
Sel sink EJegal

conditionInolcator
m
Reee&ed Rtied
? 7
Y~y
Parity N
Ccmac.1
7
6
YF
A
FfGURE 36. Sink flow d iaemm LSLW 2 of ~.
o
141
MIL-STD- 1397C (SH)

1 June 1995
I ‘ 1° I ‘ 1’ I
ELECTRICAL
BIPOWR + VOLTAGE
- VOLTAGE
OPTICAL AUTOMATIC
UNIPOLAR RETURN TO
I ZERO
FfGfJRE37. Type 1 waveform modulation
●
PARAMETER PARMETER DEFINITION Tx INTERFACE ~ INTERFACE
The high-state epfiiel pewer level. -13 dBm to -7 dEm -31 dBm to -6 dBm
‘H
The low-state optkxl power level Ihreehold. (o.i)PH m=. (o.l)PH mm
‘L
PT The peak-le-peak wershoet end undershoot (0.15)PH mex (o.15)PH max.
for eilher risingor the failing edges.
The median eptical power level. (0.5) (PH - PL)
‘M
T The bit Interval is 100 neneseeonds (nominal). 94 to 104 naneseccmds
T/2 Pulse width:

Nominel value. 44 to 56 nanoseconds
First end last bits only. 42 to 66 nanoseconds
TR, TF Thel Oto 90 % ise end fall times equafe
the time interval between 12 nanoseconds mtimum
(O.l)(PH-PL)+PL and (o.9)(PH-P~)+p~
Absloute value of the difference of the (se end 6 nanoseconds maximum

I TR-TF I
fell times.
FIGURE 38. TYPeloptiti waveform
142
NUL-STD-1397C(sH)
1 June 1995
Hall Duplex Cfd)le

(Two Fiber)
1
2
3
SE 4
yT=g[
/
Four Pin ChTV3SiOr
FIGURE 39. MIS J half duplex inuafacs
o
I
la
Tx
E
%%
1
2 0
3 0
4
%=
/ Tx
\ Four Pin COnnWtOr
FfGURE 40. Tw J full duplex imerface
143
●
LogicO Logic 1 Off (High Impedance) Logic 1 Lcgic O Ofl (High Impedance)
v.. I I I I I
.“,,
—-————
. . . .
,..
,..
I ------ - -.. .
V;@.5V . . . . . . . . .
,...’. . . —
. . . . . .
—-—- —— —-——
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . .
. . .
,..
. . .
. .
Vol . .
IIsiil Eia’ ‘ ‘ ‘
SMOJ18ueet.veq
614SSOJCJ
ojez
I I I I
t) I
.—— ——— ~ _—— ——— —’ ——— L—— —__— ,—
. . . . .
————
—. .,....
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
.— -----
. . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
.—”: -- ,—— ——— :., ,,, , ,,,
. . . .
. . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . .
....... ..,,.
. . . ........ I
..,,..
. . . I
I
.........
........ I .————
+__/
.——. ..— ——————— ...... ———————-
.......
(empeduq q6!H) UO”
I I
o C@ol
U I 31601 I
(~~Pd~l@lH)Ud
L/.l@l I O’@07 ‘b”W
●
● ●
Logic O Logic 1 CM (High Impadance) Logk Logic O

lznsmex (High lm~edanca)
12n9nmx
ii 1
v.. ‘?.EW ‘w
$
.—.
———— -
I
I
-— --- \I
‘- ,l--im I
12mmex 12nsmex i2nsmax
Bllzzl” “ H
MIL-STD-1397C (SEII
1 June 1995
Device W II Hull
Terrrpower a
Coupling Dinde
=: “;’
V Signal Ground (Reference)
~ Chassis Ground
~ WIefy Ground (Earth)
N Number of ground wires
FfGURE 45. TYIEK multiooint imerwnnecl diagrsm. (Sheet 1 of 2)
MS
MJJATD-1397C (.SH)
1 June 1995
, ,:,..
C!urmrusi
ra=rsmli----
~ Chassis Ground
~ safety Ground (Earth)
N Number of ground WirBS
FIGUKE 45. ~ K multipoiot inbxconned diagrfim. (Sh@ 2 Of 2)
●
149
I
I
MIL-STD- 1397C(SW
1 June 1995
+5 V (nominal)
silicon diode
FIGURE 46. TYT e K rnutec!ioocircuit
150
MIL-STD- 1397C(SW
1 June 1995
Parameter Description Min. Max. Units

AD Arbitration DOIEY 2.4 ps
AP Assertion Period 90 ns
BCD Bus Ctear Delay 800 ns
BFD Bus Free Daley 800 ns
BSO Bua Set Dalay 1.8 pe

SSLD Bus Settle Delay 400 ns
CSD Cable Skew Delay 10 ns
DUD Deta Relaaae Dalay 400 ns

DD Deakew Delay 45 ns
●
DSCD Disconnection Delay 200 ~e
HT Hold Time 45 ns
NP Negation Period 90 ns
POST Power On Selection ?lme 10 s
RTST Reae{ to Selection Time 250 ma

RHT Reeet Hold Time 25 ps
SAT Selection Abort Time 200 pa

STOD Selection Time-out Delay 250 ms
Transfer Period 4 na
I 7iming pararmofareI!!ed above are ter timing ca!culationa In figuraa 4S through 54.
ti
u In some oaaaa rrdnlrrrumtiming paramofera I!sted abeva may be uaad aa a maximum value In the Implied
1 aquatione in figuraa 4S through S4.
FIGURE 47. T ypa K boaedmingoarrunetera
151
MIL-STD-1397C (w)
1 June 1995
PHASE 81EFran
:~:
T2
o
<RST>
1
I 0
&sY> 1
0
<SEb
:
d-w> 1
Parameter Description Implied Equation Min. Max. Units

T1 RESET aetwe to release of all Bus s!gnsls BCD SW rls
T2 RESET Hold Time RHT 25 - ps
T3 RESET Recovery Time RTST 250 m
I/ Refer to psragrsph 5.8.1.8.1.1.

Z Non-specified parameters shsll be represented by ‘-”.
W Not to scele.
FIGSJKE 48. ‘Me Kmse4dming
152
MIL-STD- 1397C(Sf-f)
1 June 1995
● PHASE ~ SUSFme)( &t6raImn x

✏
2dncrbn ‘;,
o
?1
o
<RSTB
1
o
<SSY>
1
o
<SEb
1
o
.4-M.
1
o
41SGB
1
o
Ccb
1
0
<IG
1
0
<REb
1
I o
dck.
1
0
<DAT
1
I Note2

T4 SSY and SEL Inadivete SUS FREE F+IES3 asLo a - ns
T6 Bus FREE to SrnrlorAltlii (esY Sstive) SFo Soo - m
T6 SUSY adve b Ssisslacwa (Abilmtim) An 24 - ps
T-r SELECTasliveto Safacth ID and AllN adive aco+esLD 12 - W!
T6 SELECTadive 10rdassa of loserAtMImtbntits m Soo ns
T9 Selecti.mID / AITN activeb releaseof BSY 2(00) 90 - W
TIo SEL 6cW to SSY Inacbve SCD+SSLO+2(DD) 129 - w
T11 tnltiror SSY me toTmgsl SSY .@ve SAT zoo w
T12 SSY adivmto SEL refm.% 2(DD) 20 - m
T13 SEL fndve IDMSQ I CD 110 change o - ns
u Refer to paragraph 5.S.1.8.1 .2.

2/ No Arbffretioneflewed after one (1) BSD unless bus remains In Sus Free Phase.
3 Lewer Prlorffy Devcee drop their Arbiition ID bits.
41 The negated 10 line Indkafss Selection.
5/ Whsnever a dgnel trnneftienIs required 10 followbul nd Lxeoedeamther sfgneftrwdion, the
Specified F4VSMafWfer Ihls relatiirwhfp shall be a minimum value of O rw in the parameter cherl.
Q1 Non-spesffied psramefera shell be represented by ‘---
w Not to scale.
FIGURE 49. TYCICK arbinationhelcaion timing
153
MIL-STD- 1397C(SH)
1 June 1995
o
PHASE 1
0
<RST> 1
0
<SSY> 1
0
<SEb 1
0
4TN, 1
0
<MSGW 1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Parameter I Description Implied Equation

SSLD
Min. M=.
400 –
Units
ns
01
3SY and SEL inactive to SUS FREE phese
l+--! ,“ , BUS FREE 10start of Arbhtion (BSY actwe) BFD 800
2.4
-
–
ns
Ils
I TG I BUSY active to Select ective (Arbiiretion) AD
I SCD+BBLD I 1.21 -IPS I
.
. ,SELECT active to Seldion ID and 10 active
t T8 [ SELECT actiie to release of loser Arbitrationbtis I SCD I .. I SOolns
I T9 Iniliator ID/ Tsrget ID / AITN activa

to release of BSY
2(DD)
BCD+SSLD+2(DD)
9ol–na
1.29 - pa
TIO SEL amtive to SSY Inactiie
Initiitcor BSY inactiie to Targat BSY activa MT 200 pa
T11
BSY ective to SEL relsasa 2(DD) 90 - m
T12
T13 SEL inactive to MSG / CD / 10 change I .. I o I
10 eclwe to SSY inactive (Reselection) I 2(DD) 90
I/ Refer to paragraph 5.8.1.8.1.3.

Z/ No Arbitration allowad after one (1) BSD unless bus remaina in Bus Free Phaae.
W Lewer Priority Devic&sdrep their Arbitration ID bits.
~ The easerted 10 he indicstee Reselection.
5/ Whanever a signal transition is required to follow bul not precada another signal trartsftion,the
apecifiad persmater for this relationshipshall be a minimum value of O ns in the parameter chart.
Ill Non-specified parameter shall be reprssanted by “-”.
ZI Not to scale.
FIGURE 50. ~W K arbltmUordrcSeL%UOn
dmhg
154
MIIATD-1397C (m
1 June 1995
I PHASE lntwnmlbn
Tmne.WIn (?&uIn,Oat.aIn,SWIJS)
<SSY>
o
1
o
<SEb
1
o
&TN>
1
o
<MSGICD>
1
+1~
12A
T28 m o
<m.
1
118 I
. . o
/ 1
I T211
I I I o
.ArK.
1
!,
o
<DAT
1
*
Parameter Description lmpllsd Equation Min. Max. Units
’18 ~ Trar!sfac REO aatt#eb AC?(aotive - 0 - na
T20 As@mmus Transfer ACKacliw m RE9 fnaative - 0 - na
T22 Asy&mws Transfet REQ inm%ive
to ACX ireIUtua - 0 - na
T2s Asy’rd’uaewus a aalive
Tranafec ACKinadva to REC - 0 - na
T24 fst ACKCML4e10
MSG/C O/10 CfMItfP I 01-l r-s
T25
T26
IO acdveto initiatordriversdiaded
10 ~ to Taruetdrfvaramabfad DRD + BSLD Soo
I 4oo
-
ina
na
I
T2T InpurTransfer Data aatupto REQ ac@m CSD + DD 55 - rts
T28 As@uolNTranafec Dela HoHlfImfrom ACK~e - 0 - m
I/ Refer to pamgmph 5.8.1.8.1.4.

ZI Whenavar a signal tran?dtionis raquirad to fofbw but not precede another signal tmnsftlon,the
specified paremelar for this retatiomsfdp shall be a minimum value of O na in the parameter charl.
W Nowapdfied parameters shall be rwresentad by “-”.
~ Alloweble phase combinations are aa foflows
~
w Not to scale.
FIGLfRE51. TyueKa.syncbmnous informationrmmfeztirnirw input Oansfets-- lamet to inidator
us
MIL-STD-1397C (WI
1June 1995
Note9 0
PHASE ~ lnfotmmhm
‘hn%r CM fMsaCM.DataO@.Cm@
1
o
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Pammater Description lmplled Equafiin Min. Max. Unifs

T15 10 inactive to TaI@ d!fvemdwlad DRD m m
T16 10 inactie to Itidafordivas et-I&4cd DRD + SSLD S03 - m
T17 MSG/CD /lOchmILIe to REO atie Ssf.o 400 - m
TI 6 AsymSmnousTransfer REQ active@ACKactive - 0 - m
T19 Datasetupto ACKactive(C@ut transfers) CSD + DD 55 - m
T2u ASYIchmnousTranslec ACKacdvefo REQ inactiwe - 0 - !?s
T21 Data Hcidllme Imm REO inactie (Cutpuflmnsfers) - 0 - m
T2z ASYTK5mncus Transfer REO inaclfveto AU( inaciive – o - m
T22 &wchmnous Ttarsfec ACKinecfiveto REQ active - 0 - m
T24 W ACKactiveto MSG/ CD / IO charKIa o - m
T29 MSG OUT phase AITN inactiveto lestACKacffve 2(DD) 90 - m
Y Referto paragraph5.6.1.6.1.5.
a Whenevera signalbansitionis mqdmi to tallowbutnotprecedeanothersignalfmn.shn, the
srdkl parameterforLhiirdaticmhff * be a mimimumvafueof 0 m M the parameterchart.
Y Non_$.eatiedparametersshaflbe reprascatd by “-”.
9 Aflowablephasemmtinationsare as foflows
~
H Notto scale.
FIGURE 52,
1%
MIL-STD- 1397C(W)
1June 1995
o
PHKiE DamIn q
{ 1
o
<SSY>
1
o
<SEls.
1
<MSG>
o
1
o
&D>
1
T% TsOm Tss T24 +
o
<IG 4 1
I o
<REG m+
Ts4 1
Nc4a~ —o
.x36 —
1
14R37
o
<DAT
I 1
Parameter Dascrfption Implied Equation Min. Max. Units

T24 LaafACKdive to MSG / CD 110 shsnge o - na
’25 10 We to Irdtiatorddvwadiaatkd DRD 400 na
ID+ SSLD aoo - na
’32
’34
I SynchTransfer REQ inac~e to naxlREQ active
I SynchTtanafec ACKpulseMdth
I NP
I AP
MI eol-lna
EIol-lna
I
T35 ~SynchTmnsfec ACK hmclive b nd ACK aefive NP 90 - ns
T36 ] SynchTransfec ACKactiveto REO adve o - ns
T3T I SynofrIN Transfer Dab Hc4dTfmeaffarREO active C.SD+DD+HT 100 - na
Ffeferto paragraph 5.8.1.8.1.6.

Whenever a signaf transition is required to folbw but not praeade another signal transtion, the
specified PSrama!er fOrthis relationshipshall baa mhnimumvalue of O ns in Ihe parsmater chart.
Non-spaeified paramatars ahafl ba raprssanfsd by “-o.
Synchronous offset for the purposes of ths diagram shall ba aef102.
The maximum transfer rate shall be nagotiatad tia the maaaage ayatem. T32 and T35 on the timing
disgram shall be dependent upon the negotiitad rate and shall be 90 m minimum.
Not to scale.
FIGfJRE 53. Type K synchronousdafs transfer dmin~ input tmmsfers– targel m initiator
157
MIL-STO-1397C (Sf-f)
1 June 1995
o
Pfii@E -( ownour ) 1
o
<RST>
1
o
<MSG>
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

’15 10 inacfiia to Target drivers disabled DRD 400 na
’16 10 inatiwa to Iniator drkfers ensbled DRD + SSLD 600 -- na
’19 Dstssa@r to ACKactive(O@ul trsnafers) CSD + DD 55 – ns
’24 LastACKactiveto MSG I CD 110 change o .. ns
’30 SynchTransfec REO puke width AP 90 - ns
’31 SynohTranafec REQ activeto ACKacWe o - ne
’32 SynohTransfer REQ inactiveto nti REQ aoava NP 90 - m
‘3 3yrrchTransfec ACK$uIsewidth AP 90 - ns
’35 SynchTranafac ACKinactiveto naxrACKscdvs NP 90 - rrs
T36 synchTransfer ACKactiveto REO aclive o .. m
T37 SynchIN Transfer Dats Holdlime afterREQ acbie C6D+DD+I-IT 100 -- ns
1 Refer 10psrsgrsph 5.8.1.8.1.7.

ZI Whenever a signal transition is required to follow bui nof pracede another algnal transition, the
specified parameter for this relationshipshall be a mimimum value of O ns in the parameter chart.
& Non-spacifiad parameters shall be represented by “-”.
41 Synchronous offset for the Purposas of lh~ diagrsnr shall be sat to 2.
~ The maximum transfer rate shall be negotiated via tha massage system. T32 and T35 on the timing
diagram shall be dependent upon the nagotiitad rate and shall be 90 ns minimum.
& Not to scefe.
FIGURE 54. TW K syncbmnous data Uansfer timing ourput oansfefs -- idiator 10rwel
158
NlIL3TD- 1397C(W)
1 June 1995
I I
I LS2LJ-45CABLE PAIRS
MIL-C-28S40 CONNECTOR PIN DEFINITION
FIGURE 55. TVPC K cable w ad eannector Pin dIagmrn
‘a
159
MIL-STD- I 397C (sm.

1 June 1995
EXTERNAL FUNCTION REQUEST (EFR)

*
PERIPHERAL
EXTERNAL FUNCTION ACKNOWLEDGE (EFA)
HGURS 56. Exmrnalfunction operations
●
OUTPUT DATA REQUEST (ODR)
L
>
PERIPHERAL
OUTPUl DATA ACKNOWLEDGE (ODA)

<
FIGURE 57. Output data opemtions
MI
MIL-STD- 1397C (WI)

1 June 1995
lNPIIT DATA REQUEST (IDR)

*
——— ———.. —.- . ----- ...._.
PERIPHERAL COMPUTER
INPUT DATA ACKNOWLEDGE (IDA)

4
FIGURE 58. Input dam operations
PERIPHEIWL ,..,+,.{EICI’ERNAL l~—~RUPT STATUS W~i@ COMPUTER

-....—
I I
FIGURE 59. Exmml in!crruutoperations
161
MIL-STD-1397C (SH)
1 June 1995
COMPUTER 1 COMPUTER 2
I
External Function I External Interrupt
Request Line (EFR) Enable Line (EIE)
<
External Function I External Interrupt
OUTPUT Aelmowiedge Line (EFA) Reqwsl Une (EIR)
> INPUT
I lwut Data
CHANNEL CHANNEL
Ready Line (ODA) Request Lhm (IDR)
>
I
Irlplll Data
I%aume Une (ODR) I Acknowledge Une (ID.A)
< I
,
I
Outpui Data Limes (OD) Input Data Lima (ID)
>
I
*
J_
I
Extmnal Interrupt I Exlemal Function
Enable Urm (EIE) Raqueat Une (EFR)
*
External Interrupt I External Funetlon
Request Line (EIR) 1 Ackrnwledge Line (EFA)
INPUT < oLITPIJr
I
CHANNEL Req%mL;~lDR) I Ready U.. (ODA) CWNNEL
<
I
Inpul Data
I
Acknowledge Line (IDA) , Resume Line (ODR)
>
I
Inpul Data Unea (ID) Output Data Llrms (00)
<
I
,(arrowheads show direction of signal flow)
FIGURE 60. Computer-to-computer interfarx
h52
MUATD-1397C (S-o
1 June 1995
m
1 1
k
PUNCHLOGIC t=
CONTROLLOGIC
~
1=READER LCGIC
I
I
“T. Al
lEE5r-
I -!-
—
(
3 5
(
I
I
L —
COMPUTER INPUTCH4NNEL
COMPUER OUTPUTCWEL
FIGURE 61. Punched time.unit block diagmn
163
MIL-STD- 1397C (SH)

1 June 1995
COMPUTER EXTERNAL FUNCI’ION CODE
NDT USED 10 987 654

I L
R
:
!5
z
INPuT ERROR —
DISASLE READER
DISASLE PUNCH
ENABLE READER
ENASLE PUNCH
MASTER CLEAR
FIGURE 62. Extend function WOKiformat
●
164
MIL-STD-1397C (sI+)
I June 1995
Terminator
Power
L“”ohms’”
~“”ohms’”
--t’’”ohms’” —
FIGURE 63 TYPP/K bus rennination
‘o
165
MIL-STD-1397C (WI)
1 June 1995
COMPUTER 1 ONE CABLE COMPUTER 2
+ I
INTERCOMPUTER
oLrrPLrr
CHANNEL
-=-L--I’;ERE”E
o@wt Dala Lines I Input Dats Unss
>
i
I
I
I
“ERCX2MPUTER I INTERCOMPLITEF
Actke Line Inpul Buffsf
1 >
INPUT oLmPLrr
Input Data I
CHANNEL Rsqusst Line I Ready Line CHANNEL
<
Inpui Data
I
Aoknowfedge Line Resume Une
>
I
Inpwt Data Lln* Outpul Data Linss
<
I
ONE CABLE
(srmwheads show diresfion of signal flow)
FIGURE64. CP-642A intsrwmpwer intsrface
165
MtL-sTD-1397c (WI)
1 June 1995
●
ONE l/O CABLE cP-e42A
NON-CP-64ZA
+
a~~~~I”L~~ I lI@ BMw Active U..
< I
External Function External Interrupt
I Request Line
Acknowledge Line INPUT
oLfTPLrr 1 *
I Inpul Data
CHANNEL Request Line CHANNEL
Ready Line >
I
I Input Data
Resume Une I Acknowledge Une
<
Ouipui Data Lines I Input Oata Lfn=

>
I
I
I I L
—
1
External Imwrupt I
Enable Ltne Inpul Buffer AetMe Line
>
External Intenupt I
R6quesl Une ~
INPUT < OUTPUT
Input Data I
CHANNEL Ready Line CHANNEL
Requ=t Line I
<
Input Data
I
Acknowledge Llrw Ffe5ume Une
, >
I
Inpul Data Lines Outpul Data Lines
<
I
ONE l/O CABLE
I
I/ No CXmnecfion (arrowheads show direction of signal flow)
FIGURE 65. Non-CP-642AJCP-@2A inkrcompuw interface
167
MWSTD- 1397C (SH)

1 June 1995
500Kl
400K—
100K-
(
200 400 600 &Jo 1000
CABLE LENGTH (IT)
U Maximum Iengih is unclear in specifmtion.

21 Fiber optic application may work up to several Idometers.
FfGURE 66, Effea.s of cable Ienmbon channel Ibmugbput
168
MIL.4TD-1397C (w-l)
1 Juoe 1995
——.————————
I TERMINAL I
SCOPE
I
30* 2 meters I
MIL-C-17 (TRF-8)
qm ... ... ..... ..... ....... ...
...... ...... ......
g ....... ...... ......
....... ...... ......
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEST
WAVEFORM
GENERATOR & OUTER SHIELD = TX/ RX CARD
CHASSLSGROUND - I
I !
L ——-——————— J
4X3
ns >1
k PeriodIn whii
●
I
750 mV-—
Ov
TrrineHi~ere+7 m“
I I
I TEST REFLECTED
WAVEFORM
I WAVEFORM !
FlGURE67. ‘Me Ereflcctiontcstw-uQ
169
MIL-STD-1397C (SH)
1 June 1995
,—
——- ————————
SCOPE I TERMINAL I
. ..., .,,
II
.
I
60* 2 meters TX/ RX CARD

MlL-C-l 7 (TRF-8)
....
. . . . .. ::::::
+{
OUTEFISHIELD . -
I
CHMSISGROUND ,
I ——-———————-
1 Period in M*
4oorM I VN Is measured
<
?
I
J I_ :
‘ISz&
I TEST 1: I
WAVEFORM REFLECTED
I I I
(1001) WAVEFORM I
I
FIGURE 68, TweEmwsi&w~_elnoi*~tSt-up
170
STANDARDIZATIONOOCUhlENT IMPROVEMENT
PROPOSAL
INSTRUCTIONS
●z.
~ww=@_mU~mWletObl*
me submlf!nr
l,22end8. ~bl~ l.~~@mmmen~ nUm~~~d(~~Onl@r*Uld~g~n.
of this form mum WMpl.3tn blocks 4.5, 6, and 7.
3. TM pmpmlng acNvlfy mum prwlde a reply within W day% Imm receipt ot fhls form
NOTE mfa form maY mm tM d 10 rawest ‘wPl~ d dmfmena nor fLI -* *~. 01 @fl=@n of Mufm- ‘n mmm
conbacm. Canmmnta wbmftted on this form do nof mnsdbn. or imply mfhodzatlon to waive any portion of tie timnmd dmment(s)
Usoanmndmnfmctud requlmmenta.
. 1. 00CWENTNM3ER 2. 00CUNENT
OATE(WFVCO)
~ ,xE&& : ~HvGE:
MIL-STD-1397C(SH) 950601
.,’:: .,, :
3. OOUfWNTTITLE
INPUTiOUTPUT INTERFACES, STANOARD OIGITAL OATA , NAVY SYSTEMS
4. MATURE
Of CN4N6E(identtty paragraph nuuberand Include proposed rewlte. if possible. Att6ch extra sheets aS needed.)
5. REASON
FCC!REIXWWIOATION
6&WfWJsWRrA&&&”’ .“. ~..

ai~:~~~l~$~$l,~~:rn~ le ~,ft~~~. b. CR6UUATION
-.::..s:;..,.+ .! ~~~
: .~,..,:,A7!.:,.W;,,..:$?”,..,:i,:<,,,,
d. TfLEPNOfiE(1f?cl@6 Area -) 7. OATE SV3NSTTE0 (-)
8. PREPNIIN6ACTIVITY
A. Technical
NME Point of Contact (TPOC) b. TELEPHONE (1 nclude AW We)
(1) Cmnercial: OSN:
MR. JAMES R. BABCOCK NRaO Code 823
ADORESS ALL CORRESPONDENCE AS FOLLOWS: TPOC : 619-553-1075 8-553-1075
c. ~ESS (Include ZIP Code) IF YOU M NOT RECEIVE A REPLY WITHIN 45 OAYS. CoNT.4cT:
~%NOER , NAVAL SEA SYSTEMS CDM?4AND
Oefense@al ity and Standardization Office
: SEA 03R42 5203 LeesburgPike, Suite 1403
~ 1 JEFFERSON DAVIS HIGHMAY Falls Church, VA 22041-3466
INGTON , VA 22242-5160 Telephon6703-756-2340 OSN289-2340
00 FORM 1426, OCT 89 Previous editions are obsolete. 1WIZ90

Mil STD 1397C

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mil STD 1397C

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com on 2009-07-25T15:19:13.

DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY

fnpuL/ CWUt fnterfacc.s, Standard Digital Data. Naw SYSMIIS

1. _fhisbliliw Standard is approved for me by h Nav~s= SYSEXIIS COIIIIXW@ @.W’MEIIIof

Page Intentionally Blank.

5. DfZfAfLED ~Q~~NTS .................................................................... 8

31.6- Us~gWpmp*kw~lsi~ds,,tie ~tition_iv=~fumtion tima

b.ic ~:.f-~~~~~m~~~~k~~~~ n-”fbi”’

‘o 3.3.4 Connectm re$c.D!aclc.The fixed half of a comection that is mounted on a panehdfdscad.

3.3.11 Power (UPticel). l-he radian! pnwer, expstwd in watts.

a wavelmgtbs, at wlucb Ibe spectral A Iant UstcnsltyIs 50%nftb e tmximmn power.

3.5 Acronyms. Acronym nsed in this standard are defined m follows:

f?amc of line I D~tiOn of signal I Fuaction

TABLE IL Function of input channel control lines.

5.2.3.2 Tvpe C interface, CUCUiL

● 5.2.4 T e H interface. The Type H imerfacc sbalf be characterizedby nominal values of

5.3.5 Catwory I irmt cbsrsnel ouemtiou. ‘k oanatilon of fD W d ~ We m a mmpu~

5.3.6.1 lC EF sequence. When the mmsrrrirdngmrnputer is ready rn mmsurit an EF arrdtie receiving

c. time exccedcd. If tis time cxcceds 20 IISthe ccmrputcrshall bc required to

j. Tisrdng requimmnts of the bipnler pulses alrsflbe as shown nn tigum 23.

TABLE fv. TWSCEsnurmmsun me tn S1S mm-cd fsmm.

S.4.3 -. TkEType E in&rfacz timing between frames shall be as shown in table V.

Respnmibiliiy Fmm To Tires Inkrvaf

5.4.7.6 Cnnunl frarnc til&tion. When irrrpfer=nti, tie mn~l ~ VDU~m ~ O_ W

5.6 Type G interface Refer to RS449/RS-232 (RS-449 compatible wi~ RS-232).

5.7.4 0 ticaf reqeirenamta.

5.7.5 Transmitter nmicaf interface.

5.7.6 Receiver ooacal imcrfam.

%~~~ SIG~~+)md SIGNAL(-) rn-stat.%fcirctitimpedassms~be grearerthan IOK

0 the following output charm trmsurx

M&-:,~~M,volwe~ ktwwn,tieSIGN~+) mdSIGNU-)h. dSiCbiS,,SS

5.8.1.6.9 Additional phvsicaf apeeitlcatirrns.

Harnms Chruacrcri.stic Impedance 90 to 132 ohm (122 Ohmr nominal)

5.8.1.7 TYPC K bus signals.

The following si@s shall be used to tmnsfer digital words of

~-~e~siti $dlLw.nrrnfl.by thc.bsrget TbeUDsignal sbalfindicate

a. Bus Free phSSe

5.8.1 .8.1.4 . Tlledmirsgoftfle

oansfer. When implemmtcd, syncfunnoua &w hanafer slulf bc in

6.2 Subiect term (key wurd) listing.

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

CABLES, lNTERFACE CfRCUfTS, AND GENEW4L f/O Philosophy

20. REFERENCED DOCUMBNTS

20.1 GovcrmrEn t Ifnctmmts.

MllX-171134 - Cnbk, Rodio Fmqucmy, Triaxird, 0.245 fnch, SO Ohm.

- Cmmeuom, Fiber Opt@ J Cirmdar Pkug arid Receptacle Style,

(Copies of specit%ations required by cmmrretnrs in camuection with ~ific aequiskion functions

~wti;~~_~~=ti’~@,of= msxmrumb’=Wow”&~&on th.?cab,e~~rindthe

TABLE VI. Maximum cable lengths (feerhreters).

Interface I Cable type

Type E TRF-8 uiaxiaf cable TR&58BW cable

Type RG-12A maxie.1 cable.

c. Cables for tbe Type E interfa~

TRF-8 oiaxird cable’ (MILC-17/135)

d, CabIe for Type J irnerfaoz

e. Cables for the Type K interface

30.3 Cable connczmrs

TABf..E VfI. CnmPuta ccaurectnra and cable rmes (parallel~.

T~e cntrqrnter frmction cabinet connector Cable cnaneuor

30.3.4 T . The computer md periphemf equipmcat Type K cormcclms

xx caa be any one of the foUowiag

Function 120-Pirr I 90-Pin 85-Pin

b.ic ~:.f-~mk n-”fbi”’

%~ SIG+)md SIGNAL(-) rn-stat.%fcirctitimpedassms~be grearerthan IOK

~wti;_=ti’~@,of= msxmrumb’=Wow”&~&on th.?cab,e~~rindthe

L–-–-–- – ___ —